Home

Operating Instructions

1. Supervisor on device PROFIBUS Supervisor Device e g PC e g CU320 PB CBE20 PB Topology1 PROFINET IO supervisor Supervisor Device Controller e g PC e g S7 CPU e g S7 CPU ET CBE20 PB PB PN Topology2 Supervisor on controller PROFIBUS Supervisor Device Controller e g PC e g CU320 e g S7 CPU PB CBE20 PB PB PN Topology3 Figure 6 33 Connecting the supervisor NOTICE SINAMICS does not support routing from PROFIBUS to PROFINET and vice versa NOTICE If a CBE20 module fails e g due to a power failure then communication with the subsequent nodes is interrupted at this point Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 187 Operation 6 7 PROFINET IO 6 7 5 RT classes 6 7 5 1 Description RT classes for PROFINET IO PROFINET IO is a scalable realtime communications system based on Ethernet technology The scalable approach is expressed with three realtime classes RT The RT communication is based on standard Ethernet The data is transferred via prioritized Ethernet telegrams IRTflex SW functionality planned for FW2 5 SP1 The t
2. 2 VECTOR encoder commissioning e 0 p0400eEncoder type selection 9999 users p0404eEncoder_config effective 00200008H p0405eSquare wave encoder A B 00000009H Help A v OK F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 2 VECTOR encoder commissioning e 0 p0405eSquare wave encoder A B 00000009H p0408eRot enc pulse number per 1024 p0491 Fault react ENCODER 0 OFF2 Contin Help A v OK m a e FS 5 5 First commissioning When the SMC30 is connected for encoder evaluation it is recognized by the AOP30 and a screen is displayed in which you can enter the encoder data To navigate through the selection fields choose lt F2 gt or lt F3 gt To activate a selection choose lt F5 gt Predefined encoders can be easily set by selecting parameter p0400 encoder type selection 3001 1024 HTL A B R at X521 X531 3002 1024 TTL A B R at X521 X531 3003 2048 HTL A B R at X521 X531 3005 1024 HTL A B at X521 X531 3006 1024 TTL A B at X521 X531 3007 2048 HTL A B at X521 X531 3008 2048 TTL A B at X521 X531 3009 1024 HTL A B unipolar at X521 X531 3011 2048 HTL A B unipolar at X521 X531 3020 2048 TTL A B R with sense to X520 Note In the factory setting an HTL encoder is bipolar with 1024 pulses per revolution and a 24 V power supply The section Electrical Installation contains two connection examples for HTL and TTL encoders Inverter chassis units Opera
3. 6 6 PROFIBUS Status word 1 interface mode SINAMICS MICROMASTER p2038 0 Table 6 13 Status word 1 interface mode SINAMICS MICROMASTER p2038 0 Bit Meaning Explanation BICO 0 Ready to power up Ready to power up BO r0899 0 Power supply on electronics initialized line contactor released if necessary pulses inhibited Not ready to power up 1 Ready Ready BO r0899 1 Voltage at Line Module i e line contactor closed if used field being built up Not ready Cause No ON command has been issued 2 Operation enabled Operation enabled BO r0899 2 Enable electronics and pulses then ramp up to active setpoint Operation inhibited 3 Fault active Fault active BO r2139 3 The drive is faulty and is therefore out of service The drive switches to Power on inhibit once the fault has been acknowledged and the cause has been remedied The active faults are stored in the fault buffer No fault present There is no active fault in the fault buffer 4 No OFF2 active No OFF2 active BO r0899 4 coasting active OFF2 Coasting active OFF2 An OFF2 command is present 5 0 Fast stop active OFF3 No OFF3 active BO r0899 5 Coasting active OFF3 An OFF3 command is present 6 Power on disable Power on disable BO r0899 6 A restart is only possible through OFF1 followed by ON No power up inhibit Power up is possible 7 Alarm present Alarm present BO r2139 7 The drive is operational
4. Category Unit Order number 6SL3310 1GE32 1AA0 1GE32 6AA0 1GE33 1AA0 Rated motor output At 400 V 50 Hz kW 110 132 160 At 460 V 60 Hz hp 150 200 250 Rated input voltage V 380 V to 480 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 229 284 338 Rated output current A 210 260 310 Base load current IL 1 A 205 250 302 Base load current IH 2 A 178 233 277 Max output frequency 3 Hz 160 160 160 Power loss kW 2 46 3 27 4 Max current requirements at 24 A 0 8 0 8 0 9 V DC Cooling air requirement m s 0 17 0 23 0 36 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 64 67 64 67 69 73 Line connection Maximum DIN VDE mm2 2x 185 2x185 2 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 350 2 x 350 2 x 500 Fixing screw M10 M10 M10 Motor connection Maximum DIN VDE mm2 2x 185 2x 185 2 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 350 2 x 350 2 x 500 Fixing screw M10 M10 M10 Protective conductor connection Max PE1 GND mm2 2x 185 2x185 2 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 350 2 x 350 2 x 500 Max PE2 GND mm 2 x 185 2x 185 2 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 350 2 x 350 2 x 500 Fixing screw M10 M10 M10 Frame size FX FX GX Approx weight kg 104 104 162 Dimensions W x H x D mm 326 x 1 400 x 356 326 x 1 400 x 356 326 x 1 533 x 545 Recommended protection Line protection w o semicond 3NA3252 3NA3354 3NA3365 protection Rated current A 315 355 500 frame size in accordance with DIN 2 3 3 43620 1 Line and semicond protection 4 3NE1230 2 3NE1331 2 3NE1334 2 Rated current A 315
5. Drive functions LIJPROFIBUS proces Select the default macros for your setpoint sources Important paramete Summary Coso PROF Idrive CDS1 No selection v All connector inputs Cl of the corresponding command data set CDS will be interconnected accordingly Setpoint sources Cancel Help Figure 5 25 Default settings for setpoints command sources Inverter chassis units 108 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER 34 Under Command sources and Setpoint sources choose the appropriate settings for your device configuration The following command and setpoint source options are available Command sources PROF Idrive TM31 terminals CU terminals PROF Idrive TM31 Setpoint sources PROF Idrive TM31 terminals Motorized potentiometer Fixed setpoint Note With SINAMICS G130 only CDSO is normally used as a default setting for the command and setpoint sources Make sure that the selected default setting is compatible with the actual system configuration You cannot change the selected default setting by clicking lt Back unless the current setting is No selection If you make an incorrect entry delete the entire drive unit from the project navigator and create a new one 35 Check your default selections carefully and then click Continue gt Inverter chassis un
6. 4 8 External 24 V DC supply Description An external 24 V DC supply is always recommended if communication and closed loop control are to be independent of the supply system An external auxiliary supply is particularly recommended for low power lines susceptible to short time voltage dips or power failures With an external supply independent of the main supply warnings and fault messages may still be displayed on the operator panel and internal protection and monitoring devices if the main supply fails The power requirement is 4 A Connection Connect the external 24 V DC supply to terminals 1 P 24 V and 2 Mext of terminal block X9 on the Power Module Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 53 Electrical installation 4 9 DRIVE CLIQ wiring diagram 4 9 DRIVE CLiQ wiring diagram The diagra m below shows the specifications for the DRIVE CLiQ connections between the components CAUTION These specifications for the DRIVE CLiQ connections should be observed otherwise faults may occur during commissioning via STARTER or the AOP30 operator panel PE1 U1 Power Module DCNS DCPS PE U2 T1 mo gt w1 W2 T3 pol DCPA ee DCNA bo L2 DRIVE CLiQ ee re ee ee cat a oe eee Socket 1 X400 DRIVE CLiQ socket 1 Control x401 Interface DRIVE CLIQ socket2 L
7. PE i Board X402 i DRIVE CLiQ socket3 A eee H DRIVE CLIQ Socket 1 q SS 4 5 X500 f E A a rr O a JPR A E i Fa ALE N SA aage 1 TM31 1 2 13 4 8e 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 bo 666 6 IYD ol SY SS YS SY SY i X501 Q lt A DA a a fee J x x x 1 IET OE ena heamneaa oe Socket 2 a er it pal y X500 X500 SS es 4 er 4 DRIVE CLiQ DRIVE CLIQ x Socket Socket 1 nes a TER 3 smc30 2 TM31 a a i koto J Figure 4 8 DRIVE CLiQ wiring diagram 54 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Electrical installation 4 10 Signal connections 4 10 1 Power Module X9 Terminal block Table 4 8 Terminal block X9 4 10 Signal connections Terminal Function Technical specifications 1 P24V Voltage 24 V DC 20 4 28 8 V 2 M Current consumption max 4 A 3 Reserved do not use 4 Reserved do not use 5 HS1 Line contactor control 6 HS2 Line contactor control Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm AWG 14 X41 EP terminals temperature sensor connection Table 4 9 Terminal block X41 Terminal Function Technical specifications 4 Temp Temperature sensor connection KTY84 1C130 or O 3 Temp PTC 2 EP 24 V enable pulses Supply voltage 24 V DC 20 4 V 28 8 V 4 EP M1 enable pulses Current consumption 10 mA Signal propagation times L gt H 100 us H gt L 1000 us
8. For this reason entering the area around the drive when it is in this condition can cause death serious injury or considerable material damage 9 2 5 3 Parameters e p1200 Flying restart operating mode e 0 Flying restart inactive e 1 Flying restart is always active start in the setpoint direction e 2 Flying restart is active after power on fault OFF2 start in the setpoint direction e 3 Flying restart is active after fault OFF2 start in the setpoint direction e 4 Flying restart is always active start only in the setpoint direction e 5 Flying restart is active after power on fault OFF2 start only in the setpoint direction e 6 Flying restart is active after fault OFF2 start only in the setpoint direction e p1202 Flying restart search current e p1203 Flying restart search rate factor e 11204 Flying restart V f control status e 11205 Flying restart vector control status Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 255 Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 2 Drive functions 9 2 6 Motor changeover selection 9 2 6 1 Description The motor data set changeover is for example used for e Changing over between different motors e Motor data adaptation Note To switch to a rotating motor the flying restart function must be activated 9 2 6 2 Example of changing over between two motors Prerequisites e The drive has bee
9. Site altitude Rated converter input voltage above sea level in m 500 V 525V 575 V 600 V 0 to 2000 100 to 2250 100 to 2500 100 to 2750 100 to 3000 100 to 3250 100 98 to 3500 100 98 94 to 3750 100 94 91 to 4000 100 91 87 Table 12 5 Voltage derating as a function of the site altitude 660 V 690 V 3 AC Site altitude Rated converter input voltage above sea level in m 660 V 690 V 0 to 2000 100 to 2250 100 96 to 2500 98 94 to 2750 94 90 to 3000 91 88 to 3250 89 85 to 3500 85 82 to 3750 to 4000 Inverter chassis units 350 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Technical specifications 12 2 General specifications Current derating as a function of the pulse frequency When the pulse frequency is increased the derating factor of the output current must be taken into account This derating factor must be applied to the currents specified in the technical specifications Table 12 6 Derating factor of the output current as a function of the pulse frequency for devices with a rated pulse frequency of 2 kHz Order number Power Output current Derating factor at 4 kHz 6SL3310 kW at 2 kHz A Supply voltage 380 480 V 3 AC 1GE32 1AA0 110 210 82 1GE32 6AA0 132 260 83 1GE33 1AA0 160 310 88 1GE33 8AA0 200 380 87 1GE35 0AA0 250 490 78 Table 12 7 Derating
10. Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 69 Electrical installation 4 10 Signal connections S5 selector for voltage current AIO Al1 Table 4 24 Selector for voltage current S5 Switch Function Technical specifications S5 0 Selector voltage current Al0 Voltage y al 51 Current S5 1 Selector voltage current Al1 X522 2 analog outputs temperature sensor connection Table 4 25 Terminal block X522 Terminal Designation Technical specifications 1 AO 0 V 10V 10V 2 AO 0 ref 4 mA 20 mA 3 AO 0 A 20 mA 20 mA 4 AO 1 V 0 mA 20 mA 5 AO 1 ref 6 AO 1 A 7 KTY KTY84 0 200 C 8 KTY PTC Roo lt 1 5 KQ 1 AO analog output KTY temperature sensor connection Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm AWG 14 X 540 Joint auxiliary voltage for the digital inputs Table 4 26 Terminal block X540 Terminal Designation 1 P24 P24 P24 P24 P24 P24 P24 OoINI DQIAJIAJ JIN Technical specifications 24V DC P24 Imax 150 mA total of all P24 terminals Continued short circuit proof 70 Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm AWG 14 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Electrical installation 4 10 Signal connections X541 4 non floating digital inputs outputs Table 4 27 Terminal block X541 Te
11. The EMERGENCY STOP functions must be fully operational during commissioning To protect machines and personnel the relevant safety regulations must be observed The following parameters are determined by means of motor identification e p1910 1 and induction motor p0350 p0354 p0356 p0358 p0360 p1825 p1828 p1829 p1830 e p1910 3 and induction motor p0362 p0366 e p1910 1 and permanent magnet synchronous motor p0350 p0356 p0357 p1825 p1828 p1829 p1830 Inverter chassis units 242 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 2 1 2 Description 9 2 Drive functions Rotating measurement and speed controller optimization Rotating measurement can be activated via p1960 or p1900 1 The main difference affecting rotating measurement is speed controller optimization for determining the drive moment of inertia and setting of the speed controller On induction motors the saturation characteristic and rated magnetization current are also measured If rotating measurement is not to be carried out at the speed set in p1965 this parameter can be changed before the measurement is started Higher speeds are recommended The same applies to the speed in p1961 at which the saturation characteristic is determined and the encoder test is carried out The speed controller is set to the symmetrical optimum in accordance with dynamic factor p1967 p19
12. Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm AWG 14 NOTICE The KTY temperature sensor must be connected with the correct polarity Note The temperature sensor connection can be used for motors that are equipped with a KTY84 1C130 or PTC measurement sensor in the stator windings For operation 24 V DC must be connected to terminal 2 and ground to terminal 1 Upon removal pulse suppression is activated Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 55 Electrical installation 4 10 Signal connections X42 Terminal block Reserved do not use X400 X402 DRIVE CLIQ interface Table 4 10 DRIVE CLiQ interface X400 X402 Power Module Pin Signal name Technical specifications 1 TXP Transmit data 2 TXN Transmit data 3 RXP Receive data 4 Reserved do not use 5 Reserved do not use 6 RXN Receive data 7 Reserved do not use 8 Reserved do not use A 24 V Power supply B GND 0 V Electronic ground 56 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Electrical installation 4 10 Signal connections 4 10 2 Control Unit CU320 Connection overview Inverter chassis units X100 X103 DRIVE CLiQ interfaces Shield connection Digital inputs X122 outputs X132 X124 Electronics power supply Option slot PROFIBUS equipo
13. i Temp JO a I X540 e J 11 ac 24 V E yO LOE HCH 24v DIDOS Se 24 V 13 ree 7 al pane 20 Free t 4 4 C r 24ay A a A A 24 V 15 Ext alarm Pi DIDO 1 AE 24 a 55 0 4 24 V ecal 24 V X542 11 yO DO0 2 eoo 20 13 O Enable pulses 4 K001 o No fault V 4 ee e O I D l N A AS Figure 6 12 TM31 terminal assignment with TM31 terminals default setting Switching the command source If necessary the command source can be switched using the LOCAL REMOTE key on the AOP30 Inverter chassis units 150 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 4 Command sources 6 4 3 CU terminals default setting Prerequisites e The Power Module and CU320 have been correctly installed e The CU terminals default setting was chosen during commissioning e STARTER CU terminals e AOP30 3 CU terminals Command sources r0807 Master control active LOCAL REMOTE key 0 REMOTE PROFIBUS 1 LOCAL operator panel Internal control The AOP30 operator panel CU320 terminals Figure 6 13 Command sources AOP30 lt gt CU terminal Priority The command source priorities are shown in the diagram Command sources AOP30 lt gt CU terminals Note For LOCAL master control all of the supplementary setpoints are deactivated Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 151 Operation 6
14. Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder Limitations secondary conditions e Maximum speed or maximum torque depend on the converter output voltage available and the motor s back EMF calculation specifications EMF must not exceed Uratea converter Calculating the maximum speed 3 x 30 ky x17 Calculating kT see Commissioning Nmax Vnom AC Depending on terminal voltage and load cycle the maximum torque can be taken from the motor data sheets project design instructions e There is no thermal model for the closed loop control of a permanent magnet synchronous motor The motor can only be protected against overheating using a temperature sensor PTC We recommend that the motor temperature is measured using a temperature sensor KTY in order to achieve a high torque accuracy Commissioning The following order is recommended for commissioning e Configure the drive While commissioning the drive using STARTER or AOP30 operator panel the permanent magnet synchronous motor must be selected The motor data specified in the table below must then be entered Finally the motor identification routine and the speed optimization p1900 are activated The encoder adjustment is automatically activated together with the motor identification routine e Motor identification standstill measurement p1910 e Speed controller optimization rotary measurement p1960
15. 3 4 Power Module Dimension drawing frame size JX Table 3 4 Dimension drawing frame size JX Side view Rear view 250 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 33 Mechanical installation 3 4 Power Module 34 Z N WARNING The Power Modules can be lifted using the lifting eyebolts attached A lifting harness with a vertical rope or chain must however be used The device must not be lifted at an angle because this can damage the housing or connection busbars Rope spreaders may have to be used Z N WARNING For Power Modules of frame sizes HX and JX the hoists must be removed once the devices have been installed Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Mechanical installation 3 5 Control Unit CU320 3 5 Control Unit CU320 Description The CU320 is the central Control Unit in which the closed loop and open loop control functions are implemented NCAUTION The 80 mm ventilation clearances above and below the Control Unit must be observed If these clearances are not observed this can result in a thermal overload of the Control Unit Dimension drawing Figure 3 1 Dimension drawing of the CU320 Note With frame sizes FX and GX the CU320 is installed to the left of the Power Module The required connection elements are supplied with the
16. Swapping or short circuiting the DC link terminals can destroy the device The contactor and relay operating coils that are connected to the same supply network as the device or are located near the device must be connected to overvoltage limiters e g RC elements The device must not be operated via a residual current operated device DIN VDE 0160 4 7 1 Connection cross sections and cable lengths Connection cross sections The connection cross sections for the line connection motor connection and ground connection for your device are specified in the tables provided in the Technical specifications section Cable Lengths The maximum permissible cable lengths are specified for standard cable types or cable types recommended by SIEMENS Longer cables can only be used after consultation The listed cable length represents the actual distance between the converter and the motor taking account factors such as parallel laying current carrying capacity and the laying factor e Non shielded cable e g Protodur NYY max 450 m e Shielded cable e g Protodur NYCWY Protoflex EMV 3 Plus max 300 m Note The cable lengths specified are also valid if a motor reactor is in use Note The PROTOFLEX EMV 3 PLUS shielded cable recommended by Siemens is the protective conductor and comprises three symmetrically arranged protective conductors The individual protective conductors must each be provided with cabl
17. 4 000 us in increments of 125 us The increment depends on the controller Set the RT class The lO controller determines which RT class its IO system supports by setting the real time class at its controller interface If IRTtop is set it is not possible to operate any IRTflex devices on the IO controller and conversely RT devices can always be operated even if IRT classes are set You can set the RT class in the HW Config for the associated PROFINET device 1 Double click the PROFINET board entry in the module in HW Config The Properties dialog box is called 2 Select the realtime class for RT class in the Synchronization tab 3 Click OK to confirm Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 189 Operation 6 7 PROFINET IO 6 7 5 2 PROFINET IO with RT Not isochronous Data exchange Refresh time PROFINET IO with RT is the optimal solution for the integration of I O systems without particular requirements in terms of performance and isochronous mode This is a solution that also uses standard Ethernet in the devices and commercially available industrial switches as infrastructure components A special hardware support is not required Because standard Ethernet does not support any synchronization mechanisms isochronous operation is not possible with PROFINET IO with RT The realtime capability is comparable with the present PROFIBUS DP solutions with 12 MBaud whereby a su
18. Derating data 4 The types of protection specified here are mandatory for installing a UL approved system Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 359 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications Table 12 13 Power Module 500 V 600 V 3 AC part 3 Category Unit Order number 6SL3310 1GF35 8AA0 1GF37 4AA0 1GF38 1AA0 Rated motor output At 500 V 50 Hz kW 400 500 560 At 575 V 60 Hz hp 500 700 800 Rated input voltage V 500 V to 600 V 3 AC 110 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 598 764 842 Rated output current A 575 735 810 Base load current IL 1 A 560 710 790 Base load current IH 2 A 514 657 724 Max output frequency 3 Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 8 1 12 0 13 3 Max current requirements at 24 A 1 1 25 1 25 V DC Cooling air requirement m s 0 78 1 48 1 48 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 70 73 73 75 73 75 Line connection Maximum DIN VDE mm2 4 x 240 6 x 240 6 x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 500 6 x 500 6 x 500 Fixing screw M12 M12 M12 Motor connection Maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 6 x 240 6 x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 500 6 x 500 6 x 500 Fixing screw M12 M12 M12 Protective conductor connection Max PE1 GND mm 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 500 2 x 500 2 x 500 Max PE2 GND mm 4 x 240 6 x 240 6 x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 500 6 x 500 6 x 500 Fixing screw M12 M12 M12 Frame size HX JX JX Approx weight kg
19. The following data of the drive unit has been entered Drive unit Name SINAMICS_G130 Order no 65L3310 16E32 1540 Bus address 33 Drive Name Drive_1 Options Name SMC30 SMC30 encoder module Control structure Control type Speed control with encoder Drive setting Standard IEC Motor 50Hz SI units Connection voltage 400 Y Motor Motor name Motor Motor type Induction motor rotating Motor data Rated motor voltage 340 Vrms Rated motor current 233 00 Arms Rated motor power 108 00 kw Rated motor power factor 0 850 Rated motor frequency 50 90 Hz Rated motor speed 1500 0 RPM Motor cooling type 0 Optional Motor Data Motor rated magnetization current short circuit current 91 000 Arms Maximum motor speed 5000 0 RPM Motor moment of inertia 0 666000 kgr Ratio between the total and motor moment of inertia 1 000 Motor weight 440 0 kg v Copy text to clipboard Cancel Help Figure 5 29 Summary of the drive unit data 42 You can use the Copy text to clipboard function to copy the summary of the drive unit data displayed on the screen to a word processing program so that you can edit it further 43 Click Finish 44 Save your project to the hard disk by choosing Project gt Save Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 113 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER 5 3 3 Starting the drive project You have created a project and saved it
20. 87 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Project Wizard Starter i El y Introduction Create PG PC Set Insert drive Summary new project interface units Specify the online connection to the drive unit Set eee PC Adapter PROFIBUS Change and test Cancel Figure 5 8 Setting the interface 7 Click Continue gt to set up a drive unit in the project Wizard Project Wizard Starter 1 al al 4 Introduction Create PG PC Set Insert drive Summary new project interface units Please enter the drive unit data Drive unit EP Project Device Sinamics X Type G130 X Version 2 5 X Preview Bus addr 33 v Name SINAMICS_G1 30 Sinamics tutorial i lt Back Continue gt Cancel Figure 5 9 Inserting the drive unit Inverter chassis units 88 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Commissioning Inverter chassis units 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER 8 Choose the following data from the list fields Device Sinamics Type G130 Version v2 5 Bus address the corresponding bus address for the converter The entry in the Name field is user defined 9 Click Insert The selected drive unit is displayed in a preview window in the project wizard Project Wizard Starter 3 2 t i Introduction Create PG PC Set Insert drive Summary new project interface units Please enter the drive unit data Preview Dri
21. Configuration SINAMICS_G130 Motor holding brake Drive unit Options Control structure Drive setting Motor Motor data Optional Motor Dat Calculation of the bv JEncoder Defaults of the sete Drive functions PROFIBUS proces Important paramete Summary gt Equivalent Circuit C Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 Holding brake configuration No motor holding brake being used y la Extended brake control Brake control module type z Figure 5 22 Configuring the motor holding brake 26 Under Holding brake configuration choose the appropriate settings for your device configuration 27 Click Continue gt Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 105 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Entering the encoder data option SMC30 Sensor Module Note If you specified the SMC30 Sensor Module when choosing the options the following screen is displayed in which you can enter the encoder data Configuration SINAMICS_G130 Encoder Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 MDS 0 Drive unit Options Control structure Drive setting Motor Motor data Optional Motor Dat MV Encoder 1 Encoder 1 Equivalent Circuit C Calculation of the t Motor holding brake Encoder name K K K K a al e a a e Encoder evaluation Defaults of the setg Drive
22. Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 313 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components 11 4 2 Replacing the power block frame size GX Replacing the power block P alo Y f EU 10 Q olla a Al Lit Got E dt j Ys JENS a 1 pte GIGI s gt lt Figure 11 5 Replacing the power block frame size GX Inverter chassis units 314 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Maintenance and servicing Preparatory steps 11 4 Replacing components e Disconnect the built in unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access to the power block e Remove the protective cover Removal The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with the diagram 1 2 3 4 5 Unscrew the connection to the outgoing motor section 3 screws Unscrew the connection to the line supply 3 screws Remove the retaining screws at the top 2 screws Remove the retaining screws at the bottom 2 screws Remove the CU320 mount 1 nut If necessary remove the PROFIBUS plug and connection to the operator panel X140 on the CU320 and carefully remove the CU320 Disconnect the connectors for the fiber optic cables 5 plugs and release the cable connection for the signal cables 2 connectors Disconnect the plug for the thermocouple Unscrew the two retaining screws for the fan and attach the tool for de installing the power block at
23. e Ground the spare cables on at least one end e Long cables should be shortened or laid in noise resistant areas to avoid additional connecting points Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 43 Electrical installation 4 5 EMC compliant design Shield connection I O interfacing Filtering cables 44 Conductors or cables that carry signals of different classes must cross at right angles especially if they carry sensitive signals that are subject to interference Class 1 unshielded cables for lt 60 V DC unshielded cables for lt 25 V AC shielded analog signal cables shielded bus and data cables operator panel interfaces incremental absolute encoder lines Class 2 unshielded cables for gt 60 V DC and s 230 V DC unshielded cables for gt 25 V AC and s 230 V AC Class 3 unshielded cables for gt 230 V AC DC and s 1000 V AC DC Shields must not be used to conduct electricity In other words they must not simultaneously act as neutral or PE conductors Apply the shield so that it covers the greatest possible surface area You can use ground clamps ground terminals or ground screw connections Avoid extending the shield to the grounding point using a wire pigtail because this will reduce the effectiveness of the shield by up to 90 Attach the shield to a shield bar directly after the line inlet into the cabinet Insulate the entire shielded cable and route the shie
24. e in America Tel 14232622522 Fax 14232622289 E mail simatic hotline sea siemens com e Asia Pacific region Tel 86 1064 757575 Fax 86 1064 747474 E mail adsupport asia siemens com Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Maintenance and servicing 1 1 11 1 Chapter content This chapter provides information on the following e Maintenance and servicing procedures that have to be carried out on a regular basis to ensure the availability of the devices Exchanging device components when the unit is serviced e Forming the DC link capacitors e Upgrading the device firmware DANGER Before carrying out any maintenance or repair work on the de energized chassis unit wait for 5 minutes after switching off the supply voltage This allows the capacitors to discharge to a harmless level lt 25 V after the supply voltage has been switched off Before starting work you should also measure the voltage after the 5 minutes have elapsed The voltage can be measured on DC link terminals DCP and DCN Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 305 Maintenance and servicing 11 2 Maintenance 11 2 Maintenance The chassis unit comprises mostly electronic components Apart from the fan s the unit therefore contains hardly any components that are subject to wear or that require maintenance or servicing The purpose of maintenance is to preserve the
25. 2 position encoders e p0922 20 gt NAMUR telegram e p0922 352 gt PCS7 telegram Depending on the setting in p0922 the interface mode of the control and status word is automatically set e p0922 1 352 999 STW 1 ZSW 1 Interface Mode SINAMICS MICROMASTER p2038 0 e p0922 20 STW 1 ZSW 1 Interface Mode PROF Idrive VIK NAMUR p2038 2 b Free telegrams p0922 999 Send and receive telegrams can be configured as required by using BICO technology to interconnect the send and receive words The default process data assigned under a is retained during the switchover to p0922 999 although it can be changed or supplemented at any time To maintain compliance with the PROF ldrive profile however the following assignments should be retained e Interconnect PZD receive word 1 as control word 1 CTW 1 e Interconnect PZD send word 1 as status word 1 STW 1 For more information about possible interconnections see function diagrams FP2460 and FP2470 and the simplified diagrams 620 to 622 Inverter chassis units 162 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 6 PROFIBUS Structure of the telegrams Table 6 8 Structure of the telegrams Telegr PZD1 PZD2 PZD 3 PZD 4 PZD 5 PZD 6 PZD 7 PZD8 PZD9 PZD 10 1 STW 1 N_set_A ZSW 1 N_act_A 2 STW 1 N_set_B CTW2 ZSW 1 N_act_B STW2 3 STW 1 N_set_B CTW
26. 9 4 1 Protecting power components srei in tii aa a a aa re halo raaa a a aa aiaa 285 9 4 2 Thermal monitoring and overload TESPONSES ooccconoccccccococcccnononcnnnnoncnnnnno cnn nano nn arranca ran anar 286 9 4 3 Block protection aa 288 9 4 4 Stall protection only for vector control oooonncccccnnonoccccnonoccccnnoncccnonanccnn non cc cnn non cc naar nn cnn nncccnnnccns 289 9 4 5 Thermal motor protect ss 290 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Table of contents 10 Diagnosis faults and alarMS oomoccconnncccnonnnccnnononcnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnn nan nr rn narran rre rene 293 10 1 Chapter content 2 4 2 02 ita ia ii dd di abad 293 10 2 DIAQMOSIS AA A A 294 10 2 1 Diagnostics Via LEDS oi coooiionci iii ht Elda es bo dd dad 295 1042 Didgnostics Via paromo taS i E a hive anh eh gaia line anda iene 299 10 2 3 Indicating and rectifying faults ee eee eet E E ee cnn n cnn nan A crac 302 10 3 S rvicsand SUPPOM eiii is A A ead en ee ee eet 303 11 Maintenance and Servicing ooo idad 305 11 1 Chapter Contenido ein eee ceil A eae kbd retin ets hd ie an hoi beet 305 11 2 Maintenances tec atts a tien tnt ads are a thats eee Mie do e Eads 306 TAZA CLAN i ached tet ta tae seat hota Sa aia 306 11 3 Maintenance rita A DA a AA aie ha etna dan 307 E A ON 307 1132 Installation deviCe cocoa iii ito ita 308 11 3 3 Using crane lifting lugs to transport power DIOCKS ooooononccnnnninccinnncoccccoco
27. EMC conformance In accordance with EMC product standard for variable speed drives EN 61 800 3 category C3 optional category C2 Approval cULus File No E192450 only up to 600 V 3 AC Ambient conditions Operation Storage Transport Ambient temperature 0 C to 40 C 25 C to 55 C 25 C to 70 C up to 50 C with derating as of 40 C for 24 hours Relative humidity non condensing corresponds to class 5 to 95 3K3 to IEC 60 721 3 3 5 to 95 1K4 to IEC 60 721 3 1 5 to 95 at 40 C 2K3 to IEC 60 721 3 2 Installation altitude Up to 2000 m above sea level without derating gt 2000 m above sea level with derating see Derating data Mechanical stability Vibrational load Displacement Acceleration Shock load Acceleration 0 075 mm at 10 Hz to 58 Hz 10 m s at gt 58 Hz to 200 Hz 100 m s at 11 ms 1 5 mm at 5 Hz to 9 Hz 5 m s at gt 9 Hz to 200 Hz 40 m s at 22 ms 3 1 mm at 5 Hz to 9 Hz 10 m s at gt 9 Hz to 200 Hz 100 m s at 11 ms 1 Applies to cable lengths of up to 100 m 348 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Technical specifications 12 2 General specifications 12 2 1 Derating data Current derating as a function of the site altitude and ambient temperature If the cabinet units are operated at a site altitude gt 2000 m above sea level the maximum
28. Fixed setpoint 4 Fixed setpoint FSW bit 0 FSW bit 1 Fixed speed setpoint Active 11024 Figure 6 19 Signal flow diagram Fixed speed setpoints 158 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 5 Setpoint sources Function diagram FD 3010 Fixed speed setpoints Parameters e p1001 Fixed speed setpoint 01 e p1002 Fixed speed setpoint 02 e p1003 Fixed speed setpoint 03 e 11024 Fixed speed setpoint effective Note Other fixed speed setpoints are available using p1004 to p1015 They can be selected using p1020 to p1023 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 159 Operation 6 6 PROFIBUS 6 6 PROFIBUS 6 6 1 PROFIBUS connection For more information about the PROFIBUS connection see Electrical installation 6 6 2 Control via PROFIBUS DP1 PROFIBUS diagnostics LED The PROFIBUS diagnostics LED is located on the front of the Control Unit CU320 Its statuses are described in the following table Table 6 7 Description of the LEDs Color Status Description Off Cyclic communication has not yet taken place Green Continuous PROFIBUS is ready for communication and cyclic communication is taking place Green 0 5 Hz flashing Full cyclic communication is not yet taking place light Possible causes The master is not transmitting setpoints Red Continuous Cyclic communication has been interrupted
29. LOCAL operator panel Internal control The AOP30 operator panel Input terminals TM31 Figure 6 11 Command sources AOP30 gt terminal TM31 Priority The command source priorities are shown in the diagram Command sources AOP30 lt gt TM31 terminals Note All of the supplementary setpoints are deactivated for LOCAL master control Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 149 Operation 6 4 Command sources TM31 terminal assignment with TM31 terminals default setting When you choose the TM31 terminals default setting the terminal assignment for TM31 is as follows TM31 li X521 1 0 10V lt Na lt 1350 ALO a JO CO end 1_Alo i522 lt A arte 3 x520 e lt lt 51 z P N Free E JAH Free ON OFF1 SC 1 e Ho 322 MOP FSWO sC 2 Br pro O MOP FSW1 sS alo g M O Acknowledge sC teo a moa fault hi So AE mi I pm X522 rt AO 0V Actual speed Fyi ewy value New OFF2 ot 5 AO 0 E JO OFF3 2 i AO 0c Q or cr AO 1V E N Power v Ext fault aos a actual value _ frei 4 ao 1 O w ao 1c 2 Q Er ile M gt
30. Motor data for permanent magnet synchronous motors Table 7 2 Motor data type plate Parameters Description Comments p0304 Rated motor voltage If this value is not known then a value of 0 can also be entered Entering the correct value however means that the stator leakage inductance p0356 p0357 can be calculated more accurately p0305 Rated motor current p0307 Rated motor power p0310 Rated motor frequency p0311 Rated motor speed p0314 Motor pole pair number If this value is not known then a value of 0 can also be entered p0316 Motor torque constant If this value is not known the value 0 can also be entered Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 229 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder If the details of the torque constant kr are not provided on the type plate or in the data sheet you can calculate them as follows from the rated motor data or from the zero speed current lo and zero speed torque MO S kr ON 60min PN kpa Mo IN 2m x An x In or lo The optional motor data can be entered if you know them Otherwise these are estimated from the type plate data or established through motor identification or speed controller optimization Table 7 3 Motor data type plate Parameters Description Comments p0320 Rated motor short circuit current This is used
31. Operation 6 7 PROFINET IO Edit Ethernet node e Y IP configuration has been set successfully Figure 6 30 STARTER Successful assignment of the IP configuration After closing the Edit Ethernet node interactive screen the successful christening of the node is displayed in the node overview after updating F5 P Accessible nodes TCP7IP Auto gt Broadcom NetXtreme Gig Sten Accessible nodes IL Drive unit_01 address 192 168 0 10 type SINAMICS G150 V2 5 F Activate extended slot search Do you want to accept the selected drive units into the project Accept Select drive units Refresh F5 Close Help Figure 6 31 STARTER Accessible nodes update completed Note The IP address and device name for the Control Unit are stored on the CompactFlash Card non volatile Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 181 Operation 6 7 PROFINET IO 6 7 3 6 7 3 1 General information about PROFINET lO General information about PROFINET lO for SINAMICS General information PROFINET 6 7 3 2 PROFINET IO is an open Industrial Ethernet standard for a wide range of production and process automation applications PROFINET lO is based on Industrial Ethernet and observes TCP IP and IT standards The following standards ensure open multi vendor systems e International standard IEC 61158 PROFINET IO is optimized for high speed time critical data co
32. Table of contents AA A 5 1 safety IOMA A AA td 13 1 1 War AA A A TA A coe 13 1 2 Safety and operating inStrUCtONS onooccnnnnncnnnnnnocccnnnoncccnn arca nn AN cnn cnn crac ANE ENA AAN 14 1 3 Components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge ESD 15 2 DEVICE OVERVIGW iniae E a aK i a caseaeod ees cckeieacued ances tavedaneie O A a Mant eii dad 17 2 1 Chapter Content noei ilatina 17 2 2 Overview of the chassis UNIS unico leia ear 18 2 3 Overview of the Power Modules sessirnir sneaiceanna nr nc cnn nr cnn rr nr 19 2 4 Applications features and desigO a e e E aee ae a aa ia a aae ASE EEEE EA EA Sain 20 2 4 1 APPlCAIONS diari A A e Said Se iil sa ae a aed 20 2 4 2 Features quality SCrviCe RO 20 2 5 Wining principle cotilla eaa aa dan add 22 2 6 IY PO oE 1 E A E A E T A A A EE S 23 3 Mechanical instah ti Ni s ra nioena AA ia 25 3 1 Chapter content nreo A A A AAA ae ee 25 3 2 Transportation and Storage rioan aR Ea iaaa TAARE E E AANER raTa Ka ENA 26 3 3 ASSOMAR stiii ete ceos steed steht then 28 3 3 1 PREParatlOn ess it ti add nea ee tat aside eres 28 3 4 Power Module AA a ee nen ee ad 29 3 4 1 DIMENSION CrAWINGS nirera sat cativec A ai 30 3 5 ControbUnitCUS20 A A eta teagan 35 3 6 TM3S1 Terminal ModE asin i eaa dad 37 3 7 SME30 Sensor Module iach aceite ae eee et Pe eee 38 4 Electricaliinstallatio nis S orc ot cae eects steer esti eacadetesec cido 39 4 1 Chapter content atic eet ies a a eerie ia AA ae 39 4 2 Prepar
33. This is carried out by means of a variable speed pump in conjunction with a sensor for measuring the level The level is determined via an analog input e g Al0 TM31 and sent to the technology controller The level setpoint is defined in a fixed setpoint The resulting controlled variable is used as the setpoint for the speed controller In this example a Terminal Module TM31 is used l Sensor Figure 9 8 Level control Application Tec_ctr Kp Tec_ctr Tn p2280 p2285 XSetp Ramp function generator n_setp1 Tec_ctr NS Y p1155 Setpoint Figure 9 9 Level control Controller structure Key control parameters 272 e p1155 r2294 n_setp1 downstream of RFG FD 3080 e p2253 r2224 Technology controller setpoint effective via fixed setpoint FD 7950 e p2263 1 D component in fault signal FD 7958 e p2264 r4055 Actual value signal Xactuar via AIO of TM31 FP 9566 e p2280 Kp Calculate P gain by means of optimization e p2285 Tn Calculate integral time by means of optimization e p2200 1 Technology controller enabled Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 3 Extended functions 9 3 2 Bypass function The bypass function uses digital converter outputs to activate two contactors and uses digital inputs to evaluate the contactor s feedback e g via TM31 This circuit allows the motor to be operated using the converter or directly on the
34. Vdc_min controller output limit V f control Vdc_max controller automatic ON level detection Vdc_min controller time threshold Vdc_min controller response Vdc_min controller speed threshold Vdc controller output 249 Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 2 Drive functions 9 2 4 Automatic restart function Description The automatic restart function automatically restarts the cabinet unit after an undervoltage or a power failure The alarms present are acknowledged and the drive is restarted automatically The drive can be restarted using e The standard procedure starting from standstill or e The flying restart function 250 For drives with low moments of inertia and load torques facilitating the stopping of the drive within a matter of seconds e g pump drives with water gauges starting from standstill is recommended Note The flying restart function can also be activated for drives with large moments of inertia such as fan drives This enables you to switch to the motor that is still rotating Z N WARNING If p1210 is set to values gt 1 the motor can be restarted automatically without the need to issue the ON command In the event of prolonged power failures and when the automatic restart function is activated p1210 gt 1 the drive may have been at a standstill for a long time and mistakenly considered to have been switched off For this reason entering the area around
35. When commissioning the converter the behavior at overload is adjusted in such a manner that the pulse frequency is variably reduced so that the required power can be obtained Characteristics e The reaction to overload depends on the setting of parameter p0290 p0290 0 Reduce output current or output frequency p0290 1 No reduction shutdown when overload threshold is reached p0290 2 Reduce the output current or output and pulse frequency not using t p0290 3 Reduce the pulse frequency not using t e Bei p0290 2 at overload first reduce the pulse frequency until it has dropped to rated pulse frequency then reduce the output frequency if overload continues to persist e Reduction of the pulse frequency is executed in whole multiples based on the rated pulse frequency 5 kHz gt 2 5 kHz gt 1 25 kHz or 4 kHz gt 2 kHz e After entering the maximum speed in p1082 the system automatically calculates whether the pulse frequency is sufficient for the entered maximum speed if necessary the pulse frequency is increased automatically to a value that is necessary for this At overload then also for p0290 2 or 3 this new pulse frequency will no longer be underranged the downstream reaction reduce output voltage or switch off will be triggered Exceptions e With an activated sinus filter p0230 3 4 this behavior is not permitted because the factory set pulse frequency 2 5 kHz or 4 kHz should n
36. choose one of the following open loop closed loop control types Torque control sensorless Torque control with encoder Speed control sensorless Speed control with encoder If control with fixed current V f control for drive requiring a precise frequency e g textiles V f control for drive requiring a precise frequency with FCC V f control with linear characteristic V f control with linear characteristic and FCC V f control with parabolic characteristic V f control with parameterizable characteristic V f control with independent voltage setpoint 9 Click Continue gt Inverter chassis units 96 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Commissioning Configuring the drive unit properties 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Configuration SINAMICS_G130 Drive setting Drive 1 Motor Motor Defau Drive C ont fo Encod unit Options structure olding brake er ts of the setpoini unctions PROF Importe Summ ant parameters ary Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 Configure the drive properties Standard IEC Motor 50Hz SI units Connection voltage 400 Y Cancel Help Figure 5 16 Configuring the drive unit properties 10 Under Standard choose the appropriate standard for your motor whereby the following is defined e IEC motor 50 Hz SI unit
37. minimized on account of deviations in the material properties and manufacturing tolerances Rotary measurement determines the data required e g moment of inertia for setting the speed controller It also measures the magnetization characteristic and rated magnetization current of the motor To activate this function press the LOCAL key wait until the LED in the LOCAL key lights up and then ON If motor identification is not carried out the motor control uses the motor characteristic values calculated from the type plate data rather than the measured values N DANGER When the the rotating measurement is selected the drive triggers movements in the motor that can reach the maximum motor speed The emergency OFF functions must be fully operational during commissioning To protect the machines and personnel the relevant safety regulations must be carefully observed Note If a fault is present when selecting the stationary or rotary measurement motor identification cannot be carried out Before rectifying the fault you have to leave the screen with No identification Motor identification can then be selected again via lt MENU gt lt Commissioning service gt lt Drive commissioning gt lt Motor identification gt Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Commissioning 5 6 Status after commissioning 5 6 Status after commissioning LOCAL mode control via
38. p1082 a speed limiting controller reduces the torque limits in order to prevent the drive from accelerating any further A real closed loop torque control with a speed that automatically sets itself is only possible in the closed loop control range but not in the open loop control range of the sensorless closed loop vector control In the open loop controlled range the torque setpoint changes the setpoint speed via a ramp up integrator integrating time p1499 x p0341 x p0342 This is the reason that sensorless closed loop torque control close to standstill is only suitable for applications that require an accelerating torque there and no load torque e g traversing drives Closed loop torque control with encoder does not have this restriction e OFF1 and p1300 22 23 Response as for OFF2 e OFF1 p1501 1 signal and p1300 22 23 No separate braking response the braking response is provided by a drive that specifies the torque The pulses are inhibited when the brake application time p1217 expires Standstill is detected when the speed actual value of the speed threshold p1226 is undershot or when the monitoring time 91227 started when speed setpoint lt speed threshold p1226 expires Switching on inhibited is activated 225 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder e OFF2 Immediate pulse suppression the drive coasts to standstil
39. r2090 0 PZD 1 bit 0 Vector po844 0 No OFF2_1 Vector r2090 1 PZD 1 bit 1 Vector p0845 0 No OFF2_2 Vector r4022 4 TM31 DI4 TM31 pos48 0 No OFF3_1 Vector r2090 2 PZD 1 bit 2 Vector p0849 0 No OFF3_2 Vector r4022 5 TM31 DI5 TM31 p0806 Inhibit LOCAL mode Vector 0 p0810 Switchover CDS bit 0 Vector 0 p0852 Enable operation Vector r2090 3 PZD 1 bit 3 Vector p0854 Control from PLC Vector r2090 10 PZD 1 bit 10 Vector p0922 Profibus PZD telegram selection Vector 999 Free telegram configuration p1020 FSW bit 0 Vector 0 p1021 FSW bit 1 Vector 0 p1035 MOP raise Vector r2090 13 PZD 1 bit 13 Vector p1036 MOP lower Vector r2090 14 PZD 1 bit 14 Vector p1055 Jog bit 0 Vector 0 p1056 Jog bit 1 Vector 0 p1113 Direction reversal Vector r2090 11 PZD 1 bit 11 Vector p1140 Enable RFG Vector r2090 4 PZD 1 bit 4 Vector p1141 Start RFG Vector r2090 5 PZD 1 bit 5 Vector p1142 Enable nsetp Vector r2090 6 PZD 1 bit 6 Vector p2103 1 Acknowledge faults Vector r2090 7 PZD 1 bit 7 Vector p2104 2 Acknowledge faults Vector r4022 3 TM31 DI3 TM31 p2106 Ext fault_1 Vector r4022 6 TM31 DI6 TM31 p2107 Ext fault_2 Vector 1 p2112 Ext alarm_1 Vector r4022 11 TM31 DI11 TM31 p2116 Ext alarm_2 Vector 1 p0738 DI DO8 CU Factory setting p0748 8 Invert DI DO8 CU Factory setting p0728 8 Set DI DO8 input or output CU Factory setting p0739 DI DO9 CU Factory setting p0748 9 Invert DI DO9 CU Factory setting p0728 9 Set DI DO9 input or output C
40. see Overload capability 3 Maximum output frequency at factory set default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output frequency see Functions monitoring and protective functions Increasing the output frequency for information on derating data see Derating data Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 365 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications 12 3 2 Control Unit CU320 Table 12 19 CU320 Max current requirements at 24 V DC not taking into account digital outputs option slot extension Max connectable cross section 0 8A 2 5 mm2 Digital outputs continued short circuit proof Digital inputs 8 floating digital inputs 8 bidirectional non floating digital inputs outputs Voltage 3 V to 30 V Low level 3Vto5V an open digital input is interpreted as low High level 15 V to 30 V Current consumption typ at 24 V DC 10 mA Max connectable cross section 0 5 mm 8 bidirectional non floating digital outputs inputs Voltage 24 V DC Max load current per digital output 500 mA Max connectable cross section 0 5 mm2 Power loss 20 W PE connection On housing with M5 screw Ground connection On housing with M5 screw Width 50 mm Height 270 mm Depth 226 mm Weight approx 1 5 kg 366 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Technica
41. the Union of German Technical Engineers as well as the guidelines relating to the proper use of tools and personal protective equipment must be observed Death serious injury or substantial material damage can result if these factors are not taken into account 3 3 1 Preparation On site requirements 28 The chassis units are suitable for installation in general operating areas DIN VDE 0558 Edition 7 87 Part 1 Section 5 4 3 2 4 The standard specifies the following When power converter units are installed in general operating areas live parts must be protected in such a way that they cannot be touched either directly or indirectly The operating areas must be dry and free of dust The air supplied must not contain any electrically conductive gas vapors or dust which could impair operation It may be necessary to filter the air supplied to the installation room The ambient conditions for the units in the operating rooms must not exceed the values of code F in accordance with EN 60146 At temperatures gt 40 C 104 F and installation altitudes gt 2000 m the devices must be derated Built in units with frame sizes FX and GX comply with degree of protection IP20 with frame sizes HX and JX they comply with degree of protection IPOO to EN 60529 The chassis units are installed in accordance with the dimension drawings supplied The clearance between the top of the devices and the ceiling is also specified on the dime
42. this cyclic exchange of user data is restarted The CF card allows module exchange without an lO supervisor when a fault occurs in a PROFINET device Definition Sub network mask The bits set in the sub network define the part of the IP address that contains the address of the sub network The following generally applies e The network address is obtained by an AND operation on the IP address and sub network mask e The node address is obtained by an AND NOT operation on the IP address and sub network mask Example of the sub network mask Sub network mask 255 255 0 0 decimal 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 binary IP address 140 80 0 2 significance The first 2 bytes of the IP address decide the sub network in other words 140 80 The last two bytes address the node in other words 0 2 Default router If data needs to be forwarded by means of TCP IP to a partner located outside the sub network this is carried out via the default router In the properties dialog in STEP 7 Properties of Ethernet interface gt Parameters gt Network transfer the default router is described as the router STEP 7 assigns the local IP address to the default router 6 7 3 4 Data transmission Features The Communication Board CBE20 supports e IRT isochronous real time Ethernet e RT real time Ethernet e Standard Ethernet services TCP IP LLDP UDP and DCP PROFIdrive telegram for cyclic data transmission and non cyclic servic
43. 1 Ready to operate cai ET o r0899 1 o 1 Operation enabled r0899 2 goes i o Doos 25 1 Ramp up ramp down DOS Tt e completed 1 0 12199 5 011 Sq Pees Figure 8 2 Signal flow diagram Digital outputs Factory settings Table 8 3 Factory settings for digital outputs Digital output Terminal Factory setting DOO X542 2 3 Enable pulses DO1 X542 5 6 No fault DI DO8 X541 2 Ready to start DI DO9 X541 3 DI DO10 X541 4 DI DO11 X541 5 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 235 Output terminals 8 3 TM31 digital outputs Selection of possible connections for the digital outputs Table 8 4 Selection of possible connections for the digital outputs Signal Bit in status Parameter word 1 1 Ready to start 0 r0889 0 1 Ready to operate DC link loaded pulses blocked 1 r0889 1 1 Operation enabled drive follows n_set 2 r0889 2 1 Fault present 3 r2139 3 0 Coast to stop active OFF2 4 r0889 4 0 Fast stop active OFF3 5 r0889 5 1 Power on disable 6 r0889 6 1 Alarm present 7 r2139 7 1 Speed setpoint actual deviation in the tolerance bandwidth p2163 p2166 8 r2197 7 1 Control required to PLC 9 r0899 9 1 f or n comparison value reached or exceeded p2141 p2142 10 r2199 1 1 1 M or P limit reached p0640 p1520 p1521 11 r1407 7 Reserved 12 0 Alarm motor overt
44. 110 Rated current continuous Base load current IL for lowjoverload A Base load current IL for lo o Figure 12 2 Low overload The base load current for a high overload lI is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s Converter current A t 10s Short time current 160 1 6 A MA Short time current 150 154 A Rated current continuous O E Figure 12 3 High overload Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 353 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications Note The current voltage and output values specified in the following tables are rated values The cables to the cabinet unit are protected by fuses with gL characteristic The connection cross sections are calculated for three core copper cables installed horizontally in free air at an ambient temperature of 30 C 86 F in accordance with DIN VDE 0298 Part 2 Group 5 and the recommended line protection in accordance with DIN VDE 0100 Part 430 AWG American Wire Gauge for cross sections lt 120 mm MCM Mille Circular Mil American wire gauge for cross sections gt 120 mm2 Inverter chassis units 354 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications 12 3 1 Power Module Power Module 380 V 480 V3 AC Table 12 8 Power Module 380 V 480 V 3 AC part 1
45. 15 V to 30 V Low level 3 V to 5 V Signal propagation times L gt H approx 50 us H gt L approx 100 us Voltage 3 V to 30 V Typical power consumption 10 mA at 24 V DC Level incl ripple High level 15 V to 30 V Low level 3 V to 5 V Terminal numbers 8 10 and 11 are fast inputs Signal propagation times for inputs fast inputs L gt H approx 50 us 5 us H gt L approx 100 us 50 us Voltage 24 V DC Max load current per output 500 mA continued short circuit Pin Designation 1 DIO 2 DI 1 3 Ble Level incl ripple 4 DI 3 5 M1 6 M 7 DI DO 8 e As input 8 DI DO 9 9 M 10 DI DO 10 11 DI DO 11 12 M e As output proof 1 DI digital input DI DO Bidirectional digital input output M Electronic ground M1 Ground reference Max connectable cross section 0 5 mm 58 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Electrical installation 4 10 Signal connections X132 Digital inputs outputs Table 4 13 Terminal block X132 Pin Designation Technical specifications 1 DI 4 Voltage 3 V to 30 V 2 DI5 Typical power consumption 10 mA at 24 V DC 3 DIG Isolation The reference potential is terminal M2 Level incl ripple 4 DI7 High level 15 V to 30 V 5 M2 Low level 3 V to 5 V 6 M Signal propagation times L gt H 50 us H gt L 100 us 7 DI DO 12 e As input 8 DI DO 13 Voltage 3 V to 30 V 9 M Typ
46. 2 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 3 Maximum output frequency at factory set default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output frequency see Functions monitoring and protective functions Increasing the output frequency for information on derating data see Derating data Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 361 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications Table 12 15 Power Module 660 V 690 V 3 AC part 2 frame size to DIN 43620 1 1 Category Unit Order number 6SL3310 1GH31 5AA0 1GH31 8AA0 1GH32 2AA0 Rated motor output kW 132 160 200 Rated input voltage V 660 V to 690 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 164 191 224 Rated output current A 150 175 215 Base load current IL A 142 171 208 Base load current IH 2 A 134 157 192 Max output frequency 3 Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 2 5 3 8 4 8 Max current requirements at 24 A 0 8 0 9 0 9 V DC Cooling air requirement m s 0 17 0 36 0 36 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 64 67 69 73 69 73 Line connection Maximum DIN VDE mm 2x 185 2 x 240 2 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 350 2 x 500 2 x 500 Fixing screw M10 M10 M10 Motor connection Maximum DIN VDE mm2 2x185 2 x 240 2 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 350 2 x 500 2 x
47. 294 530 530 Dimensions W x H x D mm 503 x 1 506 x 540 908 5 x 1 510 x 540 908 5 x 1 510 x 540 Recommended protection Line protection w o semicond protection 3NA3354 6 3NA3365 6 Circuit breaker Rated current A 2 x 355 2 x 500 frame size to DIN 43620 1 3 3 Line and semicond protection 4 3NE1447 2 3NE1448 2 Circuit breaker Rated current A 670 850 frame size to DIN 43620 1 3 3 see Overload capability see Overload capability Derating data 4 The types of protection specified here are mandatory for installing a UL approved system 1 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s 2 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s 3 Maximum output frequency at factory set default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output frequency see Functions monitoring and protective functions Increasing the output frequency for information on derating data see 360 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Technical specifications Power Module 660 V 690 V 3 AC Table 12 14 Power Module 660 V 690 V 3 AC part 1 12 3 Technical specifications Category Unit Order number 6SL3310 1GH28 5AA0 1GH31 0AA0 1GH31 2AA0 Rated motor output kW 75 90 110
48. 3 CU terminals Sink Source Parameters Description DO Parameters Description DO po840 0 ON OFF1 Vector r0722 0 CU DIO CU po844 0 No OFF2_1 Vector 1 Vector p0845 0 No OFF2_2 Vector r0722 4 CU DI4 CU p0848 0 No OFF3_1 Vector 1 Vector p0849 0 No OFF3_2 Vector r0722 5 CU DI5 CU p0806 Inhibit LOCAL mode Vector 0 p0810 Switchover CDS bit 0 Vector 0 p0852 Enable operation Vector 1 Vector p0854 Control from PLC Vector 1 Vector p0922 Profibus PZD telegram selection Vector 999 Free telegram configuration p1020 FSW bit 0 Vector r0722 1 CU DI1 CU p1021 FSW bit 1 Vector r0722 2 CU DI2 CU p1035 MOP raise Vector 1r0722 1 CU DI1 CU p1036 MOP lower Vector r0722 2 CU DI2 CU p1055 Jog bit 0 Vector 0 p1056 Jog bit 1 Vector 0 p1113 Direction reversal Vector 0 p1140 Enable RFG Vector 1 Vector p1141 Start RFG Vector 1 Vector p1142 Enable nsetp Vector 1 Vector p2103 1 Acknowledge faults Vector 0 p2104 2 Acknowledge faults Vector r0722 3 CU DI3 TM31 p2106 Ext fault_1 Vector r0722 6 CU DI6 CU p2107 Ext fault_2 Vector 1 p2112 Ext alarm_1 Vector r0722 11 CU DI11 CU p2116 Ext alarm_2 Vector 1 p0738 DI DO8 CU r0899 11 Pulses enabled Vector p0748 8 Invert DI DO8 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 8 Set DI DO8 input or output CU 1 Output CU p0739 DI DO9 CU 12139 3 Fault active Vector p0748 9 Invert DI DO9 CU 1 inverted p0728 9 Set DI DO9 input or output CU 1 Output CU p0740 DI DO10 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 10 Invert DI DO10 CU 0 Not inverted po
49. 3 Components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge ESD Inverter chassis units NCAUTION The board contains components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge These components can be easily destroyed if not handled properly If you do have to use electronic boards however please observe the following e You should only touch electronic boards if absolutely necessary e When you touch boards however your body must be electrically discharged beforehand e Boards must not come into contact with highly insulating materials such as plastic parts insulated desktops articles of clothing manufactured from man made fibers e Boards must only be placed on conductive surfaces e Boards and components should only be stored and transported in conductive packaging such as metalized plastic boxes or metal containers e If the packaging material is not conductive the boards must be wrapped with a conductive packaging material such as conductive foam rubber or household aluminum foil The necessary ESD protective measures are clearly illustrated in the following diagram e a conductive floor surface e b ESD table e c ESD shoes e d ESD overall e e ESD wristband e f cabinet ground connection e g contact with conductive flooring Sitting Standing Standing sitting Figure 1 1 ESD protective measures Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 15 Safety
50. 500 Fixing screw M10 M10 M10 Protective conductor connection Max PE1 GND mm 2x 185 2 x 240 2 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 350 2 x 500 2 x 500 Max PE2 GND mm 2x 185 2 x 240 2 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 350 2 x 500 2 x 500 Fixing screw M10 M10 M10 Frame size FX GX GX Approx weight kg 104 162 162 Dimensions W x H x D mm 326 x 1 400 x 356 326 x 1 533 x 545 326 x 1 533 x 545 Recommended protection Line protection w o semicond protection 3NA3240 6 3NA3244 6 3NA3252 6 Rated current A 200 250 315 frame size to DIN 43620 1 2 2 2 Line and semi cond protection 3NE1225 2 3NE1227 2 3NE1230 2 Rated current A 200 250 315 1 1 see Overload capability see Overload capability Derating data 1 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s 2 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s 3 Maximum output frequency at factory set default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output frequency see Functions monitoring and protective functions Increasing the output frequency for information on derating data see 362 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Technical specifications Table 12 16 Power Module 660 V 690 V 3 AC part 3 12 3 Technical specifications
51. 69 73 70 73 70 73 Line connection Maximum DIN VDE mm2 2x240 4 x 240 4 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 500 4 x 500 4 x 500 Fixing screw M10 M12 M12 Motor connection Maximum DIN VDE mm 2 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 500 4 x 500 4 x 500 Fixing screw M10 M12 M12 Protective conductor connection Max PE1 GND mm 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 500 2 x 500 2 x 500 Max PE2 GND mm 2 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 500 4 x 500 4 x 500 Fixing screw M10 M12 M12 Frame size GX HX HX Approx weight kg 162 294 294 Dimensions W x H x D mm 326 x 1 533 x 545 503 x 1 506 x 540 503 x 1 506 x 540 Recommended protection Line protection w o semicond protection 3NA3365 6 3NA3365 6 3NA3252 6 Rated current A 500 500 2x 315 frame size to DIN 43620 1 3 3 2 Line and semicond protection 4 3NE1334 2 3NE1334 2 3NE1435 2 Rated current A 500 500 560 frame size to DIN 43620 1 2 2 3 1 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 2 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 3 Maximum output frequency at factory set default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output frequency see Functions monitoring and protective functions Increasing the output frequency for information on derating data see
52. Category Unit Order number 6SL3310 1GH32 6AA0 1GH33 3AA0 1GH34 1AA0 Rated motor output kW 250 315 400 Rated input voltage V 660 V to 690 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 270 343 426 Rated output current A 260 330 410 Base load current IL A 250 320 400 Base load current IH 2 A 233 280 367 Max output frequency 3 Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 5 0 5 8 7 5 Max current requirements at 24 A 0 9 0 9 1 V DC Cooling air requirement m s 0 36 0 36 0 78 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 69 73 69 73 70 73 Line connection Maximum DIN VDE mm 2x240 2x240 4 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 500 2 x 500 4 x 500 Fixing screw M10 M10 M12 Motor connection Maximum DIN VDE mm2 2x240 2x240 4 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 500 2 x 500 4 x 500 Fixing screw M10 M10 M12 Protective conductor connection Max PE1 GND mm 2x240 2x240 2x240 AWG MCM 2 x 500 2 x 500 2 x 500 Max PE2 GND mm 2x240 2x240 4 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 500 2 x 500 4 x 500 Fixing screw M10 M10 M12 Frame size GX GX HX Approx weight kg 162 162 294 Dimensions W x H x D mm 326 x 1 533 x 545 326 x 1 533 x 545 503 x 1 506 x 540 Recommended protection Line protection w o semicond protection 3NA3354 6 3NA3365 6 3NA3365 6 Rated current A 355 500 500 frame size to DIN 43620 1 3 3 3 Line and semi cond protection 3NE1331 2 3NE1334 2 3NE1334 2 Rated current A 350 500 500 frame size to DIN 43620 1 2 2 2 1 The base load current IL is based
53. DCNS Connection for dV dt filter DCPS Shield connection F10 F11 Fan fuses X9 External 24 V DC power supply Setting terminals for the fan transformer PE2 connection Motor connection Figure 4 3 Connection overview of Power Module frame size FX without front cover Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 45 Electrical installation 4 6 Connection overview Power Module frame size GX Zz o o i Type plate IP Tt Connection bracket for interference suppression capacitor fi o A 7 7 s ale o Figure 4 4 46 PE1 connection Line supply connection Z Braking Module connection Mounting location for CU320 Control Interface Board DCNS Connection for dv dt filter DCPS Shield connection F10 F11 fan fuses X9 external 24 V DC supply Setting terminals for the fan transformer PE2 connection Motor connection Connection overview of Power Module frame size GX without front cover Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Electrical installation 4 6 Connection overview Power Module frame size HX Line supply connection PE1 connection DCPS Connection for dv dt filter DCNS Type plates Connectio
54. DO p0728 1 1 Set DI DO11 input or output CU 0 Input CU p0742 DI DO12 CU r2138 7 Ack fault Vector p0748 12 Invert DI DO12 CU 0 Not inverted po728 12 Set DI DO12 input or output CU 1 Output CU p0743 DI DO13 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 13 Invert DI DO13 CU 0 Not inverted po728 13 Set DI DO13 input or output CU 1 Output CU p0744 DI DO14 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 14 Invert DI DO14 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 14 Set DI DO14 input or output CU 1 Output CU p0745 DI DO15 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 15 Invert DI DO15 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 15 Set DI DO15 input or output CU 1 Output CU Inverter chassis units 374 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Appendix Parameter macro p0700 2 Terminal TM31 70002 This macro is used to set terminal block TM31 as the command source A 2 Parameter macros Table A 3 Parameter macro p0700 2 TM31 terminals Sink Source Parameters Description DO Parameters Description DO po840 0 ON OFF1 Vector r4022 0 TM31 DIO TM31 po844 0 No OFF2_1 Vector 1 p0845 0 No OFF2_2 Vector r4022 4 TM31 DI4 TM31 pos48 0 No OFF3_1 Vector 1 p0849 0 No OFF3_2 Vector r4022 5 TM31 DI5 TM31 p0806 Inhibit LOCAL mode Vector 0 p0810 Switchover CDS bit 0 Vector 0 p0852 Enable operation Vector 1 p0854 Control from PLC Vector 1 p0922 Profibus PZD telegram selection Vector 999 Free telegram configur
55. Diagnosis Description This section describes procedures for identifying the causes of problems and the measures you need to take to rectify them Note If errors or malfunctions occur in the device you must carefully check the possible causes and take the necessary steps to rectify them If you cannot identify the cause of the problem or you discover that components are defective your regional office or sales office should contact Siemens Service and describe the problem in more detail Inverter chassis units 294 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Diagnosis faults and alarms 10 2 1 Diagnostics via LEDs CU320 Control Unit Table 10 1 Description of the LEDs on the CU320 10 2 Diagnosis LED Color Status Description OFF No electronics power supply or electronics power supply is outside permissible tolerance range Green Continuous The component is ready to operate and cyclic DRIVE CLIQ RDY communication is taking place The Control Unit is awaiting first commissioning wendy 2 Hz flashing light Writing to CompactFlash card Red Continuous At least one fault is present in this component 0 5 Hz flashing CompactFlash Card has not been inserted light Boot error e g firmware cannot be loaded to the RAM Green red Flashing light Control Unit 320 is ready to operate 0 5 Hz However there are no software licenses Orange Continuous System is booting and DRIVE CLiQ communication is
56. Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 MDS 0 Options Control structure Drive setting Motor Motor data Calculation of the motor controller data Optional Motor D No calculation at Equivalent Circuit C12 C Complete calculation without equiv circuit diag data Motor holding brake Encoder Complete calculation with equiv circuit diagram data Defaults of the setp Drive functions PROFIBUS proces Important paramete E Note The basic settings of the curent and speed control and limits as well as the ESB data are calculated from the entered type plate S gt data The type plate data must be complete The calculation overwrites entered ESB datal Input of the ESB data according to the data sheet is preferable to a calculation Summary Mi Cancel Help Figure 5 21 Calculating the motor controller data 24 In Calculation of the motor controller data choose the appropriate default settings for your device configuration Note If the equivalent circuit diagram data was entered manually see Entering the equivalent circuit diagram data the motor controller data should be calculated without calculating the equivalent circuit diagram data 25 Click Continue gt Inverter chassis units 104 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Commissioning Configuring the motor holding brake 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER
57. F7434 is issued Reversing can be observed by checking parameters r0069 phase currents and r0089 phase voltage The absolute position reference is lost on reversal FD 4704 4715 Encoder evaluation FD 6730 6731 Current control e r0069 Phase currents actual value e r0089 Phase voltage actual value e p1820 Output phase direction reversal e p1821 Direction reversal Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 265 Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 2 Drive functions 9 2 12 Unit switchover Description Parameters and process variables for input and output can be switched to a suitable units system SI units US units or referenced variables with the help of the unit changeover function The following constraints apply to the unit changeover e Unit changeover is only possible for the VECTOR drive object e Type plate parameters of the converter and or motor can be changed between SI US units but not to a referenced form of depiction e Once the changeover parameters have been changed over all parameters which are assigned to a group of dependent units are jointly changed over to the new unit e A separate parameter is available for selecting technological units p0595 for the representation of technological variables in the technology controller e lfachangeover is made to referenced variables and the reference variable is subsequently changed the value entered in a parameter will not chang
58. Figure 11 15 Replacing the fan frame size GX 334 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Description The average service life of the device fans is 50 000 hours In practice however the service life depends on other variables e g ambient temperature degree of cabinet protection etc and therefore may deviate from this value The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the chassis unit is available Preparatory steps e Disconnect the chassis unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access e Remove the protective cover Removal The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with the diagram 1 Remove the retaining screws for the fan 3 screws 2 Disconnect the supply cables 1 x L 1 x N You can now carefully remove the fan CAUTION When removing the fan ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation For re installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current carrying parts must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 335 Maintenance
59. Power Module With frame sizes HX and JX the CU320 is installed in the Power Module Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 35 Mechanical installation 3 5 Control Unit CU320 CU320 CompactFlash card The CompactFlash card contains the control software and parameters Note The CompactFlash card may only be inserted and removed when the Control Unit is disconnected from the power supply If it is inserted and removed when the power supply is connected this can damage the CompactFlash card and or result in data being lost Inverter chassis units 36 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Mechanical installation 3 6 TM31 Terminal Module 3 6 TM31 Terminal Module Description The TM31 Terminal Module is a terminal extension board It can be used to increase the number of digital inputs outputs Analog inputs and outputs are also available on the TM31 NCAUTION The 80 mm ventilation clearances above and below the Terminal Module must be observed If these clearances are not observed this can result in a thermal overload of the Terminal Module Dimension drawing Figure 3 2 Dimension drawing of the TM31 Terminal Module Note The TM31 is installed near the Power Module on a mounting rail which must be provided by the customer Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 37 Mechanical installation 3 7
60. Power Module 660 V 690 V 3 AC part 5 12 3 Technical specifications Category Unit Order number 6SL3310 1GH38 1AA0 Rated motor output kW 800 Rated input voltage V 660 V to 690 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 842 Rated output current A 810 Base load current IL A 790 Base load current IH 2 A 724 Max output frequency 3 Hz 100 Power loss kW 13 9 Max current requirements at 24 A 1 25 V DC Cooling air requirement m s 1 48 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 73 75 Line connection Maximum DIN VDE mm2 6 x 240 AWG MCM 6 x 500 Fixing screw M12 Motor connection Maximum DIN VDE mm2 6 x 240 AWG MCM 6 x 500 Fixing screw M12 Protective conductor connection Max PE1 GND mm 2x240 AWG MCM 2 x 500 Max PE2 GND mm 6 x 240 AWG MCM 6 x 500 Fixing screw M12 Frame size JX Approx weight kg 530 Dimensions W x H x D mm 908 5 x 1 510 x 540 Recommended protection Line protection w o semicond protection Circuit breaker Rated current A frame size to DIN 43620 1 Line and semi cond protection Circuit breaker Rated current A frame size to DIN 43620 1 1 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 2 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s
61. SMC30 Sensor Module 3 7 SMC30 Sensor Module Description The SMC30 Sensor Module is a module for evaluating encoder signals TTL HTL encoders with or without open circuit monitoring can be connected to the SMC30 The motor temperature can also be detected using KTY84 1C130 or PTC thermistors ANCAUTION The 80 mm ventilation clearances above and below the SMC30 Sensor Module must be observed If these clearances are not observed this can result in a thermal overload of the Sensor Module Dimension drawing Figure 3 3 Dimension drawing of the SMC30 Sensor Module Note The SMC30 is installed near the Power Module on a mounting rail which must be provided by the customer Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Electrical installation 4 1 Chapter content This chapter provides information on the following Establishing the electrical connections for the Power Module the CU320 Control Unit and the optional TM31 Terminal Module and SMC30 Sensor Module e Adjusting the fan voltage and the internal power supply in line with local conditions supply voltage The interfaces for the CU320 Control Unit TM31 Terminal Module and SMC30 Sensor Module 4 2 Preparation Required tools To install the connections you will require Inverter chassis units Spanner or socket spanner w f 10 Spanner or socket spanner w f 13 Spanner or socket span
62. Signal name Technical specifications 1 Reserved do not use 2 Reserved do not use 3 Reserved do not use 4 P_Encoder 5 V 24V Encoder power supply 5 P_Encoder 5 V 24 V Encoder supply 6 P_Sense Sense input encoder power supply 7 M_Encoder M Ground for encoder power supply 8 Reserved do not use 9 M_Sense Ground sense input 10 R Reference signal R 11 R Inverted reference signal R 12 B Inverted incremental signal B 13 B Incremental signal B 14 A Inverted incremental signal A 15 A Incremental signal A 76 Connector type 15 pin socket CAUTION The encoder power supply can be parameterized to 5 V or 24 V The encoder may be destroyed if you enter the wrong parameter Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Electrical installation 4 10 Signal connections X521 X531 Encoder connection 2 for HTL TTL encoder with open circuit monitoring Table 4 32 Encoder connection X521 Terminal Signal name Technical specifications 1 A Incremental signal A 2 A Inverted incremental signal A 3 B Incremental signal B 4 B Inverted incremental signal B 5 R Reference signal R 6 R Inverted reference signal R 7 CTRL Control signal 8 M Ground via inductivity Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm AWG 14 Note When unipolar HTL encoders are used A B and R on the terminal block must be jumpered with M_Encoder X53
63. Telegrams and process data 161 Temperature sensor 70 Thermal monitoring 286 Thermal motor protection 290 TM31 65 Connection overview 66 TM31 front view 65 TM31 Terminal Module 37 65 Tool 29 39 307 Torque limiting 227 Transportation 26 Type plate 23 Date of manufacture 23 Specifications 24 U Unit switchover 266 Unpacking the cabinets 29 V V f control 204 Vdc control 246 Vdc_max control 249 Vdc_min control 247 Vector control with encoder 214 without encoder 212 Vector speed torque control with without encoder 211 Voltage boost During acceleration 209 Permanent 208 Voltage Boost 207 W Wiring diagram DRIVE CLiQ connections 54 X X100 58 X101 58 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Index X102 58 X103 58 X122 58 X124 59 X126 60 X132 59 X140 62 X1400 175 X400 56 X401 56 X402 56 X41 55 X42 56 X500 67 X501 67 X520 68 SMC30 76 X521 69 SMC30 77 X522 70 X524 68 X530 69 X531 SMC30 77 X540 70 X541 71 X542 72 X9 55 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 387 A5E00331449A Siemens AG Automation and Drives Large Drives PO Box 4743 90025 NUREMBERG GERMANY www ad siemens com
64. WORD Remove the connection for the current transformer and associated PE connection 1 plug 7 Unscrew the two retaining screws for the fan and attach the tool for de installing the power block at this position You can now remove the power block CAUTION When removing the power block ensure that you do not damage any signal cables For re installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current carrying parts must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 323 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components 11 4 5 Replacing the Control Interface Board frame size FX Replacing the Control Interface Board amp 410 lo gt O ETI s A E o e ls G Tim gN f j o o AN wi A in Y pel PU ME E A 4g o P a s 1e i IL P 4 a s es re ae at y f a a mo lm id TT ie Ff ae p t 3 Mi PE n Figure 11 10 Replacing the control interface board frame size FX Inverter chassis units 324 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Preparatory steps e Disconnect the built in unit from th
65. a 125 us grid within the limits of 500 us planned as of FW2 5 SP1 1 ms to 4 ms Time scheduled data transmission Data exchange Inverter chassis units Scheduling is the specification of the communication paths and the exact transmission times for the data to be transferred The bandwidth can be optimally utilized through communication scheduling and therefore the best possible performance achieved The highest determinism quality is achieved through the scheduling of the transmission times which is especially advantageous for an isochronous application connection The communication scheduling is performed by the engineering system An IRT planning algorithm is available for this The schedule results must be transferred to each lO controller through a download The lO controller then loads the schedule results into the lO devices during ramp up The communication with IRTtop is performed on the basis of these schedule data The scheduled data transfer requires a hardware support for PROFINET IO with IRTtop in the form of a communication ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit In order for scheduled communication not to be put at risk by spontaneously transmitted IT telegrams a certain proportion of cyclic communication is reserved exclusively for IRTtop transmission This is called bandwidth reservation The rest of the communication cycle can be used for RT and IT communication Communication is generally also possible via networ
66. analog output 0 from voltage to current output 0 20 mA X522 3 2 y p4076 0 y Current output present at terminal 3 ground is at terminal 2 Set analog output type Oto 0 20 mA Example changing analog output 0 from voltage to current output 0 20 mA and setting the characteristic 234 X522 3 2 y p4076 0 0 t p4077 0 0 00 t p4078 0 0 000 x p4079 0 100 00 p4080 0 20 000 Current output present at terminal 3 ground is at terminal 2 Set TM31 AO_type analog output 0 to 0 20 mA Set TM31 AO_char x1 to 0 00 Set TM31 A0_char y1 to 0 mA Set TM31 AO_char x2 to 100 00 Set TM31 A0_char y2 to 20 mA Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Output terminals 8 3 TM31 digital outputs 8 3 TM31 digital outputs Description Four bi directional digital outputs terminal X541 and two relay outputs terminal X542 are available on the optional TM31 terminal block module These outputs are for the most part freely parameterizable Prerequisites e The Power Module CU320 and TM31 have been correctly installed e The TM31 terminals or Profidrive TM31 default setting was chosen during commissioning STARTER TM31 terminals or Profidrive TM31 AOP30 2 TM31 terminals or 4 Profidrive TM31 Signal flow diagram Inversion 4 X542 DOO o R ape 1 Ready to start PA r0899 0 o
67. and servicing 11 4 Replacing components 11 4 11 Replacing the fan frame size HX Replacing the fan left hand power block a mma Figure 11 16 Replacing the fan frame size HX left hand power block Inverter chassis units 336 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Description The average service life of the device fans is 50 000 hours In practice however the service life depends on other variables e g ambient temperature degree of cabinet protection etc and therefore may deviate from this value The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the chassis unit is available Preparatory steps e Disconnect the chassis unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access e Remove the protective cover Removal The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with the diagram 1 Remove the copper bar 6 screws 2 Remove the retaining screws for the fan 3 screws 3 Disconnect the supply cables 1 x L 1 x N You can now carefully remove the fan CAUTION When removing the fan ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation For re installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current carrying parts must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections an
68. chassis units You do not define the supply voltage and cooling type yet 4 A list is now displayed under Drive unit selection Choose the corresponding drive unit according to type order no see type plate 5 Click Continue gt Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Choosing the options Configuration SINAMICS_G130 Options Drive unit Configure the order options Control structure ODrive setting Options selection Motor C Motor holding brake 1x TM31 2 TM31 Drive functions SMC30 encoder module PROF z dw dt filter Important parameters Sinusoidal filter Summary Motor choke CBE20 Profinet module CBC10 CAN module TB 30 terminal board Defaults of the setpoini The options and the selection of the driving unit can no longer be changed after the Wizard page has been exited with Continue Cancel Help Figure 5 14 Choosing the options 6 From the combination box Choosing the options select the options belonging to your drive unit by clicking on the corresponding check box CAUTION If a sine wave filter is connected it must be activated when the options are selected to prevent the filter from being destroyed Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 93 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for com
69. configuration This is intentional because By taking time to consider what configuration data you enter you can prevent inconsistencies between the project data and drive unit data identifiable in online mode Creating a project Click the STARTER icon on your desktop or choose the following menu path in the Windows start menu to call up STARTER Start gt Simatic gt STEP 7 gt STARTER The first time you run the software the main screen shown below appears with the following windows e STARTER Getting Started Drive Commissioning e STARTER Project Wizard The commissioning steps are listed below in numerical order Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Accessing the STARTER project Wizard STARTER Project Aktualisieren Drucken Optionen Full Text Search Started with Commi 2 Use project wizard Commissioning the Drives Standard commissioning If this page should no longer be displayed automatically at the start select Options gt Settings and deactivate in the Display first steps at the start option in the Workbench tab A wizard provides support for the project creation the configuration of the drive and the interface It will also assist you with your online and offline configuration To call the wizard select Project gt New with Wizard from the menu bar How to use the project wizard e Us
70. control if closed loop torque control is directly selected with p1300 22 or 23 The torque setpoint and or supplementary setpoint can be entered using BICO parameter p1503 Cl torque setpoint or p1511 Cl supplementary torque setpoint The supplementary torque acts both for closed loop torque as well as for the closed loop speed control As a result of this characteristic a pre control torque can be implemented for the closed loop speed control using the supplementary torque setpoint Note For safety reasons assignments to fixed torque setpoints are currently not possible If energy is regenerated and cannot be injected back into the line supply then a Braking Module with connected braking resistor must be used Inverter chassis units 224 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Setpoint channel and closed loop control OFF responses Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder ia O r1547 0 r1538 Speed setpoint gt oo oy O TA Tos r1547 1 r1539 setpoint Actual speed value M_setp p1300 Mot gt 1 M_ctr active 1 M_ctr active gt 1 FP2520 7 M_suppl 1 ri515 M_suppl 1 scal 0 M_suppl 2 scal M_suppl 2 SUPE 0 Figure 7 16 Closed loop speed torque control The total of the two torque setpoints is limited in the same way as the speed control torque setpoint Above the maximum speed
71. control source e p1428 Speed pre control balancing dead time e p1429 Speed pre control balancing time constant e p1496 Acceleration pre control scaling e 1518 Acceleration torque Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 219 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder 7 4 3 2 Reference model Description Function diagram Parameters 220 The reference model becomes operative when p1400 3 1 and p1400 2 0 The reference model is used to emulate the speed control loop with a P speed controller The loop emulation can be set in p1433 to p1435 It becomes effective if p1437 is connected to the output of the model r1436 The reference model delays the setpoint actual value deviation for the integral component of the speed controller so that settling stabilizing operations can be suppressed The reference model can also be externally emulated and the external signal entered via p1437 Droop injection Reference model pre control p1433 p1435 orque Speed setpoint setpoint r1547 1 r1539 Ti K T Actual speed value E z 3 SLVC p1452 p1470 p1472 T VC p1442 p1460 p1462 Figure 7 12 Reference model FP 6031 Pre control balancing reference acceleration model e p1400 3 Reference model speed setpoint component e p1433 Speed controller reference model natural frequency e p1434 Speed controller reference model d
72. cused adeetdnedecuslecgentaed eeetaden eetnnoneegeuecten 336 11 4 12 Replacing the fan frame size JX ee cece e ee eene ee ee ene ee ee eaaeee ee taeee canon cnc nano nc cnn non cnn nana nccnnnncnnns 340 11 5 Forming the DC link capacitofS siasio ranis tinae ea aia AANE rra 344 11 6 Messages after replacing DRIVE CLIQ components oconoccccccnnocccccononcncnnnnncnnnnnnnccnnnnnnncnnnnnccnnnns 345 11 7 Upgrading the chassis Unit fir MWare oonnnoccnnnnininnnnnncccnnnna coco narcnnn arrancan rr rr 346 12 Technical Specifications iii a A e 347 12 1 Chapter Content meriter neiii ae a aaa a ea a iia rd add 347 12 2 General specifications mresa einai a e eaa a a E e a 348 A2 251i Derating data oann Sen a wes AE di 349 12 22 Overload CapabllilV Gi A A E A iz 353 12 3 Technical specifications ccecececeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeae cece eeeceaaaeceeeseeeeceaeaeeeeeeseceacaeeeeeseeeseneeeeseeesaees 354 122321 Power Module e a a a a ad 355 12 3 2 Control Unit CU320 eein asenin a Wek ede end deena leed dada ii A A a 366 12 33 TM31 Terminal Mod le 3 tii daa 367 12 34 gt SMC30 Sensor Module voii ae anal 368 A APPO iii At ica 369 A 1 List of abbreviations icie et ate As tddi 369 A 2 Parameterimacrosei 2 0 4 ete iss ede eh ee he ee O e o te ee a ds 371 WAG OX coito A A A E A E AAA Seen 383 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 11 Table of contents 12 Inverter chassis units Oper
73. data 3 TX Transmit data 4 Reserved do not use 5 Reserved do not use 6 TX Transmit data 7 Reserved do not use 8 Reserved do not use Screened backshell M_EXT Screen permanently connected Mounting Inverter chassis units CAUTION The Option Board may only be inserted and removed when the Control Unit and Option Board are disconnected from the power supply 1 Release and remove the protective cover S i T10 Fixing screws M3 0 8 Nm 2 Introduce and fix the Option Board Figure 6 22 Mounting the CBE20 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 175 Operation 6 7 PROFINET IO 6 7 2 Activating online operation STARTER via PROFINET IO Description The following options are available for online operation via PROFINET lO e Online operation via IP Prerequisites e STARTER with version gt 4 1 1 e Firmware version gt 2 5 1 e CBE20 STARTER via PROFINET IO example PROFINET interface STARTER PG PC CU320 Ethernet PROFINET Y Y adapter Device1 IP 1 Figure 6 23 STARTER via PROFINET example Procedure establishing online operation with PROFINET 1 Set the IP address in Windows XP The PC PG is referred here to a fixed free IP address 2 Settings in STARTER 3 Assignment of the IP address and the name for the PROFINET interface of the drive unit The PROFINET interface must be ba
74. data of ramp function generator p1120 ff Characteristic data of controller p1240 ff The parameters that are grouped together in the drive data set are identified in the SINAMICS parameter list by Data Set DDS and are assigned an index 0 n It is possible to parameterize several drive data sets You can switch easily between different drive configurations control type motor encoder by selecting the corresponding drive data set One drive object can manage up to 32 drive data sets The number of drive data sets is configured with p0180 Binector inputs p0820 to p0824 are used to select a drive data set They represent the number of the drive data set 0 to 31 in binary format where p0824 is the most significant bit e p0820 BI Drive data set selection DDS bit 0 e p0821 BI Drive data set selection DDS bit 1 e p0822 BI Drive data set selection DDS bit 2 e p0823 BI Drive data set selection DDS bit 3 e p0824 BI Drive data set selection DDS bit 4 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 3 Basic information about the drive system Supplementary conditions and recommendations e Recommendation for the number of DDS in a drive The number of DDS in a drive should correspond with the number of switchover options in other words p0180 DDS 2 p0130 MDS e Max number of DDS for one drive object 32 DDS EDS Encoder data set Inverter chassis units An encoder data s
75. device fans is 50 000 hours In practice however the service life depends on other variables e g ambient temperature degree of cabinet protection etc and therefore may deviate from this value The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the chassis unit is available Preparatory steps e Disconnect the chassis unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access e Remove the protective cover Removal The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with the diagram 1 Remove the copper bar 8 screws 2 Remove the retaining screws for the fan 3 screws 3 Disconnect the supply cables 1 x L 1 x N You can now carefully remove the fan CAUTION When removing the fan ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation For re installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current carrying parts must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 343 Maintenance and servicing 11 5 Forming the DC link capacitors 11 5 Description Procedure 344 Forming the DC link capacitors If the device is kept in storage for more than 2 years the
76. devices are heavy or top heavy e Due to their weight the devices must be handled with care by trained personnel e Serious injury or even death and substantial material damage can occur if the devices are not lifted or transported properly J N WARNING The cabinet units are operated with high voltages All connection work must be carried out when the cabinet is de energized All work on the device must be carried out by trained personnel only Non observance of these warnings can result in death serious personal injury or substantial property damage Work on an open device must be carried out with extreme caution because external supply voltages may be present The power and control terminals may be live even when the motor is not running Dangerously high voltage levels are still present in the device up to five minutes after it has been disconnected due to the DC link capacitors For this reason the cabinet should not be opened until after a reasonable period of time has elapsed Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 311 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components 11 4 1 Replacing the power block frame size FX Replacing the power block Figure 11 4 Replacing the power block frame size FX Inverter chassis units 312 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Preparatory steps e Disconnect the built in unit from the power
77. does not rotate forward n_act lt 0 15 Alarm drive converter thermal 1 No alarm present BO r2135 15 overload O Alarm drive converter thermal overload The overtemperature alarm for the converter is active Status word 1 interface mode PROF Idrive VIK NAMUR p2038 2 Table 6 14 Status word 1 interface mode PROFldrive VIK NAMUR p2038 2 Bit Meaning Explanation BICO 0 Ready to power up 1 Ready to power up BO r0899 0 Power supply on electronics initialized line contactor released if necessary pulses inhibited 0 Not ready to power up 1 Ready 1 Ready BO r0899 1 Voltage at Line Module i e line contactor closed if used field being built up O Not ready Cause No ON command has been issued 2 Operation enabled 1 Operation enabled BO r0899 2 Enable electronics and pulses then ramp up to active setpoint O Operation inhibited 3 Fault active 1 Fault active BO r2139 3 The drive is faulty and is therefore out of service The drive switches to Power on inhibit once the fault has been acknowledged and the cause has been remedied The active faults are stored in the fault buffer Inverter chassis units 170 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 6 PROFIBUS Bit Meaning Explanation BICO O No fault present There is no active fault in the fault buffer 4 No OFF2 active 1 No OFF2 activ
78. e The preparations for installing the chassis units and optional components Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 25 Mechanical installation 3 2 Transportation and storage 3 2 Transportation and storage Transportation 26 NWARNING The following must be taken into account when the devices are transported The devices are heavy Their center of gravity is displaced and they can be top heavy Suitable hoisting gear operated by trained personnel is essential due to the weight of the devices The devices must only be transported in the upright position indicated The devices must not be transported upside down or horizontally Serious injury or even death and substantial material damage can occur if the devices are not lifted or transported properly Note Notes regarding transportation The devices are packaged by the manufacturers in accordance with the climatic conditions and stress encountered during transit and in the recipient country The notes on the packaging for transportation storage and proper handling must be observed The devices must be carried on a wooden palette when transported with fork lift trucks When the devices are unpacked they can be transported using the transport eyebolts attached The load must be distributed evenly Chains attached to the transport eyebolts must only be loaded vertically from above Heavy blows or impacts must be avoided during
79. enabled e Standstill static measurement after the measurement has been completed the pulses are inhibited and parameter p1910 is reset to 0 e Encoder adjustment after the measurement has been completed the pulses are inhibited and parameter p1990 is reset to 0 e Rotating measurement after the measurement has been completed the pulses are inhibited and parameter p1960 is reset to 0 e After all of the measurements activated using p1900 have been successfully completed p1900 itself is set to 0 Note To set the new controller setting permanently the data must be saved with p0977 or p0971 on the non volatile CompactFlash card N DANGER During motor identification the drive might set the motor in motion The EMERGENCY STOP functions must be fully operational during commissioning To protect the machines and personnel the relevant safety regulations must be observed Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 239 Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 2 Drive functions 9 2 1 1 Standstill measurement Description 240 Motor identification with p1910 is used for determining the motor parameters at standstill see also p1960 speed controller optimization e Equivalent circuit diagram data p1910 1 e Magnetization characteristic p1910 3 For control engineering reasons you are strongly advised to carry out motor identification because the equivalent circuit diagram
80. fault Vector p0748 12 Invert DI DO12 CU 0 Not inverted po728 12 Set DI DO12 input or output CU 1 Output CU p0743 DI DO13 CU Factory setting p0748 13 Invert DI DO13 CU Factory setting p0728 13 Set DI DO13 input or output CU Factory setting p0744 DI DO14 CU Factory setting p0748 14 Invert DI DO14 CU Factory setting p0728 14 Set DI DO14 input or output CU Factory setting p0745 DI DO15 CU Factory setting p0748 15 Invert DI DO15 CU Factory setting p0728 15 Set DI DO15 input or output CU Factory setting p2103 1 Acknowledge faults TM31 0 p2104 2 Acknowledge faults TM31 r4022 3 TM31 DI3 TM31 p4030 DOO TM31 r0899 11 Pulses enabled Vector p4031 DO1 TM31 r2139 3 Fault Vector p4038 DO8 TM31 r0899 0 Ready to start Vector p4028 8 Set DI DO8 input or output TM31 1 Output TM31 p4039 DO9 TM31 Factory setting p4028 9 Set DI DO9 input or output TM31 Factory setting p4040 DO10 TM31 Factory setting p4028 10 Set DI DO10 input or output TM31 Factory setting p4041 DO11 TM31 Factory setting p4028 11 Set DI DO11 input or output TM31 Factory setting Inverter chassis units 376 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Appendix Parameter macro p0700 3 CU terminals 70003 A 2 Parameter macros This macro is used to set the CU320 terminals as the command source Table A 4 Parameter macro p0700
81. for changing over are set using parameters Once the bypass without synchronizer p1260 3 function has been activated the following parameters must be set Table 9 7 Parameter settings for bypass function with synchronizer without degree of overlapping Parameter Description p1262 Bypass dead time setting p1263 Debypass dead time setting p1264 Bypass delay time setting p1265 Speed threshold setting when p1267 1 1 p1266 Control signal setting when p1267 0 1 p1267 0 Trigger signal setting for bypass function p1267 1 p1269 1 Signal source for contactor K2 feedback p3800 1 The internal voltages are used for synchronization p3802 r1261 2 Synchronizer activation is triggered by the bypass function P1200 1 The flying restart function is always active 9 3 2 4 Function diagram Inverter chassis units FP 7020 Synchronization Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 279 Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 3 Extended functions 9 3 2 5 Parameters Bypass function e p1200 e p1260 e 11261 e p1262 e p1263 e p1264 e p1265 e p1266 e p1267 e p1268 e p1269 e p1274 Flying restart operating mode Bypass configuration CO BO Bypass control status word Bypass dead time Debypass delay time Bypass delay time Bypass speed threshold Bl Bypass control command Bypass changeover source configuration Bl Bypass feedback signal synchron
82. for the field weakening characteristic p0322 Maximum motor speed Maximum mechanical speed p0323 Maximum motor current De magnetization protection p0325 Rotor position identification current 1st phase p0327 Optional load angle Optional otherwise leave at 90 p0328 Reluctance torque constant p0329 Rotor position identification current p0341 Motor moment of inertia For speed controller pre control p0344 Motor weight p0350 Stator resistance cold p0356 Quadrature axis stator inductance Lq p0357 In line stator inductance Ld Short circuit protection For a short circuit that can occur in the drive converter or in the motor cable the rotating machine would supply the short circuit until it comes to a standstill An output contactor can be used for protection This should be located as close as possible to the motor This is especially necessary if the motor can still be driven by the load when a fault develops The contactor must be provided with a protective circuit against overvoltage on the motor side so that the motor winding is not damaged as a result of the shutdown Control signal r0863 1 is used to control the contactor via a freely available digital output the feedback signal contact of the contactor is connected to parameter p0864 via a free digital input This means that if the drive converter develops a fault with a shutdown response at the instant in time that the pulses are inhibited the motor is isolate
83. functions PROFIBUS proces _ lmportant paramete Summary Enter data Encoder type 2048 HTL A B A 1024 HTL A B 1024 TTLA B 2048 HTL A B 2048 TTL A B 1024 HTL 4 6 unipolar 2048 HTL A B unipolar 2048 TTLA B A with sense User defined Figure 5 23 Entering the encoder data 28 In the Name field enter a name of your choice 106 Which encoder do you want to use l Encoder 2 l Encoder 3 Encoder_1 SMC30 SMC30 3 v C Encoder with Drive CIiQ interface Read en C Select standard encoder from list Encoder data Code number 3003 3005 3006 3007 3008 3009 3011 3020 9999 v Details Cancel Help Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Note In the factory setting an HTL encoder is bipolar with 1024 pulses per revolution on terminal block X521 X531 of the SMC30 Sensor Module 29 To select a different predefined encoder configuration check the Select standard encoder from list radio button and select one of the encoders from the list 30 To enter special encoder configurations click the Enter data radio button and then the Encoder data button The following screen is displayed in which you can enter the required data Encoder data Encoder type Incremental tracks Pulses revolution 1024 Level e HTL S L e Rotary l Track monitori
84. further plugs one after the other 2 at the top 3 at the bottom CAUTION When removing the electronics unit ensure that you do not damage any signal cables The Control Interface Board can then be removed from the slide in electronics unit CAUTION When removing the connector of the ribbon cable make sure that you actuate the locking lever on the connector very carefully e g with a screwdriver otherwise the lock could be damaged Installation For re installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current carrying parts must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure When dealing with connectors with a lock make sure that the locking lever is securely engaged once connected The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 331 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components 11 4 9 Replacing the fan frame size FX Replacing the fan Us de Tor ES ARES Godoi Mo Bi kt 8 p ko i an L gt Pp Te Sis ay onos HH t A un Q PE O jun fh Figure 11 14 Replacing the fan frame size FX Inverter chassis units 332 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing com
85. i Motor i Line supply on converter supply changeover on line supply Converter i changeover Motor on converter Figure 9 11 Signal diagram bypass with synchronization with overlap Inverter chassis units Transfer of motor to line supply contactors K1 and K2 are activated by the converter e The initial state is as follows Contactor K1 is closed contactor K2 is open and the motor is fed from the converter e The control bit bypass command p1266 is set e g by the higher level automation e The bypass function sets the control word bit synchronizing r1261 2 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 275 Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 3 Extended functions e Since the bit is set while the converter is running the Transfer motor to line supply synchronization process is started e Once motor synchronization to line frequency line voltage and line phasing is complete the synchronization algorithm reports this state r3819 2 e The bypass mechanism evaluates this signal and closes contactor K2 r1261 1 1 The signal is evaluated internally BICO wiring is not required e After contactor K2 has fed back the closed state r1269 1 1 contactor K1 is opened and the converter inhibits the pulses The converter is in Ready for operation and bypass state e Ifthe On command is cancelled in this phase the converter will change
86. line frequency 50 Hz motor data in kW e NEMA motor 60 Hz US unit line frequency 60 Hz motor data in hp 11 Under Supply voltage enter the appropriate voltage of the device 12 Click Continue gt Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 97 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Configuring the motor and selecting the motor type Konfiguration SINAMICS_G130 Motordaten Antriebsgerat Antrieb Antrieb_1 DDS 0 MDS 0 Optionen W Regelungsstruktur Motordaten Asynchronmotor rotierend Vorlage Antriebseinstellung Motor Motor Bemessungsspannung JMotorhaltebremse Motor Bemessungsstrom 233 00 Geber Motor Bemessungsleistung 108 00 Voreinstellungen der S Motor Bemessungsleistungstaktor 0 850 Antriebsfunktionen Motor Bemessungsfrequenz 50 90 Prozessdatenaustausc Motor Bemessungsdrehzahl 1500 0 Wichtige Parameter Motork hlart EA Zusammentass ung Die Motordaten miissen vollstandig eingegeben werden Wollen Sie optionale Daten eingeben Wollen Sie die Ersatzschaltbilddaten eingeben Hinweis Eine Abwahl der optionalen bzw der Ersatzschaltbilddaten setzt diese unwiderruflich zuriick Bei Abwahl der Ersatzschaltbilddaten ist eine Motoridentifik ation erforderlich Bei Eingabe der Ersatzschaltbilddaten ist eine Motoridentifikation optional lt Zur ck G Abbrechen Hilfe Figure 5 17 Conf
87. motor current x Permanent 10395 Current stator resistance x p1310 Permanent voltage boost Figure 7 6 Permanent voltage boost example p1300 0 p1310 gt 0 p1311 0 Inverter chassis units 208 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 3 V f control Voltage boost during acceleration p1311 Voltage boost is only active during acceleration or braking Voltage boost is only active if the Ramp up active signal r1199 0 1 is pending V V f linear Vmax OOI p eaei a aae v Accel 9 fsetp fn fmax f p0310 p1082 x EE E p0305 Rated motor current x Pole pair no r0395 Current stator resistance x p1311 Voltage boost on acceleration Figure 7 7 Voltage boost during acceleration example p1300 0 p1310 0 p1311 gt 0 Function diagram FP 6300 V f characteristic and voltage boost Parameters e p0304 Rated motor voltage e p0305 Rated motor current e r0395 Stator resistance actual e p1310 Permanent voltage boost e p1311 Voltage boost during acceleration e r1315 Voltage boost total Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 209 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 3 V f control 7 3 2 Slip compensation Description The slip compensation means that the speed of induction motors is essentially kept constant independent of the load M2 fa r A EE
88. mouse button and selecting the option Edit Ethernet node P Accessible nodes TCP IP Auto gt Broadcom NetXtreme Gig 4y Accessible nodes 3 Bus node address 0 0 Activate extended slot search Do you want to accept the selected drive units into the project Select drive units Refresh F5 Close Help Figure 6 27 STARTER Accessible nodes Edit Ethernet node Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 179 Operation 6 7 PROFINET IO In the following interactive screen enter a freely selectable device name and the IP address and subnet mask The subnet screens must match before STARTER can be run Edit Ethernet Node Node MAC address fj Detection using LED Device SINAMICS Assign name IP Configuration IP address 192 168 Gateway Do not use router 255 255 Subnet screen C Use router Address Assign IP configuration e Figure 6 28 STARTER Edit Ethernet nodes After selecting the Assign name button the following confirmation will appear if the assignment was successful Edit Ethernet node Y Name of the station has been set successfully Figure 6 29 STARTER Successful assignment of the device name After selecting the Assign IP configuration button the following confirmation will appear if the assignment was successful Inverter chassis units 180 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A
89. not be connected until a thorough high voltage test has been carried out Death serious injury or substantial material damage can result if these factors are not taken into account Storage The devices must be stored in clean dry rooms Temperatures between 25 C and 70 C are permissible Temperature variations greater than 20 K per hour are not permitted If the device is stored for a prolonged period once it has been unpacked cover it or take other appropriate measures to ensure that it does not become dirty and that it is protected against environmental influences If such measures are not taken the guarantee becomes invalid in the event of a claim for damages NWARNING The device should not be stored for more than two years If the device is stored for more than two years the DC link capacitors of the devices must be reformed during commissioning The reforming procedure is described in Maintenance and Servicing Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 27 Mechanical installation 3 3 Assembly 3 3 Assembly NWARNING To ensure that the devices operate safely and reliably they must be properly installed and commissioned by qualified personnel taking into account the warnings provided in these operating instructions In particular the general and national installation and safety guidelines for high voltage installations e g VDE
90. of interference a bipolar connection is recommended Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 73 Electrical installation 4 10 Signal connections Cable length m 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 For encoders with a 5 V supply at X521 X531 the cable length is dependent on the encoder current this applies cable cross sections of 0 5 mm o p O O 0 0 05 0 1 0 15 0 2 0 25 Encoder power consumption A 0 3 0 35 0 4 Figure 4 15 74 Signal cable length as a function of the sensor current consumption Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Electrical installation X500 4 10 Signal connections DRIVE CLiQ interface X524 Electronics power supply LEDs X520 TTL with open circuit detection HTL TTL with X521 open circuit detection X531 Protective conductor connection Shield connection M4 1 8 Nm Figure 4 16 SMC30 Sensor Module Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 75 Electrical installation 4 10 Signal connections 4 10 4 2 Connection X520 Encoder connection 1 for TTL encoder with open circuit monitoring Table 4 31 Encoder connection X520 uo 0000000 O 0 O O O O O O 1 Pin
91. of the slave SINAMICS the received process data comprises the receive words and the process data to be sent the send words The receive and send words comprise the following elements e Receive words Control words and setpoints e Send words Status words and actual values Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 161 Operation 6 6 PROFIBUS Default setting Profidrive When the Profidrive default setting is chosen for command and setpoint selection see Command sources Profidrive default settings Free telegram p0922 999 is selected The receive message frame is parameterized as follows as a result of the default setting plan 622 STW 1 N_SETP The send telegram is parameterized as follows factory setting plan 623 ZSW 1 N_ACT I_IST M_ACT P_ACT Fault You do not have to make any further settings in order to use these telegrams User defined telegram selection a Standard telegrams Standard telegrams are structured in accordance with PROF Idrive profile V3 or internal company specifications The internal process data links are established automatically in accordance with the telegram number setting in CU parameter p0922 The following standard telegrams can be set via parameter p0922 e p0922 1 gt Speed control 2 words e p0922 2 gt Speed control 4 words e p0922 3 gt speed control 1 position encoder e p0922 4 gt speed control
92. operator panel e You switch to LOCAL mode by pressing the LOCAL REMOTE key e Control ON OFF is carried out via the ON and OFF keys e You can specify the setpoint using the increase and decrease keys or by entering the appropriate numbers using the numeric keypad Analog outputs for version with TM31 e The actual speed r0063 is output as a voltage output in the range 0 to 10 V at analog output 0 X522 1 and 2 10 V is equal to the maximum speed in p1082 e The actual current value r0068 is output as a voltage output in the range 0 to 10 V at analog output 1 X522 4 and 5 10 V corresponds to the current limit p0640 which is set to 1 5 x the rated motor current p0305 Digital outputs for version with TM31 e The enable pulses signal is output at digital output 0 X542 2 and 3 e The no fault active signal is output at digital output 1 X542 5 and 6 protection against wire breakage e The ready to start signal is output at digital output 8 X541 2 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 127 Commissioning 5 7 Parameter reset to factory settings 5 7 Parameter reset to factory settings The factory settings represent the defined original status of the device on delivery Resetting the parameters to the factory settings means that all the parameter settings made since the system was delivered are reset Resetting Parameters via AOP30 Table 5 4 Procedure for
93. seconds Any prevailing regenerative energy must be converted into heat via a braking resistor This is often used for example in calendar stacks cutting tools running gears and presses Example 3 Service brake on crane drives For cranes with manual control it is important that the drive responds immediately when the control lever is moved master switch To this end the drive is powered up using the on command p0840 the pulses are enabled Speed setpoint p1142 and speed controller p0856 are inhibited The motor is magnetized The magnetization time generally applicable for three phase motors 1 2 seconds is therefore eliminated Now only the brake opening time will delay the motor starting to rotate following activation of the master switch Movement of the master switch generates a setpoint enable from the control bit interconnected with p1142 p1229 2 p1224 0 The speed controller is enabled immediately and the speed setpoint is enabled once the brake opening time p1216 has elapsed When the master switch is in the zero position the speed setpoint is inhibited and the drive ramps down along the ramp function generator s ramp down ramp The brake closes once the standstill limit p1226 is undershot Once the brake closing time p1217 has elapsed the speed controller is inhibited the motor is no longer generating any force Extended braking control is used with the modifications described below 2704 p1275 02
94. setpoints are 1 Bl p0854 analyzed 0 PROFIBUS control words and setpoints are not analyzed Note This bit should not be set to 1 until the PROFIBUS slave has returned an appropriate status via STW1 9 ie De 11 1 Direction of rotation 1 CCW phase sequence Bl p1113 changeover 0 CW phase sequence 12 Reserved 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 1 Data set 2 1 Parameter data set changeover DDS data set 2 Bl p0820 0 Data set 1 is active 0 Parameter data set changeover DDS data set 1 is active Inverter chassis units 166 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 6 PROFIBUS Speed setpoint N_Set_A e Speed setpoint with 16 bit resolution incl sign bit e Bit 15 determines the setpoint sign Bit 0 gt positive setpoint Bit 1 gt negative setpoint e The speed setpoint is normalized via parameter p2000 N_set_A 4000 hex or 16384 dec speed in p2000 Speed setpoint N_Set_B e Speed setpoint with 32 bit resolution incl sign bit e Bit 31 determines the setpoint sign Bit 0 gt positive setpoint Bit 1 gt negative setpoint e The speed setpoint is normalized via parameter p2000 N_set_B 4000 0000 hex or 1073741824 dec speed in p2000 PCS7 specific setpoints PCS7 x Depending on the configuration KP adaptation values for the speed controller and acceleration values or other setpoints fo
95. speed unsmoothed r0061 rom p2000 Actual speed smoothed r0063 rem p2000 Output frequency r0066 Hz Reference frequency Output current r0068 Aeff p2002 DC link voltage r0070 V p2001 Torque setpoint r0079 Nm p2003 Output power r0082 kW r2004 For diagnostic purposes Control deviation r0064 rpm p2000 Modulation depth r0074 Reference modulation depth Torque generating current setpoint r0077 A p2002 Torque generating actual current r0078 A p2002 Flux setpoint r0083 Reference flux Actual flux r0084 Reference flux For further diagnostic purposes Speed controller output r1480 Nm p2003 component of speed controller r1482 Nm p2003 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 233 Output terminals 8 2 TM31 analog outputs Scaling Table 8 2 Scaling Size Reference speed Reference voltage Scaling parameter 100 p2000 100 p2001 Default for quick commissioning p2000 Maximum speed p1082 p2001 1000 V Reference current 100 p2002 p2002 Current limit 00640 Reference torque 100 p2003 p2003 2 x rated motor torque Reference power 100 r2004 12004 p2003 x p2000 x Tr 30 Reference frequency 100 p2000 60 Reference modulation depth overload 100 Maximum output voltage without Reference flux 100 Rated motor flux Reference temperature 100 100 C Example changing
96. the PC must not be set the same 5 The connecting cable from CU320 to AOP30 must be disconnected on CU320 A null modem cable must be used here to connect the PC COM interface and CU320 This interface must not be switched Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 117 Commissioning 5 4 The AOP30 operator panel al A The AOP30 operator panel Description An optional operator panel for operating monitoring and commissioning purposes is available It has the following features e Graphical back lit LCD for plain text display and a bar chart display for process variables e LEDs for indicating the operating modes e Help function describing causes of and remedies for faults and alarms e Keypad for controlling drives during operation e LOCAL REMOTE switchover for selecting the control terminal master control assigned to operator panel or terminal block PROFIBUS e Numeric keypad for entering setpoint or parameter values e Function keys for prompted navigation through the menus e Two stage security concept to protect against accidental or unauthorized changes to settings e Degree of protection IP 54 when installed LEDs a gt Keyboard interlock ko CA Increase decrease 5 function keys Master control selection Numeric keypad ON OFF Figure 5 32 Components of the chassis unit operator panel AOP30 Inverter chassis units 18 Operating In
97. the drive when it is in this condition can cause death serious injury or considerable material damage Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Functions monitoring and protective functions Automatic restart mode Table 9 1 Automatic restart mode 9 2 Drive functions p1210 0 1 Mode Disables automatic restart Acknowledges all faults without restarting Meaning Automatic restart inactive If p1210 1 pending faults will be acknowledged automatically once their cause has been rectified If further faults occur after faults have been acknowledged these will also be acknowledged automatically A minimum time of p1212 1s must elapse between successful fault acknowledgement and a fault reoccurring if the ON OFF 1 signal control word 1 bit 0 is at HIGH If the ON OFF 1 signal is at LOW the time between successful fault acknowledgement and a new fault must be at least s If p1210 1 fault FO7320 will not be generated if the acknowledge attempt fails e g because the faults occurred too frequently Automatic restart after line supply failure no additional startup attempts If p1210 4 an automatic restart will only be performed if in addition fault F30003 occurs on the Motor Module or there is a high signal at binector input p1208 1 or in the case of an infeed drive object A_Infeed FO6200 is pending If additional faults are pending then these faults will a
98. the fixed values the relevant derating factors can be determined by means of linear interpolation 2 Yp Yo Xp Xo The following formula applies for this X1 Xo Example The derating factor is required for when X2 2 kHz for 6SL3730 1GE41 0AA0 Xo 1 25 kHz Yo 100 X1 2 5 kHz Y1 87 X2 2 kHz Y2 87 100 Yo 100 2 kHz 1 25 kHz 2 5 kHz 1 25 kHz 13 100 0 75 kHz 100 7 8 92 2 1 25 kHz Derating factor A 100 22 T t t p 1 25 kHz 2kHz 2 5 kHz 5kKHZ fuse Figure 12 1 Calculating derating factors by means of linear interpolation Inverter chassis units 352 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Technical specifications 12 2 General specifications 12 2 2 Overload capability Low overload High overload Inverter chassis units The converter is equipped with an overload reserve to deal with breakaway torques for example In drives with overload requirements the appropriate base load current must therefore be used as a basis for the required load The criterion for overload is that the drive is operated with its base load current before and after the overload occurs a load duration of 300 s is used as a basis here The base load current for low overload IL is based on a load duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s Converter current 4 10s ts Ml lt Short time current 150 Short time current
99. the isochronous application 188 The times for receiving the data are not scheduled exactly only the start and end of the interval are fixed Times for receving the data scheduled exactly A synchronous application can be started directly afterwards similar to DP Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 7 PROFINET IO RT class Determinism RT Variance of the transmission duration due to TCP IP telegrams being underway IRTflex Guaranteed transmission of the IRTflex telegrams in the current cycle by the reserved bandwidth IRTtop Exactly planned transfer times for transmission and receiving are guaranteed for any topologies Reload the network configuration after a change Only when the size of the IRTflex interval needs to be modified reservation of reserves is possible Always when the topology or the communications relationships change Cross traffic controller Yes controller Maximum switching depth 10 at 1 ms 20 20 number of switches in one line Synchronization accuracy Forwarding of the sync telegram in software Forwarding of the sync telegram in software accuracy lt 1 us Possible transmission cycle clocks observe any device specific restrictions 1 000 2 000 4 000 us 500 planned as of FW2 5 SP1 1 000 2 000 4 000 us 500 planned as of FW2 5 SP1 1 000
100. the locking lever is securely engaged once connected The screwed union connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 325 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components 11 4 6 Replacing the Control Interface Board frame size GX Replacing the Control Interface Board f LE Figure 11 11 Replacing the Control Interface Board frame size GX Inverter chassis units 326 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Preparatory steps e Disconnect the chassis unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access e Remove the protective cover Removal The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with the diagram 1 Remove the CU320 mount 1 nut If necessary remove the PROFIBUS plug and connection to the operator panel X140 on the CU320 and carefully remove the CU320 2 Disconnect the plugs for the fiber optic cables and signal cables 5 plugs 3 Remove the DRIVE CLiQ cables and connections to the CU320 5 plugs 4 Remove the retaining screws for the slide in electronics unit 2 screws When removing the slide in electronics unit you have to disconnect 5 further plugs one after the other 2 at the top 3 at the bottom CAUTION When removing the electronics unit ensure that you do not damage a
101. the maximum permissible torque whereby different limits can be parameterized for motor and regenerative mode e p0640 Current limit e p1520 Torque limit upper motoring e p1521 Torque limit lower regenerative e p1522 Torque limit upper motoring e p1523 Torque limit lower regenerative e p1524 Torque limit upper motoring scaling e p1525 Torque limit lower regenerating scaling e p1530 Power limit motoring e p1531 Power limit regenerating The currently active torque limit values are displayed in the following parameters e r0067 Maximum drive output current e 11526 Torque limit upper motoring without offset e 11527 Torque limit lower regenerative without offset All of the following limits act on the torque setpoint that is either available at the speed controller output for closed loop speed control or as torque input for closed loop torque control The minimum or the maximum is used for the various limits This minimum or maximum is cyclically calculated and is displayed in r1538 or r1539 e 11538 Upper effective torque limit e 11539 Lower effective torque limit These cyclical values therefore limit the torque setpoint at the speed controller output torque input or indicate the instantaneous max possible torque If the torque setpoint is limited then this is displayed using parameter p1407 e 1407 8 Upper torque limit active e 1407 9 Lower torque limit active Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07
102. the power supply e Allow unimpeded access e Remove the protective cover Removal The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with the diagram 1 Remove the copper bar 6 screws 2 Remove the retaining screws for the fan 3 screws 3 Disconnect the supply cables 1 x L 1 x N You can now carefully remove the fan CAUTION When removing the fan ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation For re installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current carrying parts must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 341 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Replacing the fan right hand power block je OOOO ES al Veo E Figure 11 19 Replacing the fan frame size JX right hand power block Inverter chassis units 342 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Description The average service life of the
103. this position You can now remove the power block CAUTION When removing the power block ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation steps For installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current conducting parts must be observed Carefully establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwed union connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 315 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components 11 4 3 Replacing the power block frame size HX Replacing the left hand power block ya 21030 eS E NL z O f B g EE ree 147 Ae PILA QS EMI S e 0008 CA u TA e R A Y Y Ag E Y o Figure 11 6 Replacing the power block frame size HX left hand power block Inverter chassis units 316 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Preparatory steps Removal Installation Inverter chassis units e Disconnect the chassis unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access to the power block e Remove the protective cover The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with the diagram Remove the busbar 6 screws
104. to your hard disk You now have to transfer your project configuration data to the drive unit Transferring the STARTER project to the drive unit To transfer the STARTER project you created offline to the drive unit carry out the following steps Step 1 Choose Project gt Connect to target system Choose Target system gt Load project to target system Selection in toolbar is dal NOTICE The project has now been loaded to the drive unit The data is currently only stored in the volatile memory of the drive unit and not on the CompactFlash card To store the project data on the CompactFlash card so that it is protected in the event of a power failure carry out the following step Step 3 Choose Target system gt Copy from RAM to ROM Selection in toolbar 03 Note The Copy from RAM to ROM icon is only active when the drive unit is selected in the project navigator 114 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Results of the previous steps e You have created a drive unit project offline using STARTER e You have saved the project data to the hard disk on your PC e You have transferred the project data to the drive unit e You have saved the project data to the CompactFlash card so that it is protected in the event of a power failure Note The STARTER
105. transit and when the devices are being set down for example Permissible ambient temperatures Ventilation 25 C to 70 C class 2K3 to IEC 60 721 3 2 Down to 40 C for max 24 hours Note Notes regarding built in line side components If built in line side components are to be installed on the devices the following points must be taken into account The degree of protection must not be reduced as a result The electromagnetic compatibility of the device must not be adversely affected Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Mechanical installation 3 2 Transportation and storage Note Notes regarding damage in transit e Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the device before accepting the delivery from the transportation company e Ensure that you have received all the items specified on the delivery note e Notify the transportation company immediately of any missing components or damage e f you identify any hidden deficiencies or damage contact the transportation company immediately and ask them to examine the device e f you fail to contact them immediately you may lose your right to claim compensation for the deficiencies and damage e If necessary you can request the support of your local Siemens branch NWARNING Damage in transit indicates that the device was subject to unreasonable stress The electrical safety of the device can no longer be ensured It must
106. voltage With low frequencies too the ohmic resistance of the stator windings has an effect and can no longer be ignored vis vis the machine reactance With low frequencies therefore the magnetic flux is no longer proportional to the magnetization current or the V f ratio The output voltage may however be too low to e Magnetize the induction motor e Maintain the load e Compensate for the voltage losses ohmic losses in the winding resistors in the system e Induce a breakaway accelerating braking torque You can choose whether the voltage boost is to be active permanently p1310 or only during acceleration p1311 Drv outp _max r0067 Permanent voltage boost ea U_boost perm p1310 0 R_stator active 10395 U_boost accel p1311 Ramp up active p1199 0 Voltage boost on acceleration Figure 7 5 Voltage boost total Note The voltage boost affects all V f characteristics p1300 from 0 to 6 NOTICE If the voltage boost value is too high this can result in a thermal overload of the motor winding Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 207 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 3 V f control Permanent voltage boost p1310 The voltage boost is active across the entire frequency range whereby the value decreases continuously as the frequency increases V f linear Vn p0304 fm ax p0310 p1082 x Pole pair no p0305 Rated
107. window of the drive For the first drive object DO drag the appropriate telegram for cyclic data transfer to the next slot of the station window Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each drive object for which cyclic data is to be exchanged 5 The project must be saved and compiled once all of the drive objects have been inserted Assigning the device name Check the IP address assignment via controller box for volatile assignment of the IP address for the configured lO controller and IO device during power up The configured device name must match the device name of the IO device Configuration in HW Config is now complete RT communications with GSDML v2 0 Requirement Procedure Inverter chassis units For example a 300 CPU version 2 5 or higher with a PROFINET IO with RT sub network has been configured and a drive inserted via the GSD file SINAMICS 5120 CBE20 Now drives and drive objects DOs are to be parameterized For this version of the GSDML file the telegrams can be inserted one after the other Note The sequence of the telegram structure must match the sequence of the drive objects in the configuration screen of the drive in STARTER Select the inserted drive in the hardware catalog For the first drive object DO drag the appropriate telegram for cyclic data transfer to the next slot of the station window A parameter access point is added automatically Repeat step 2 for each drive obje
108. 1 Table 4 33 Encoder connection X531 Terminal 1 Signal name P_Encoder 5 V 24 V Technical specifications Encoder supply M_Encoder Ground for encoder power supply Temp Temperature sensor connection KTY84 1C130 PTC Temp Reserved do not use Reserved do not use Reserved do not use 0 NX O OI aA 0 N Reserved do not use Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm AWG 14 Note Note that when the encoder is connected via terminals the cable shield must be applied to the module NOTICE The KTY temperature sensor must be connected with the correct polarity Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 77 Electrical installation 4 10 Signal connections 4 10 4 3 SMC30 Sensor Module for determining the actual motor speed Connection example 1 HTL encoder bipolar without zero marker gt p0405 9 hex Track A Track A Track B Track B Zero pulse Inverted zero pulse CTRL Ground Encoder power supply 24 V Ground for encoder power supply Figure 4 17 Connection example 1 HTL encoder bipolar without zero marker Connection example 2 TTL encoder unipolar without zero marker gt p0405 A hex Track A Track A Track B Track B Zero pulse Inverted zero pulse CTRL Ground Encoder power supply 5 V Ground for encoder power supply Figure 4 18 Connection exam
109. 1 xxxx function diagram number Brake to standst p1224 lt 1 gt 2707 Brake OR 2501 Puss enable OR operation na result Enable speed Extended brake control p1279 operan E controller 1229 3 posse 51279 gt 1 1228 70 r lt 1 gt Pera Enable n_setp 5 a 142 C Enable speed setpoint a Setpoint 2 enable amp r0898 6_ lt 1 gt Setpoint enable on higher level p1152 controller e g S7 1 Setpoint enable Ti T5 master switch deflected Figure 9 14 Example Service brake on a crane drive Inverter chassis units 282 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 3 Extended functions 9 3 4 Extended monitoring functions Description The extended monitoring functions function module enables additional monitoring functions e Speed setpoint monitoring n_setp lt p2161 e Speed setpoint monitoring n_set gt 0 e Load monitoring Description of load monitoring This function monitors power transmission between the motor and the working machine Typical applications include V belts flat belts or chains that loop around the belt pulleys or cog wheels for drive and outgoing shafts and transfer the peripheral speeds and forces Load monitoring can be used here to identify blockages in the working machine and interruptions to the power transmission D
110. 12 M12 M12 Frame size HX HX JX Approx weight kg 294 294 530 Dimensions W x H x D mm 503 x 1 506 x 540 503 x 1 506 x 540 908 5 x 1 510 x 540 Recommended protection Line protection w o semicond 3NA3475 Circuit breaker Circuit breaker protection Rated current A 800 frame size in accordance with DIN 3 43620 1 Line and semicond protection 4 3NE1448 2 Circuit breaker Circuit breaker Rated current A 850 frame size to DIN 43620 1 3 see Overload capability see Overload capability Derating data 1 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s 2 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s 3 Maximum output frequency at factory set default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output frequency see Functions monitoring and protective functions Increasing the output frequency for information on derating data see 4 The types of protection specified here are mandatory for installing a UL approved system Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 357 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications Power Module 500 V 600 V 3 AC Table 12 11 Power Module 500 V 600 V 3 AC part 1 Category Unit Order number 6SL3310 1
111. 175 Extended braking control 281 Extended monitoring functions 283 External 24 V DC supply 53 F Factory setting 128 Fan Frame size FX replace 332 Fan voltage adjustment 51 Features 20 Firmware update 346 Firmware upgrading 346 Fixed setpoints 158 Fixed speed setpoints 158 Flying restart 253 with encoder 255 without encoder 254 Forced cooling Frame size GX replacement 334 Frame size HX replacement 336 Frame size JX replace 340 Forming the DC link capacitors 344 Friction characteristic curve 258 G G33 174 H High overload 353 Increasing the output frequency 260 Installation device 308 Installtion site 28 IT system 53 K K50 73 Kinetic buffering 247 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Index L Load monitoring 283 Low overload 353 M Maintenance 306 307 Maintenance and servicing 305 MDS Copy 141 MDS motor data set 140 Minimum speed 200 Monitoring Functions 285 Motor changeover selection 256 Motor data set 140 Motor Data Set 140 Motor identification 239 Motorized potentiometer 157 N NAMUR signaling bit bar 172 Non grounded system 53 O Online operation with STARTER 176 Operating hours counters 263 Operation on a non grounded system 53 Operator panel 118 Output terminals 231 Overload capability 353 Overload responses 286 P Parameter reset 128 Parameter reset via STARTER 128 Resettin
112. 2 Copy drive data set DDS e p0820 BI Drive data set selection bit 0 e p0821 BI Drive data set selection bit 1 e p0822 BI Drive data set selection bit 2 e p0823 BI Drive data set selection bit 3 e p0824 BI Drive data set selection bit 4 e p0826 Motor changeover motor number e p0827 Motor changeover status word bit number e p0828 Motor changeover feedback signal e p0830 Motor changeover status e p0831 Motor changeover contactor feedback signal e p0833 Data set changeover configuration 9 2 7 Friction characteristic curve Description The friction characteristic is used to compensate for the frictional torque of the motor and driven load A friction characteristic allows the speed controller to be pre controlled and improves the control response 10 points along the characteristic are used for the friction characteristic The coordinates of every point along the characteristic are defined by a speed parameter p382x and a torque parameter p383x point 1 p3820 and p3830 Features e There are 10 points along the characteristic to represent the friction characteristic e An automatic function supports the friction characteristic plot e A connector output r3841 can be interconnected as friction torque p1569 e The friction characteristic can be activated and de activated p3842 258 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Functions monitoring and protective functions Co
113. 2 0 Emergency stop 0 Deceleration on the rapid stop ramp p1135 then 1 BI p0848 OFF3 pulse block main contactor if fitted is opened 1 No emergency stop Note Control signal OFF3 is generated by ANDing BI p0848 and BI p0849 3 0 Disable operation 1 Enable inverter pulse enable ramp up with active 1 Bl p0852 1 Enable operation setpoint 0 Pulse inhibit The motor coasts down The Ready To Run status remains set 4 0 Set ramp generator to 0 The ramp generator output is set to setpoint 0 1 Bl p1140 zero 1 Enable ramp function generator 5 0 Freeze ramp generator 0 The current setpoint is frozen at the ramp 1 Bl p1141 1 Restart ramp generator generator output 6 1 Enable speed setpoint 1 The speed setpoint at the input of the ramp 1 BI p1142 0 Inhibit speed setpoint function generator is enabled 0 The speed setpoint at the input of the ramp function generator is set to zero The drive brakes in accordance with the ramp down time set in p1121 7 0 gt 1 Acknowledge error A positive signal transition acknowledges all the Bl p2103 current faults Note Acknowledgement is realized with a 0 1 edge via Bl p2103 or Bl p2104 or Bl p2105 8 Reserved Reserved Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 165 Operation 6 6 PROFIBUS Bit Meaning Explanation Betriebsbedi BICO ngung 10 1 Control via PLC 1 PROFIBUS control words and
114. 2 G1_CTW ZSW 1 N_act_B STW2 G1_STW G1_XIST1 G1_XACT2 4 STW 1 N_set_B CTW2 G1_CTW ZSW 1 N_act_B STW2 G1_STW Further assignment see FP2420 20 STW 1 N_set_A ZSW 1 N_act_A la_act M_act P_act MELD_NA SMOOT SMOOTH SMOOTH MUR H 352 STW 1 N_set_ A PCS_3 PCS7_4 PCS7_5 PCS7_6 ZSW 1 N_act_A la_act M_act WARN_ FAULT_ SMOOT SMOOTH CODE CODE H 999 STW 1 Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free ZSW 1 Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free 6 6 5 Description of control words and setpoints Overview Table 6 9 Overview of control words and setpoints STW 1 Control word 1 interface mode SINAMICS See table Control word 1 FP2442 MICROMASTER p2038 0 interface mode SINAMICS MICROMASTER p2038 0 STW 1 Control word 1 interface mode PROF Idrive VIK See table Control word 1 FP2441 NAMUR p2038 2 STW 2 Control word 2 interface mode SINAMICS FP2444 MICROMASTER p2038 0 N_set A Speed setpoint A 16 bit p1070 FP3030 N_set B Speed setpoint B 32 bit p1155 FP3080 PCS7_x PCS7 specific setpoints Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 163 Operation 6 6 PROFIBUS Control word 1 STW 1 interface mode SINAMICS MICROMASTER p2038 0 Table 6 10 Control word 1 interface mode SINAMICS MICROMASTER p2038 0 Bit Meaning Explanation Betriebsbedi BICO ngung 0 0 OFF OFF 0 Deceleration on the deceleration r
115. 350 500 frame size to DIN 43620 1 1 2 2 1 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 2 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 3 Maximum output frequency at factory set default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output frequency see Functions monitoring and protective functions Increasing the output frequency for information on derating data see Derating data 4 The types of protection specified here are mandatory for installing a UL approved system Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 355 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications Table 12 9 Power Module 380 V 480 V 3 AC part 2 Category Unit Order number 6SL3310 1GE33 8AA0 1GE35 0AA0 1GE36 1AA0 Rated motor output At 400 V 50 Hz kW 200 250 315 At 460 V 60 Hz hp 300 400 500 Rated input voltage V 380 V to 480 V 3 AC 110 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 395 509 629 Rated output current A 380 490 605 Base load current IL A 370 477 590 Base load current Ip 2 A 340 438 460 Max output frequency 3 Hz 160 160 100 Power loss kW 4 54 5 78 7 8 Max current requirements at 24 A 0 9 0 9 1 V DC Cooling air requirement m s 0 36 0 36 0 78 Sound
116. 4 Command sources CU320 terminal assignment with CU terminals default setting When you choose the CU terminals default setting the terminal assignment for CU320 is as follows A een eee CU320 X122 ON OFF1 St DIO MOPT Fswo 2 l ti gt DI1 1 l MoP Fsw1 3 gt C Dia Acknow 4 ledge 5 T i u 1 6 m 1 Enable pulses 7 gt DI DO 8 No fault 8 gt 1 DI DO 9 l 9 gt M P24 225 oro 10 l N Ext alarm 11 gt DIDO 11 I 125 Sy l x132 N OoFF2 1 gt DI4 I N OFF3 2 gt DI 5 N Ext fault 1 3 gt 016 45 aie 7 JS M2 6 I E q Acknowledge fault 7 gt DI DO 12 I P24 B5 DIDO 13 9 CoM I E P24 sg DI DO 14 P24 11 gt DI DO 15 12 gt Am I I oe e Figure 6 14 CU320 terminal assignment with CU terminals default setting Switching the command source If necessary the command source can be switched using the LOCAL REMOTE key on the AOP30 Inverter chassis units 152 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 4 Command sources 6 4 4 PROF Idrive TM31 default setting Prerequisites e The Power Module CU320 TM31 and PROFIBUS have been correctly installed e The PROF ldrive TM31 default setting was chosen during commissioning STARTER
117. 5 RP ClASSOS ies cet dra 188 6 7 5 1 RT classes for PROFINET 1O ccccccceeeeceeceeeeeceeeeeeesenaeceeeeeeeseaaeaeeeeeeesecasaeeeeeeeeesecieeeeaaaaaees 188 637 5 2 PROFINET TO witht Rl exci ea iataehet att alc ib 190 6 7 5 3 Configuring RT communication ON Simatic ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeesesaeeeeeesaeeeeeenteeees 190 6 7 5 4 PROFINET lO with IRT OvervieW ooooooccconocccccononnnnccononnnccnnnnnccnnonnncnnnonncnnn rn nnnnn nn n ai names 193 6 7 5 5 PROFINET 10 with IRTE c ae ae ra eia A 194 6 7 5 6 PROFINET 1O with IR Top ici A a A a e 195 7 Setpoint channel and closed loop control oooooccnonocccnnccoccccnnnncnconanancnnnannncnnonnn cnn rannnn nn naar rca nnnnn cn rra nnnnnnno 197 7 1 Ghapter Content lt 2 ti e tale wate Ae les esa de 197 7 2 Setpolnt channel ile 198 7 2 1 Setpoint addition ci A A aiai dadas 198 7 2 2 Direction vers aliviada Ara 199 7 2 3 Skip speeds and minimum speedS coooocccccccccoconoconoconococononnonnnncnnnnnnnn nn nnnn cnn nn nnnn nn nn rn nnnnnnnmnnn caninas 200 7 2 4 SpeedlimitatioN mirae see A aaa 201 7 2 5 Ramp unction generado iniciar 202 7 3 VIT CONTO nano atac erence ta dt IET pon rrr ire erry Herre ener or 204 7 3 1 Voltage boost neces ceeds ican ee ddd et Be cde nee ban dee tedden dideveadidevevieh dovded ta da bdo dla vests 207 7 3 2 Slip compensation tein ket hee Aor oe ee ae nah de ah eat ed eta 210 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without ENCOCEN c cccce
118. 56 4 1 and one additional second has expired The startup counter is not reset to the initial value p1211 until this point If additional faults occur between successful acknowledgement and the end of the startup attempt then the startup counter when it is acknowledged is also decremented Monitoring time power restoration p1213 Parameters Settings 252 The monitoring time starts when the faults are detected If the automatic acknowledgements are not successful the monitoring time will continue If the drive has not successfully restarted by the time the monitoring time expires flying restart and motor magnetization must have been completed r0056 4 1 fault FO7320 is output Monitoring is deactivated by setting p1213 0 If p1213 is set to a value lower than the sum of p1212 the magnetization time r0346 and the additional delay time due to flying restart then fault FO7320 will be generated on every restart attempt If for p1210 1 the time in p1213 is set to a value lower than p1212 then fault FO7320 will also be generated on every restart attempt The monitoring time must be extended if the faults that occur cannot be immediately and successfully acknowledged e g when faults are permanently present e p1210 Automatic restart mode e p1211 Automatic restart start attempts e p1212 Automatic restart delay time start attempts e p1213 Automatic restart monitoring line supply return To prevent the motor from sw
119. 6 Fan frame size JX 340 Installation device 308 385 Index Power block frame size HX 316 Power block frame size JX 320 Power block frame size FX 312 Power block frame size GX 314 Replacing components 311 Residual risks 16 Rotating measurement 243 Runtime 263 S S5 selector for voltage current AlO Al1 70 Serial interface RS232 62 Service 21 Service and Support 303 Setpoint addition 198 Setpoint channel 198 Setpoint sources 155 Analog inputs 155 Fixed speed setpoints 158 Motorized potentiometer 157 Signal connections 55 Simulation operation 264 Slip compensation 210 SMC30 73 SMC30 Sensor Module 38 SMC30 Sensor Module for detecting the actual motor speed option K50 73 SMC30 connection examples 78 Speed controller 215 Speed controller adaptation 221 Speed controller optimization 243 Speed controller pre control 217 Speed limitation 201 Stall protection 289 Standstill measurement 240 STARTER 80 Commissioning 82 Connection via serial interface 115 Creating the project 82 Installation 80 Online operation via PROFINET 176 Starting the drive project 114 User interface 81 Status word 1 169 170 Storage 27 Suppression Speed 200 T Technical specifications 354 386 General 348 Power Module 380 V 480 V 3 AC 355 Power Module 500 V 600 V 3 AC 358 Power Module 660 V 690 V 3 AC 361 Technology controller 270 Telegram selection user defined 162
120. 67 must be set before the optimization run and only affects the calculation of the controller parameters If during the measurement it becomes clear that the the drive cannot operate in a stable manner with the specified dynamic factor or that the torque ripples are too great the dynamic response is reduced automatically and the result displayed in r1968 The drive must also be checked to ensure that it is stable across the entire range The dynamic response might need to be reduced or Kp Tn adaptation for the speed controller parameterized accordingly When commissioning induction machines you are advised to proceed as follows e Before connecting the load a complete rotating measurement without encoder p1960 1 with encoder p1960 2 should be carried out Since the induction machine is idling you can expect highly accurate results for the saturation characteristic and the rated magnetization current e When the load is connected speed controller optimization should be repeated because the total moment of inertia has changed This is realized by selecting parameter p1960 without encoder p1960 3 with encoder p1960 4 When permanent magnet synchronous motors are commissioned the speed controller should be optimized p1960 2 4 when the load is connected Rotating measurement sequence p1960 gt 0 Inverter chassis units The following measurements are carried out when the enable signals are set and a switch on c
121. 7 07 A5E00331449A Type plate for the chassis units 4 Device designation AF 294 kg CE 2 6 Type plate Year of manufacture Table 2 1 Production year and month Letter number Year of manufacture Letter number Month of manufacture T 2005 1to9 January to September U 2006 O October V 2007 N November W 2008 D December 23 Device overview 2 6 Type plate Type plate specifications from type plate above Table 2 2 Specifications on the type plate Specification Value Explanation Input 3AC Three phase connection 380 480V Rated input voltage 775A Rated input current Output 3 AC Three phase connection 0 480 V Rated output voltage 745A Rated output current Temperature range 0 40 C Ambient temperature range within which the chassis unit can operate under 100 load Degree of protection IP20 Degree of protection IP00 Duty class l I Duty class to EN 60146 1 1 100 continuously with the specified current values the chassis unit can operate continuously under 100 load Cooling method AF A Cooling medium air F circulation method forced cooling drive unit fan in the device Weight Weight Inverter chassis units 24 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Mechanical installation 3 1 Chapter content This chapter provides information on the following e The conditions for installing the chassis units and optional components
122. 728 10 Set DI DO10 input or output CU 1 Output CU p0741 DI DO11 CU 0 CU p0748 1 1 Invert DI DO11 CU 0 Not inverted Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 377 Appendix A 2 Parameter macros Sink Source Parameters Description DO Parameters Description DO p0728 1 1 Set DI DO11 input or output CU 0 Input CU p0742 DI DO12 CU r2138 7 Ack fault Vector p0748 12 Invert DI DO12 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 12 Set DI DO12 input or output CU 1 Output CU p0743 DI DO13 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 13 Invert DI DO13 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 13 Set DI DO13 input or output CU 1 Output CU p0744 DI DO14 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 14 Invert DI DO14 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 14 Set DI DO14 input or output CU 1 Output CU p0745 DI DO15 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 15 Invert DI DO15 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 15 Set DI DO15 input or output CU 1 Output CU Inverter chassis units 378 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Appendix Parameter macro p0700 4 PROFIdrive TM31 70004 This macro is used to set the PROFldrive interface and terminal block TM31 as the command source A 2 Parameter macros Table A 5 Parameter macro p0700 4 PROFIdrive TM31 Sink Source Parameters Description DO Parameters Description DO po840 0 ON OFF1 Vector
123. 80 50 50 444 Of course we can also arrange special service contracts tailored to your specific requirements For details please contact your Siemens office Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 303 Diagnosis faults and alarms 10 3 Service and support Spare parts and repairs Our global network of regional spare parts warehouses and repair centers enables us to respond quickly and reliably with modern logistics procedures During the operational phase of your machinery we provide a comprehensive repairs and spare parts service to ensure maximum operational reliability Our service includes expert advice with technical problems and a wide range of product and system support services tailored to your needs For more information about repairs or spare parts please call the following number in Germany Tel 0180 50 50 448 You can call this number outside office hours and at the weekend to contact our emergency spare parts service Technical support 304 We offer technical support in both German and English for deploying products systems and solutions in drive and automation technology In special cases help is available from professional trained and experienced specialists via teleservice and video conferencing Free Contact providing you with free technical support e In Europe Africa Tel 49 0 180 50 50 222 Fax 49 0 180 50 50 223 Internet http www siemens de automation support request
124. 841 Friction characteristic output e p3842 Activate friction characteristic e p3845 Activate friction characteristic plot Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 259 Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 2 Drive functions 9 2 8 Increasing the output frequency 9 2 8 1 Description In applications that require higher output frequencies the pulse frequency of the converter may have to be increased The pulse frequency may also have to be changed to prevent resonance from occurring Since increasing the pulse frequency also increases the switching losses a derating factor for the output current must be taken into account when the drive is configured Once the pulse frequency has been increased the new output currents are automatically included in the calculation for power unit protection Note Use of a sine wave filter must be selected using p0230 3 4 when carrying out commissioning This setting fixes the output frequency to 4 kHz or 2 5 kHz this cannot be changed 9 2 8 2 Default pulse frequencies 260 The specified maximum output frequencies can be achieved with the default pulse frequencies listed below Table 9 3 Maximum output frequency with default pulse frequency Converter rating Default pulse frequency Maximum output frequency k kHz HZ Supply voltage 380 480 V 3 AC 110 250 2 160 315 560 1 25 100 Supply voltage 500 600 V 3 AC 110 560 1 25 100
125. 9 Set DI DO9 input or output TM31 Factory setting p4040 DO10 TM31 Factory setting p4028 10 Set DI DO10 input or output TM31 Factory setting p4041 DO11 TM31 Factory setting p4028 11 Set DI DO11 input or output TM31 Factory setting Inverter chassis units 380 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Appendix Parameter macro p1000 1 PROFIdrive 100001 A 2 Parameter macros This macro is used to set the default setpoint source via PROFIdrive Table A 6 Parameter macro p1000 1 PROF Idrive Sink Source Parameters Description DO Parameters Description DO p1070 Main setpoint Vector r2050 1 PROF Idrive PZD2 Vector p1071 Main setpoint scaling Vector 1 100 Vector p1075 Supplementary setpoint Vector 0 Vector p1076 Supplementary setpoint scaling Vector 1 100 Vector Parameter macro p1000 2 Terminal TM31 100002 This macro is used to set analog input 0 on customer terminal block TM31 as the setpoint source Table A 7 Parameter macro p1000 2 TM31 terminals Sink Source Parameters Description DO Parameters Description DO p1070 Main setpoint Vector r4055 AIO TM31 TM31 p1071 Main setpoint scaling Vector 1 100 TM31 p1075 Supplementary setpoint Vector 0 TM31 p1076 Supplementary setpoint scaling Vector 1 100 TM31 Parameter macro p1000 3 Motorized potentiometer 100003 This macro is used to set the mo
126. 9A 247 Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 2 Drive functions 248 e V f control The Vdc_min controller acts on the speed setpoint channel When Vdc_min control is active the drive setpoint speed is reduced so that the drive becomes regenerative e Speed control The Vdc_min controller acts on the speed controller output and affects the torque generating current setpoint When Vdc_min control is active the torque generating current setpoint is reduced so that the drive becomes regenerative If the power fails the DC link voltage decreases due to the lack of power from the supply system When the DC link voltage threshold set via parameter p1245 p1285 is reached the Vdc_min controller is activated Due to the PID properties of the controller the motor speed is reduced to the extent that the regenerative drive energy maintains the DC link voltage at the level set in p1245 p1285 The kinetic energy of the drive governs the dropout characteristic of the motor speed and in turn the buffering duration In centrifugal mass drives e g fans buffering can last a few seconds In drives with a low centrifugal mass e g pumps however buffering can last just 100 200 ms When the power is restored the Vdc_min controller is deactivated and the drive is ramped up to its setpoint speed at the ramp function generator ramp Alarm A7402 drive DC link voltage minimum controller active is issued while the Vdc_min controller
127. A 1 NO normally open contact NC normally closed contact COM mid position contact Max connectable cross section 2 5 mm AWG 12 Note If 230 V AC is applied to the relay outputs the Terminal Module must also be grounded via a 6 mn protective conductor 72 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Electrical installation 4 10 Signal connections 4 10 4 SMC30 Sensor Module for determining the actual motor speed 4 10 4 1 Description The SMC30 Sensor Module is used for determining the actual motor speed The signals emitted by the rotary pulse encoder are converted here and made available via the DRIVE CLiQ interface of the closed loop control for evaluation purposes The following encoders can be connected to the SMC30 Sensor Module e TTL encoder e HTL encoder e KTY or PTC temperature sensor Table 4 29 Connectable sensors with supply voltage Sensor type Remote sense X520 D Sub X521 terminal X531 terminal Open circuit monitoring HTL bipolar 24 V No No Yes Yes No HTL unipolar 24 V No No Yes Yes No TTL bipolar 24 V No Yes Yes Yes Yes TTL bipolar 5 V To X520 Yes Yes Yes Yes TTL unipolar No No No No No Table 4 30 Maximum signal cable lengths Inverter chassis units Sensor type Maximum signal cable length in m TTL 100 HTL unipolar 100 m HTL bipolar 300 m Note For HTL encoders in order to reduce the effect
128. A5E00331449A 227 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder Function diagram FP 6060 Torque setpoint FP 6630 Upper lower torque limit FP 6640 Current power torque limits 7 4 6 Permanent magnet synchronous motors Description Permanent magnet synchronous motors without encoders are supported during operations without encoders Controlled operations are not possible when stationary Typical applications include direct drives with torque motors which are characterized by high torque at low speeds e g Siemens complete torque motors of the 1FW3 series When using these drives gear units and therefore mechanical parts subject to wear can be dispensed with in such applications NWARNING A soon as the motor starts to run a voltage is produced When working on the converter the motor must be safely disconnected If this cannot be done the motor must be locked e g by a holding brake Features e Field weakening of up to approx 1 2 x rated speed depending on the supply voltage of the converter and motor data also see supplementary conditions e Capture only when using a VSM module to record the motor speed and phase angle option K51 e Speed and torque control vector e V f control for diagnostics vector e Motor identification e Speed controller optimization rotary measurement Inverter chassis units 228 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A
129. Bl p2104 or Bl p2105 Reserved Reserved 10 1 Control via PLC 1 PROFIBUS control words and setpoints are 1 Bl p0854 analyzed 0 PROFIBUS control words and setpoints are not analyzed Note This bit should not be set to 1 until the PROFIBUS slave has returned an appropriate status via STW1 9 4 mM 11 1 Direction of rotation 1 CCW phase sequence Bl p1113 changeover 0 CW phase sequence 12 Reserved Inverter chassis units 164 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 6 PROFIBUS Bit Meaning Explanation Betriebsbedi BICO ngung 13 1 Increase motorized Bl p1035 potentiometer 14 1 Decrease motorized Bl p1036 potentiometer Note If motorized potentiometer raise and lower are O or 1 simultaneously the current setpoint is frozen 15 Reserved Control word 1 STW 1 interface mode PROF Idrive VIK NAMUR p2038 2 Table 6 11 Control word 1 interface mode PROF Idrive VIK NAMUR p2038 2 Bit Meaning Explanation Betriebsbedi BICO ngung 0 0 OFF1 OFF1 0 Deceleration on the deceleration ramp p1121 1 BI p0840 then pulse block main contactor if fitted is opened 1 ON 1 0 Coast to stop OFF2 0 Pulse block main contactor if fitted is opened 1 BI p0844 BI p0845 1 Do not coast to stop Note Control signal OFF2 is generated by ANDing BI p0844 and BI p0845
130. Configuration SINAMICS_G130 Equivalent Circuit Diagram Data Drive unit Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 MDS 0 Options Control structure Drive setting Repres of equiv circuit diag data System of units physical y Motor Motor data Motor data Induction motor rotary tional MatorDat Name Comment Value Unit p350 0 Motor stator resistance cold 0 01700 p354 0 Motor rotor resistance cold damping resistanc 0 01200 Ohm p356 0 Motor stator leakage inductance 0 21262 mH Calculation of the f Motor holding brake Encoder p358 0 Motor rotor leakage inductance damping eee p360 0 Motor magnetizing inductance magn inductance 6 59758 DJDefaults of the sete T C Drive functions PROFIBUS proces Important paramete DJSummary 4 lt 4 gt The equivalent circuit diagram data must be entered completely Note If the equivalent circuit diagram data are not fully known deselect their input on the Motor Data page and have them calculated Figure 5 20 Entering equivalent circuit diagram data 22 If necessary enter the equivalent circuit diagram data 23 Click Continue gt Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 103 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Calculating the motor controller data Configuration SINAMICS_G130 Calculation of the Motor Controller Data Drive unit
131. DC link capacitors have to be reformed If this is not carried out the cabinet may be damaged when the supply voltage is switched on If the cabinet is commissioned within two years of its date of manufacture the DC link capacitors do not need to be reformed The date of manufacture is indicated in the serial number on the type plate see Device Overview Note It is important that the storage period is calculated from the date of manufacture and not from the date that the equipment was shipped The DC link capacitors are re formed by applying the rated voltage without load for at least 30 minutes at room temperature e Operation via PROFIBUS Set bit 3 of control word 1 operation enable permanently to 0 Switch on the converter by means of an ON signal bit O of the control word all the other bits must be set in such a way that the converter can be operated Once the waiting time has elapsed switch off the converter and restore the original PROFIBUS setting e Operation via terminal block Set p0852 to 0 factory setting is 1 Switch on the converter via digital input O on the customer terminal block Once the waiting time has elapsed switch off the converter and restore the original setting for p0852 Note Reforming cannot be carried out in LOCAL mode via the AOP30 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Maintenance and servicing 11 6 Message
132. E Miara AA PENE h Figure 7 8 Slip compensation Function diagram FP 6310 Resonance damping and slip compensation Parameters e p1335 Slip compensation p1335 0 0 slip compensation is deactivated p1335 100 0 slip is fully compensated e p1336 Slip compensation limit value e 11337 Actual slip compensation Inverter chassis units 210 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder Description Inverter chassis units Compared with V f control vector control offers the following benefits Stability vis vis load and setpoint changes Short rise times with setpoint changes gt better command behavior Short settling times with load changes gt better disturbance characteristic Acceleration and braking are possible with maximum adjustable torque Motor protection due to variable torque limitation in motor and regenerative mode Drive and braking torque controlled independently of the speed These benefits are available without speed feedback Vector control can be used with or without an encoder The following criteria indicate when an encoder is required Maximum speed accuracy requirements Maximum dynamic response requirements Better command behavior Shortest settling times when disturbances occur Torque control is required i
133. Electronics power supply Voltage 24 V DC 20 4 V 28 8 V l Not used Current consumption max 0 5 A M Electronic ground Max current via jumper in connector 20 A at 55 C z M Electronic ground Max connectable cross section 2 5 mm AWG 12 Note The two and M terminals are jumpered in the connector and not in the unit This ensures that the supply voltage is looped through The power can be supplied via terminals X41 1 2 on the Power Module X520 4 digital inputs Table 4 21 Terminal block X520 Terminal Designation Technical specifications 1 DIO Voltage 3 V to 30 V 2 DI 1 Current input typical 10 mA up to 24 V 3 DI 2 With electrical isolation reference potential is terminal M1 4 DI 3 Level 5 M1 High signal level 15 V to 30 V 6 M Low signal level 3 V to 5 V 1 DI digital input M1 ground reference M Electronics ground Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm AWG 14 Note An open input is interpreted as low To enable the digital inputs to function terminal M1 must be connected The following options are available 1 The provided ground reference of the digital inputs or 2 a jumper to terminal M notice this removes isolation for these digital inputs Inverter chassis units 68 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Electrical installation 4 10 Signal connections X530 4
134. FAULT LED and a fault screen is automatically displayed You can use the F1 Help function to call up information about the cause of the fault and how to remedy it You can use F5 Ack to acknowledge a stored fault Any alarms are displayed by the yellow flashing ALARM LED The system also displays a note in the status bar providing information on the cause Every fault and alarm is entered in the fault alarm buffer along with time the error occurred The time stamp refers to the relative system time in milliseconds r0969 Activate the Set date time AOP synchronization gt Drive setting to date and time stamp errors on the AOP30 A fault is a message from the drive indicating an error or other exceptional unwanted status This could be caused by a fault within the converter or an external fault triggered for example from the winding temperature monitor for the induction motor The faults are displayed and can be reported to a higher level control system via PROF Idrive In the factory default setting the message converter fault is also sent to a relay output Once you have rectified the cause of the fault you have to acknowledge the fault message What is an alarm 302 An alarm is the response to a fault condition identified by the drive It does not result in the drive being switched off and does not have to be acknowledged Alarms are self acknowledging that is they are reset automatically when the cause of the alarm h
135. FINET IO with RT 192 In our example we will describe the Device OM in conjunction with the CPU319 and PROFINET IO with RT For a list of SIMATIC S7 modules that use Device OM please contact SIEMENS Product Service 1 In the hardware catalog open PROFINET IO gt Drives gt SINAMICS gt Relevant drive The available SINAMICS Device OM drive objects are listed If GSD files have already been installed a GSD directory is listed too 2 Select the relevant drive object DO and drag it to the appropriate slot in the station window The CPU slot is now green 3 Drag the drive object to this slot The SINAMICS properties dialog box is displayed 4 Keep firmware 2 5 and confirm with OK 5 Double click the drive unit A dialog containing the properties of the lO device is displayed Check the IP address assignment via controller box for volatile assignment of the IP address for the configured IO controller and IO device during power up The configured device name must match the device name of the IO device 6 The drive object is inserted with telegram 1 provided as standard These telegram settings can be changed 7 Double click the telegram entry The Telegram_x properties dialog box opens 8 Select the telegram for the drive object 9 For each drive insert an additional drive object an configure the appropriate telegram 10 Configuration of the cyclic telegrams is now complete Inverter chassis units Operatin
136. For re installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current carrying parts must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 321 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Replacing the right hand power block Figure 11 9 Replacing the power block frame size JX right hand power block Inverter chassis units 322 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Preparatory steps Removal Installation Inverter chassis units e Disconnect the chassis unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access to the power block e Remove the protective cover The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with the diagram Remove the busbar 8 screws Unscrew the connection to the DC link 8 nuts Remove the retaining screw at the top 1 screw Remove the retaining screws at the bottom 2 screws Disconnect the plugs for the fiber optic cables and signal cables 2 plugs oak
137. GF31 8AA0 1GF32 2AA0 1GF32 6AA0 Rated motor output At 500 V 50 Hz kW 110 132 160 At 575 V 60 Hz hp 150 200 250 Rated input voltage V 500 V to 600 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 191 224 270 Rated output current A 175 215 260 Base load current IL 1 A 171 208 250 Base load current IH 2 A 157 192 233 Max output frequency 3 Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 3 0 3 4 3 9 Max current requirements at 24 A 0 9 0 9 0 9 V DC Cooling air requirement m s 0 36 0 36 0 36 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 69 73 69 73 69 73 Line connection Maximum DIN VDE mm 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 500 2 x 500 2 x 500 Fixing screw M10 M10 M10 Motor connection Maximum DIN VDE mm 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 500 2 x 500 2 x 500 Fixing screw M10 M10 M10 Protective conductor connection Max PE1 GND mm 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 500 2 x 500 2 x 500 Max PE2 GND mm 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 500 2 x 500 2 x 500 Fixing screw M10 M10 M10 Frame size GX GX GX Approx weight kg 162 162 162 Dimensions W x H x D mm 326 x 1 533 x 545 326 x 1 533 x 545 326 x 1 533 x 545 Recommended protection Line protection w o semicond protection 3NA3244 6 3NA3252 6 3NA3354 6 Rated current A 250 315 355 frame size to DIN 43620 1 2 2 3 Line and semicond protection 4 3NE1227 2 3NE1230 2 3NE1331 2 Rated current A 250 315 350 frame size to DIN 43620 1 1 1 2 see Overloa
138. IRE li 131 6 1 Chapter content capta rd Ti a at 131 6 2 General information about command and setpoint SOUICES oocociococcccconoccncnnancncnanoncncnananannnnn no 132 6 3 Basic information about the drive system ccc ceeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneaeeeeeeaeess 133 6 3 1 PRabameters dit aia 133 6 3 2 Drive objects oasis iii cata dida dad dd dad tends 135 6 3 3 D talsets maaninen Ata cit giao Auta eta ed a eae ate te ail Red at hatte 137 6 3 4 BICO technology interconnecting signals cccceeeesteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeesenaeees 142 6 4 Command SOurGeSia tatcee Mahal eet ae ea eat et oe Led Gh in a etd 147 6 4 1 PROF Idrive default sein moco dd ie elie 147 6 4 2 TM31 terminals default setting ss sicccecsseedacesececae annie see cea sane ceansnacdepsuihiaensiecdenseeteqapsetiedaeeacestee 149 6 4 3 CU terminals default Setting ce eeeceee centre ee eene eter ene ee ee eaaeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeetaeeeeesaeeeesieeesaeeeeees 151 6 4 4 PROF Idrive T M31 default setings e in 153 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Table of contents 6 5 Setpoint SOURCES imita a dt 155 6 5 1 Anal a A e di 155 6 5 2 Motorized pOtentom ter cti dp tees 157 6 5 3 Fixed Speed seto S ain eot a a AS A A an 158 6 6 PROFIBU Sivad aaa 160 6 6 1 PROFIBUS COnnectlOMs cristal ai aa A 160 6 6 2 Control via PROFIBUS maira Ti Ei a E E grist eae diaiiedel 160 6 6 3 Monito
139. IVE CLiQ communication is taking place The DC link voltage is present Red The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE CLiQ communication is taking place The DC link voltage is too high Orange Orange DRIVE CLiQ communication is being established Red At least one fault is pending on this component Note LED is driven irrespective of the corresponding messages being reconfigured 0 5 Hz flashing Firmware is being downloaded light green red 2 Hz flashing Firmware download is complete Waiting for POWER ON light green red 2 Hz flashing Detection of the components via LED is activated p0124 light Note green orange Both options depend on the LED status when module recognition is activated via or p0124 1 red orange Inverter chassis units Z N WARNING Hazardous DC link voltages may be present at any time regardless of the status of the H201 LED The warnings on the components must be observed Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 297 Diagnosis faults and alarms 10 2 Diagnosis SMC30 encoder evaluation Table 10 4 Description of the LEDs on the SMC30 LED Status Description RDY OFF The electronics power supply is missing or lies outside the permissible tolerance range Green On permanently The component is ready to operate and cyclic DRIVE CLIQ communication is taking place Orang
140. Measuring point for emitted interference Figure 4 1 Definition of environments 1 and 2 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 41 Electrical installation 4 4 Introduction to EMC 42 First environment Second environment Figure 4 2 Definition of categories C1 to C4 Table 4 1 Definition of environments 1 and 2 Environment 1 Definition of environments 1 and 2 Residential buildings or locations at which the drive system is connected to a public low voltage supply network without a transformer Environment 2 Industrial locations supplied by a medium voltage network via a separate transformer Table 4 2 Definition of categories C1 to C4 Definition of categories C1 to C4 Category C1 Rated voltage lt 1000 V unrestricted use in environment 1 Category C2 Rated voltage for stationary drive systems lt 1000 V for use in environment 2 For use in environment 1 only when sold and installed by skilled personnel Category C3 Rated voltage lt 1000 V use in environment 2 only Category C4 Rated voltage gt 1000 V or for rated currents gt 400 A in complex systems in environment 2 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Electrical installation 4 5 EMC compliant design 4 5 EMC compliant design The following section provides some basic information and guidelines that will help you comply with the EMC and CE
141. N OFF command NSearch max SMA AS SESE Setpoint speed Speed Demagnetize search Magnetize NSearch max p1082 x 1 25 Ramp up Figure 9 6 Flying restart J N WARNING When the flying restart p1200 function is active the drive may still be accelerated by the detection current despite the fact that it is at standstill and the setpoint is 0 For this reason entering the area around the drive when it is in this condition can cause 254 death serious injury or considerable material damage Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 2 Drive functions 9 2 5 2 Flying restart with encoder Description The flying restart function behaves differently with V f control and vector control e V f characteristic p1300 lt 20 Flying restart without encoder see Flying restart without encoder e Vector control with encoder Since the speed is known from the start the motor can be magnetized immediately at the appropriate frequency The duration of magnetization is specified in p0346 Once the excitation build up time has elapsed the ramp function generator is set to the actual speed value and the motor ramped up to the current setpoint speed NWARNING When the flying restart p1200 function is active the drive may still be accelerated by the detection current despite the fact that it is at standstill and the setpoint is 0
142. N without a safety alert symbol indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken NOTICE indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into account If more than one degree of danger is present the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage rsonnel The device system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation Commissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Prescribed Usage Trademarks Note the following NWARNING This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens Correct reliable operation of the product requires proper transport storage positioning and assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance All names identified by O are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG Th
143. O The BICO parameter interconnection can be implemented in different command data sets CDS The different interconnections are activated by switching data sets Interconnections across drive objects are also possible Internal encoding of the binector connector output parameters The internal codes are needed for example to write BICO input parameters via PROF Idrive Parameter number Drive Index number object 31 a 16 15 10 0 Device e g CU320 63 Separate object o o B Example signal sources 0000 0011 1110 1001 bin 1111 11 bin 00 0000 0010 bin 0000 0000 0000 0001 bin 0000 00 bin 00 0000 0000 bin 0001 0000 hex gt Fixed 1 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin 0000 00 bin 00 0000 0000 bin 0000 0000 hex gt Fixed 0 Figure 6 6 Internal encoding of the binector connector output parameters Inverter chassis units 144 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 3 Basic information about the drive system Example 1 interconnecting digital signals Suppose you want to operate a drive via terminals DI O and DI 1 on the Control Unit using jog 1 and jog 2 BO Binector output Bl Binector input Signal source Signal sink 24 V x122 1 DIO p1055 C 9 gore see X122 2 DI 1 p1056 C pot oraz ee 24V X122 1 DIO p1055 C A 07220 Internal 7220 Jog 1 X122 2 1 DI 1 p1056 C A 207227 Internal 7791 Jog 2 Figure 6 7 Interconnection of digital signals example Example 2 connection of OC OFF3 to several dri
144. Operating Instructions 07 2007 Edition SINAMICS G130 Built in unit converter 75 kW to 800 kW SIEMENS SIEMENS Preface Safety information SINAMICS Device overview Mechanical installation SINAMICS G130 Inverter chassis units Electrical installation Commissioning Operating Instructions Operation Setpoint channel and closed loop control Output terminals O 00 I N O O BB W IN Functions monitoring and protective functions as O Diagnosis faults and alarms Maintenance and servicing 1 1 12 Technical specifications A Appendix Control version V2 5 A5E00331449A Safety Guidelines Qualified Pe This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety as well as to prevent damage to property The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger NDANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken NWARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken NCAUTION with a safety alert symbol indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken CAUTIO
145. PE E aL 24V 1 M a M 1 5 M X122 DI DO 9 1 M 15 DI DO 10 1 X132 LEYE r DIDO 11 1 Ea DI 4 DI5 DI 6 DI7 M2 M L DDO 12 Figure 4 12 DI DO 13 1 ll DI DO 14 1 DI DO 15 1 fu D Ee it 5 ae A ee X140 EN Serial inte Wiring diagram of the CU320 ace X100 X101 X102 X103 DRIVE CLiQ socket 1 DRIVE CLiQ socket 2 DRIVE CLiQ socket 3 o o x ra le a g 3 Q Ww 2 a a X126 PROFIBUS Control Unit 320 Operating Instructions Inverter chassis units 07 07 A5E00331449A Electrical installation 4 10 Signal connections 4 10 3 TM31 Terminal Module Description The TM31 Terminal Module TM31 is a terminal extension board It can be used to increase the number of available digital analog inputs outputs within a drive system Connection overview X524 Electronics power supply X500 X501 DRIVE CLIQ interfaces _ gt X540 Auxiliary voltage supply P24 V X520 X530 Digital inputs YW S5 Current voltage switchover of analog inputs Voltage for the analog inputs X521 Analog inputs _ gt X522 X542 Analog outputs Relay 1 Temperature Sensor Relay 2 Shield connection gt PE conductor connection M4 gt x Figure 4 13 TM31 Terminal Module Inv
146. PROFIdrive TM31 AOP30 4 PROFIdrive TM31 Command sources r0807 Master control active LOCAL REMOTE key 0 REMOTE PROFIBUS 1 LOCAL operator panel Internal control Input terminals TM31 Figure 6 15 Command sources AOP30 lt gt PROF Idrive TM31 Priority The command source priorities are shown in the diagram Command sources AOP30 gt PROFIdrive TM31 Note All of the supplementary setpoints are deactivated for LOCAL master control Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 153 Operation 6 4 Command sources TM31 terminal assignment with PROFIdrive TM31 default setting Figure 6 16 TM31 terminal assignment with PROF Idrive TM31 default setting Switching the command source 154 TM31 li X521 Aror 1 0 10V AEE Alo 2 4 CO lA 09 Al1 E j eee Free S 4 a D froi i P10 S n1 5 frei Aj i e EDI 2 7 Acknowledge a a es Nor e fault a aj M pe M1 I S X522 i 1 Actual speed y 0 10V X530 AO 0V E ae v OFF2 1 AO 0 OFF3 e ao oc gt O SC fers 7 E de Power 0 Ext fault a ns ARN E a
147. Parameters e r4052 Actual input voltage current e p4053 Analog inputs smoothing time constant e r4055 Analog inputs actual value in percent e p4056 Analog inputs type e p4057 Analog inputs characteristic value x1 e p4058 Analog inputs characteristic value y1 e p4059 Analog inputs characteristic value x2 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 155 Operation 6 5 Setpoint sources e p4060 Analog inputs characteristic value y2 e p4063 Analog inputs offset Note In the factory setting and after basic commissioning an input voltage of 10 V is equal to the main setpoint 100 reference speed p2000 which has been set to the maximum speed p1082 Example changing analog input 0 from voltage to current input 0 20 mA Table 6 5 Example setting analog input O S5 0 1 Curren voltage switchover J Set current voltage selector to Current I p4056 0 2 Set analog input type 0 to 0 20 mA Note The change to the analog input must then be stored on the CompactFlash card so that it is protected in the event of a power failure F3505 Fault Analog input wire breakage This fault is triggered when the analog input type p4056 is set to 3 4 20 mA with open circuit monitoring and the input current of 2 mA has been undershot The fault value can be used to determine the analog input in question F3505 Fault Analog input wire breakage This fault
148. Rated input voltage V 660 V to 690 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 93 109 131 Rated output current A 85 100 120 Base load current IL 1 A 80 95 115 Base load current IH 2 A 76 89 107 Max output frequency 3 Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 1 5 1 8 2 4 Max current requirements at 24 A 0 8 0 8 0 8 V DC Cooling air requirement m s 0 17 0 17 0 17 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 64 67 64 67 64 67 Line connection Maximum DIN VDE mm 2x 185 2x 185 2x 185 AWG MCM 2 x 350 2 x 350 2 x 350 Fixing screw M10 M10 M10 Motor connection Maximum DIN VDE mm 2 x 185 2x 185 2x 185 AWG MCM 2 x 350 2 x 350 2 x 350 Fixing screw M10 M10 M10 Protective conductor connection Max PE1 GND mm 2x 185 2x 185 2x 185 AWG MCM 2 x 350 2 x 350 2 x 350 Max PE2 GND mm 2x 185 2x 185 2x 185 AWG MCM 2 x 350 2 x 350 2 x 350 Fixing screw M10 M10 M10 Frame size FX FX FX Approx weight kg 104 104 104 Dimensions W x H x D mm 326 x 1 400 x 356 326 x 1 400 x 356 326 x 1 400 x 356 Recommended protection Line protection w o semicond protection 3NA3132 6 3NA3132 6 3NA3136 6 Rated current A 125 125 160 frame size to DIN 43620 1 1 1 1 Line and semi cond protection 3NE1022 2 3NE1022 2 3NE1224 2 Rated current A 125 125 160 frame size to DIN 43620 1 00 00 1 1 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability
149. Remove the protective cover Removal The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with the diagram 1 Remove the CU320 mount 1 nut If necessary remove the PROFIBUS plug and connection to the operator panel X140 on the CU320 and carefully remove the CU320 2 Disconnect the plugs for the fiber optic cables and signal cables 5 plugs 3 Remove the DRIVE CLiQ cables and connections to the CU320 5 plugs 4 Remove the retaining screws for the slide in electronics unit 2 screws When removing the slide in electronics unit you have to disconnect 5 further plugs one after the other 2 at the top 3 at the bottom CAUTION When removing the electronics unit ensure that you do not damage any signal cables The Control Interface Board can then be removed from the slide in electronics unit CAUTION When removing the connector of the ribbon cable make sure that you actuate the locking lever on the connector very carefully e g with a screwdriver otherwise the lock could be damaged Installation For re installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current carrying parts must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure When dealing with connectors with a lock make sure that the locking lever is securely engaged once con
150. SMC30 Sensor Module for determining the actual motor Speed oooonccccnnncccnnnoccccconanccccnonccinnnns 73 4 10 4 1 Description alada 73 4710 4 2 7 COMEN it o e 76 4 10 4 3 SMC30 Sensor Module for determining the actual motor Speed ooooonccccnnncccnnocccccononccccnnncccinnna 78 COMMISSIONING Livia A a A Wheaten eae tee as 79 5 1 Chapter Contents savnetsves iS sed ia ee et i eet eee 79 5 2 STARTER Commissioning tool Arne re E e a A cano nn nn ran nn anna E rnnn rara 80 5 2 1 Installing STARTER gains ansien a EA dc 80 5 2 2 The STARTER user interface ooooococccccooccccccccnoconcconenoncnncnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnn nn nnnnnnnnnnn mn nnnn nn nn nana nn neteet 81 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER oooncccccncccccconnoncncnnnonccnnnnnncnnnnnnncnnnnnn nc nana ncccnnnnnnccnns 82 5 3 1 Creating a project iii ia ii dt 82 5 3 2 Configuring the drive Unitesi anaie A a A dd 91 5 3 3 Starting the drive ProjO Ct ricino al 114 5 3 4 Connection via Serial interface cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeaeceeeeseccaeceeeesecenaeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 115 5 4 The AOP30 operator Pelis da lidad Riad 118 5 5 EIFSEECOMMISSIONING ect dd id daa dida 119 5 5 1 EITSECOMMISSIONINO s1 titi A A A dae di da DA 119 5 5 2 Basic COMMISSIONINO A A A a a e aaa a a ERENT Ea 120 5 6 Status after COMMISSIONING saiia A A R 127 5 7 Parameter reset to factory Settings oooooconnnnccnnnnnocncnnnnocncccnncnccnnnannn cnn nn nr canon arrancar rana 128 Op a A A AEA
151. Setpoint channel and closed loop control Function diagram Parameters Inverter chassis units 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder The startup time r0345 Tstartup is a measure for the total moment of inertia J of the machine and describes the time during which the unloaded drive can be accelerated with the rated motor torque r0333 Mmot ratea from standstill to the rated motor speed p0311 Nmot ratea r0435 Tstartup J X 2 X TT X Nmot rated 60 X Mmot rated P0341 x p0342 x 2 x Tr x p0311 60 x r0333 If these supplementary conditions are in line with the application the startup time can be used as the lowest value for the ramp up or ramp down time Note The ramp up and ramp down times p1120 p1121 of the ramp function generator in the setpoint channel should be set accordingly so that the motor speed can track the setpoint during acceleration and braking This will optimize the function of speed controller pre control Acceleration pre control using a connector input p1495 is activated by the parameter settings p1400 2 1 and p1400 3 0 p1428 dead time and p1429 time constant can be set for balancing purposes FP 6031 Pre control balancing reference acceleration model e p0311 Rated motor speed e 10333 Rated motor torque e p0341 Motor moment of inertia e p0342 Ratio between the total and motor moment of inertia e 10345 Rated motor startup time e p1400 2 Acceleration pre
152. Setting the PROFIBUS ID number The PROFIBUS Ident Number PNO ID can be set using p2042 SINAMICS can be operated on PROFIBUS with various identities This allows a PROFIBUS GSD that is independent of the device to be used e g PROFIdrive VIK NAMUR with Ident Number 3AA0 hex e 0 SINAMICS S G e 1 VIK NAMUR A new setting only becomes effective after POWER ON reset or download Note The advantages of Totally Integrated Automation TIA can only be utilized when selecting o Inverter chassis units 160 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 6 PROFIBUS 6 6 3 Monitoring Telegram failure Description Following a telegram failure and after a monitoring time has elapsed t_An bit r2043 0 is set to 1 and alarm A01920 is output Binector output r2043 0 can be used for an emergency stop for example Once a delay time p2044 has elapsed fault FO1910 is output and fault reaction OFF3 quick stop is triggered If no OFF response is to be triggered the fault response can be reparameterized accordingly Fault FO1910 can be acknowledged immediately The drive can then be operated even without PROFIBUS Cyclic telegrams from master F01910 Figure 6 20 Monitoring Telegram failure 6 6 4 Telegrams and process data General information Selecting a telegram via CU parameter p0922 determines which process data is transferred between the master and slave From the perspective
153. Sizer and Starter tools e Ready to connect to facilitate the installation process e Quick and easy commissioning thanks to practical menu guidance and integrated optimization routines e SINAMICS G130 chassis units are an integral part of Totally Integrated Automation TIA The TIA concept offers an optimized range of products for automation and drive technology This concept builds on configuration communication and data management procedures that are consistent throughout the product range SINAMICS is fully integrated in the TIA concept Separate S7 PCS7 blocks and faceplates for WinCC are available e A user friendly graphical operator panel with measured values messages and a quasi analog display for measured values is also available as an option e Integration in SIMATIC H systems is possible via a Y link SINAMICS G130 chassis units are manufactured to meet high standards of quality and exacting demands This results in a high level of reliability availability and functionality for our products The development design and manufacturing processes as well as order processing and the logistics supply center have been certified to DIN ISO 9001 by an independent authority Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Device overview 2 4 Applications features and design Service Our worldwide sales and service network offers our customers consulting services tailored to their needs provi
154. Supply voltage 660 690 V 3 AC 75 800 1 25 100 The pulse frequencies set in the factory are also the minimum frequencies The scamning times for the inputs and outputs of the customer terminal block TM31 are set in the factory to 4000 us This is also the minimum limit Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 2 Drive functions 9 2 8 3 Increasing the pulse frequency Description The pulse frequency can be increased in a virtually continuously variable manner to between the value preassigned in the factory and the maximum pulse frequency which can be set Once the new pulse frequency required has been entered in p0113 a check is carried out to establish whether the required pulse frequency can be set 1 Example The required frequency is used in the following formula X 0 5 x 1000 p0113 us If the result X is an integer multiple of 1 25 us the value is accepted If not alarm A1224 Inconsistent pulse frequency appears The following calculation will help obtain a permissible value for p0113 Result X is divided by 1 25 us and rounded up to the next whole number This result is then multiplied by 1 25 us and converted to a recommended pulse frequency by reversing the above formula The recommended pulse frequency must be rounded up to 3 digits after the decimal place and entered in parameter p0113
155. Switchover conditions In open loop operation the calculated actual speed value is the same as the setpoint value For vertical loads and acceleration processes parameters p1610 constant torque boost and p1611 acceleration torque boost must be modified in order to generate the static or dynamic load torque of the drive If on induction motors p1610 is set to 0 only the magnetizing current r0331 is injected at a value of 100 the rated motor current p0305 is injected For permanent magnet synchronous motors at p1610 0 a pre control absolute value derived from the supplementary torque r1515 remains instead of the magnetizing current To ensure that the drive does not stall during acceleration p1611 can be increased or acceleration pre control for the speed controller can be used This is also advisable to ensure that the motor is not subject to thermal overload at low speeds Vector control without a speed sensor has the following characteristics at low frequencies e Closed loop operation up to approx 1 Hz output frequency e Starting in closed loop operation directly after the drive has been energized induction motors only Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Setpoint channel and closed loop control Function diagram Parameter Inverter chassis units 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder Note In this case the speed setpoint upstream of the ramp function generato
156. TO T1 T2 Measuring sockets Table 4 18 Measuring sockets TO T1 T2 Voltage 0 V to 5 V Resolution 8 bits Load current max 3 mA Continued short circuit proof Socket Function TO Measuring socket 0 T1 Measuring socket 1 T2 Measuring socket 2 M Ground The reference potential is terminal M Technical specifications Measuring sockets for bunch pin plugs d 2 mm Note The measuring sockets are only used as an aid during commissioning 62 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Electrical installation 4 10 Signal connections Slot for the CompactFlash card SIEMENS SNIMW3IS Y a T O o a gt la ot rv aoras iiey Figure 4 11 CompactFlash card slot CAUTION The CompactFlash card may only be inserted as shown in the diagram arrow top right The CompactFlash card may only be inserted or removed when the Control Unit is disconnected from the power supply When returning a defective unit remove the CompactFlash card and keep it for insertion in the replacement unit If you do not do this all the data on the CompactFlash card will be lost parameters software license etc Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 63 Electrical installation 4 10 Signal connections Wiring diagram 64 Ext 24V Tm al X124 I
157. The scanning time for the customer terminal block TM31 p4099 x must then be set to an integer multiple of the scanning time of p0115 0 The minimum limit for the setting range must be taken into account here Factory setting 1 25 kHz required pulse frequency 1 3 kHz 1 2 3 0 5 x 1000 us 1 3 384 61538461 us is not an integer multiple of 1 25 us is not accepted Calculation of p0113 384 61538461 us 1 25 us 307 692307688 gt 308 308 x 1 25 us 385 us gt r0114 1 0 5 x 1000 kHz 385 1 2987 kHz P0113 1 299 kHz p0115 0 385 us gt p4099 0 p4099 1 p4099 2 11 x 385 us 4235 us Procedure for the setting in the above example NO Oo BR WY gt Inverter chassis units Set drive to pulse inhibit DO1 CU320 p0009 3 drive basis configuration DO2 VECTOR p0112 0 expert DO2 VECTOR p0113 1 299 kHz gt value is accepted DO3 TM31 p0112 0 expert DO3 TM31 p4099 0 p4099 1 p4099 2 4235 gt values are accepted DO1 CU320 p0009 0 gt calculations are made and a warm start is then carried out Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 261 Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 2 Drive functions Note The example described only applies to a SINAMICS G130 without a second customer terminal block TM31 When a second customer terminal block TM31 is used steps 5 and 6 also have to be carried out for DO4 2n
158. U Factory setting p0740 DI DO10 CU Factory setting p0748 10 Invert DI DO10 CU Factory setting po728 10 Set DI DO10 input or output CU Factory setting p0741 DI DO11 CU Factory setting Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 379 Appendix A 2 Parameter macros Sink Source Parameters Description DO Parameters Description DO po748 11 Invert DI DO11 CU Factory setting p0728 1 1 Set DI DO11 input or output CU Factory setting p0742 DI DO12 CU r2138 7 Ack fault Vector p0748 12 Invert DI DO12 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 12 Set DI DO12 input or output CU 1 Output CU p0743 DI DO13 CU Factory setting p0748 13 Invert DI DO13 CU Factory setting p0728 13 Set DI DO13 input or output CU Factory setting p0744 DI DO14 CU Factory setting p0748 14 Invert DI DO14 CU Factory setting p0728 14 Set DI DO14 input or output CU Factory setting p0745 DI DO15 CU Factory setting p0748 15 Invert DI DO15 CU Factory setting p0728 15 Set DI DO15 input or output CU Factory setting p2103 1 Acknowledge faults TM31 r2090 7 PZD 1 bit 1 Vector p2104 2 Acknowledge faults TM31 r4022 3 TM31 DI3 TM31 p4030 DOO TM31 r0899 11 Pulses enabled Vector p4031 DO1 TM31 r2139 3 Fault Vector p4038 DO8 TM31 r0899 0 Ready to start Vector p4028 8 Set DI DO8 input or output TM31 1 Output TM31 p4039 DO9 TM31 Factory setting p4028
159. UB D socket X126 The connections are electrically isolated Table 4 15 PROFIBUS interface X126 Pin Signal name Meaning Range 1 SHIELD Ground connection 2 M24_SERV Power supply for teleservice ground OV D O 3 RxD TxD P Receive transmit data P B B RS485 O O 4 CNTR P Control signal TTL O O 5 DGND PROFIBUS data reference potential C C ps Q 6 VP Supply voltage plus 5V 10 7 P24 SERV Power supply for teleservice 24 V 24 V 20 4 V 28 8 V O 8 RxD TxD N Receive transmit data N A A RS485 9 Not assigned Note The power supply for the teleservice terminals 2 and 7 withstands a load of 150 mA and is continued short circuit proof Connectors The cables must be connected via PROFIBUS connectors as they contain the necessary terminating resistors The figure below shows suitable PROFIBUS connectors with without a PG PC connector UT PROFIBUS connector PROFIBUS connector without PG PC connection with PG PC connection 6ES7972 0BA41 OXAO 6ES7972 0BB41 0XA0 Inverter chassis units 60 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Electrical installation 4 10 Signal connections Bus terminating resistor The bus terminating resistor must be switched on or off depending on its position in the bus otherwise the data will not be transmitted properly Principle the terminating resistors must only be switched on at both ends of the bus line the res
160. Unscrew the connection to the DC link 8 nuts Remove the retaining screw at the top 1 screw Remove the retaining screws at the bottom 2 screws Disconnect the plugs for the fiber optic cables and signal cables 3 plugs Oona fF WN Remove the connection for the current transformer and associated PE connection 1 plug Remove the connection for the DC link sensor 1 nut N 8 Remove the power connections 6 screws 9 Unscrew the two retaining screws for the fan and attach the tool for de installing the power block at this position You can now remove the power block CAUTION When removing the power block ensure that you do not damage any signal cables For re installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current carrying parts must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 317 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Replacing the right hand power block Figure 11 7 Replacing the power block frame size HX right hand power block Inverter chassis units 318 Operating In
161. a a AAA CU320 X122 j I DIO 2 lt S oo 1 I gt to 2 Acknow 4 gt 1 DI3 ledge 5 i ar ae L5 I Enable pulses 7 gt DI DO 8 No fault 8 gt _pIDO 9 l 9 gt M l P24 ETa l DI DO 10 N Ext alarm 11 gt DIDO 11 I A l x132 IN OFF2 ere DI4 N OFF3 2 gt i DI 5 i N Ext fault 1 3 gt Q DI 6 I gt gt ae 7 JS Mm2 6 I ra wee Acknowledge fault 7 gt DI DO 12 I P24 B5 DIDO 13 9 m I E P24 sg DIDO 14 P24 LEYE DI DO 15 12 gt M I I ee ee a a SI Figure 6 10 CU320 terminal assignment with PROF Idrive default setting Control word 1 The bit assignment for control word 1 is described in Description of the control words and setpoints Status word 1 The bit assignment for status word 1 is described in Description of the status words and actual values Switching the command source The command source can be switched using the LOCAL REMOTE key on the AOP30 Inverter chassis units 148 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 4 Command sources 6 4 2 TM31 terminals default setting Prerequisites e The Power Module CU320 and TM31 have been correctly installed e The TM31 terminals default setting was chosen during commissioning e STARTER TM31 terminals e AOP30 2 TM31 terminals Command sources r0807 Master control active LOCAL REMOTE key 0 REMOTE TM31 1
162. a daa 39 4 3 Important Safety precautions isseire ad ana anade iae E aaaea a aaay eana EADAE Daana 40 4 4 Introduction to EMG vicio E EEE eect viderectsieedasstageelsbivtansate satdteessteds 41 4 5 EMG compliant designice ciicccc ien E E E E 43 4 6 CONNECTION OVa VNOW cernens eE E E a RE 45 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 7 Table of contents 4 7 Power COMECHIONS civil A A Add 49 4 7 1 Connection cross sections and Cable lengthS oooo oocconnnnicinnnnciconno cocina nccnn corn cann ronca cnn 49 4 7 2 Connecting the motor and power Cables ooooooocccnnoccccccncocccccanoncccnnoncncnanonannnno nc nn nana n nr rnna rca rnnnnnnnn 50 4 7 3 DCPS DCNS connection for a dV dt filter with Voltage Peak Limiter ooooonnonnnncnnnnnnnicocccnnnnnoo 51 4 7 4 Adjusting the fan Voltage e icaciorta lili id 51 4 7 5 Removing the connection bracket for the interference suppression capacitor with operation from an ungrounded supply 0 cccceeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeesecaeaeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaees 53 4 8 Extemal24 VDC SUPPIV initial tt hau utletes 53 4 9 DRIVE CLIQ wiring dilagraM oooocccncocococnconnnonnononononcnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnn anar eie aeii i ea aa 54 4 10 Signal connections ii s 55 4 10 1 Power Module a e ae aa beh a a e R a lit tion 55 410 2 Control UnitCU320 viii id a ae eed ee Se eee ee 57 4 10 3 TM31 Terminal Mod le ee aeea aaaea aaa eaaa a a a aeaa ea ia aaa aA AE aE ER 65 4 10 4
163. ad monitoring delay time e 12198 4 BO ZSW monitoring 2 n_setp lt p2161 e 2198 5 BO ZSW monitoring 2 n_setp lt 0 Inverter chassis units 284 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 4 Monitoring and protective functions 9 4 Monitoring and protective functions 9 4 1 Protecting power components Description SINAMICS power units offer comprehensive functions for protecting power components Table 9 8 General protection for power units Protection against Protective measure Response Overcurrent Monitoring with two thresholds e First threshold exceeded A30031 A30032 A30033 Current limiting in phase U has responded Pulsing in this phase is inhibited for one pulse period F30017 gt OFF2 is triggered if the threshold is exceeded too often e Second threshold exceeded F30001 Overcurrent gt OFF2 Overvoltage Comparison of DC link voltage with F30002 Overvoltage gt OFF2 hardware shutdown threshold Undervoltage Comparison of DC link voltage with F30003 Undervoltage gt OFF2 hardware shutdown threshold Short circuit Second monitoring threshold checked F30001 Overcurrent gt OFF2 for overcurrent Uce monitoring for IGBT module F30022 Monitoring Uce gt OFF2 Ground fault Monitoring the sum of all phase After threshold in p0287 is exceeded currents F30021 power unit Ground fault gt OFF2 Note The sum of all phase curre
164. again No acknowledgement necessary The active alarms are stored in the alarm buffer No alarm present No active alarm is present in the alarm buffer 8 Speed setpoint actual value Setpoint actual value monitoring within tolerance bandwidth BO r2197 7 deviation within tolerance bandwidth Actual value within tolerance band dynamic overshoot or shortfall permitted for t lt tmax tmax can be parameterized See FP8010 Setpoint actual value monitoring not within tolerance band Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 169 Operation 6 6 PROFIBUS Bit Meaning Explanation BICO 9 Control requested for PLC 4 Control from the PLC BO r0899 9 1 is always present 0 Local operation 10 forn comparison value reached 1 f orn comparison value reached or exceeded BO r2199 1 or exceeded 0 f orn comparison value not reached Note The message is parameterized as follows p2141 Threshold value p2142 Hysteresis 11 l Mor P limit not reached 1 l MorP limit not reached BO r1407 7 l M or P limit reached 0 Mor P limit reached 12 Reserved 13 Alarm motor overtemperature 1 Motor overtemperature alarm active BO r2135 14 0 Motor overtemperature alarm not active 14 Motor rotates forwards 1 Motor rotates forward n_act gt 0 BO r2197 3 n_act gt 0 0 Motor
165. ameter macro p0015 G130 built in unit This macro is used to make default settings for operating the built in unit A 2 Parameter macros Table A 1 Parameter macro p0015 G130 built in unit Sink Source Parameters Description DO Parameters Description DO po400 0 Enc type selection Vector 9999 Other Vector p0404 0 Encoder configuration effective Vector 200008h Vector p0405 0 Square wave encoder track A B Vector 9h Bipolar like A B track Vector po408 0 Rotary encoder pulse No Vector 1024 1024 pulses per revolution Vector po420 0 Encoder connection Vector 0x2 Encoder connection terminal Vector p0500 Technology application Vector 1 Pumps fans Vector p0600 Motor temperature sensor for Vector 0 No sensor Vector monitoring p0601 Motor temperature sensor type Vector 0 No sensor Vector p0603 0 Cl Motor temperature Vector r4105 Sensor on TM31 TM31 p0603 1 Cl Motor temperature Vector p0604 Motor overtemperature alarm Vector 120 Factory setting Vector threshold p0605 Motor overtemperature fault Vector 155 Factory setting Vector threshold p0606 Motor overtemperature timer Vector 0 Factory setting Vector p0610 Response to motor Vector 1 Display fault for alarm Imax red Vector overtemperature condition p0700 0 Macro binector input BI Vector 70001 PROF ldrive Vector p0864 BI Infeed operation Vector 1 p1000 0 Macro connector
166. amp p1121 1 Bl p0840 then pulse block main contactor if fitted is opened 1 0N 1 0 Coast to stop OFF2 0 Pulse block main contactor if fitted is opened 1 BI p0844 BI p0845 1 Do not coast to stop Note Control signal OFF2 is generated by ANDing BI p0844 and BI p0845 2 0 Emergency stop 0 Deceleration on the rapid stop ramp p1135 then 1 BI p0848 OFF3 pulse block main contactor if fitted is opened 1 No emergency stop Note Control signal OFF3 is generated by ANDing BI p0848 and BI p0849 3 0 Disable operation 1 Enable inverter pulse enable ramp up with active 1 BI p0852 1 Enable operation setpoint 0 Pulse inhibit The motor coasts down The Ready To Run status remains set 4 0 Set ramp generator to 0 The ramp generator output is set to setpoint 0 1 BI p1140 zero 1 Enable ramp function generator 5 0 Freeze ramp generator 0 The current setpoint is frozen at the ramp 1 BI p1141 1 Restart ramp generator generator output 6 1 Enable speed setpoint 1 The speed setpoint at the input of the ramp 1 BI p1142 0 Inhibit speed setpoint function generator is enabled 0 The speed setpoint at the input of the ramp function generator is set to zero The drive brakes in accordance with the ramp down time set in p1121 7 0 gt 1 Acknowledge error A positive signal transition acknowledges all the Bl p2103 current faults Note Acknowledgement is realized with a 0 1 edge via Bl p2103 or
167. amping e p1435 Speed controller reference model dead time e r1436 Speed controller reference model speed setpoint output e p1437 Speed controller reference model component input Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder 7 4 3 3 Speed controller adaptation Description Two adaptation methods are available namely free Kp_n adaptation and speed dependent Kp_n Tn_n adaptation Free Kp_n adaptation is also active in operation without encoder mode and is used in operation with encoder mode as an additional factor for speed dependent Kp_n adaptation Speed dependent Kp_n Tn_n adaptation is only active in operation with encoder mode and also affects the Tn_n value p1459 p1400 6 i Adaptation signal 1 7 1 Pa lie o referred to py A p200x or p205x j Adaptation signal 2 p1458 p1456 p1457 p1400 5 Kp_n_adapt p1460 a R ag Kp_n adaptation K IK only p1461 p1400 0 Encoderless P1465 Reduction in dynamic to speed vector control _ response p1464 Field weakening controller active Encoderless vector control p1463 p1462 Seas ee a peed dependen pie o Tn_n adaptation Tn_n_adapt Figure 7 13 Free Kp adaptation A dynamic response reduction in the field weakening range can be activated in encoderless operation p1400 0 This is activa
168. and servicing 11 4 Replacing components 11 4 4 Replacing the power block frame size JX Replacing the left hand power block Sal ss D p sa g o oook looo oi QO O Q 0 O a UN cI a f 10 8 Figure 11 8 Replacing the power block frame size JX left hand power block Inverter chassis units 320 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Preparatory steps Removal Installation Inverter chassis units e Disconnect the chassis unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access to the power block e Remove the protective cover The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with the diagram Unscrew the connection to the DC link 8 nuts Remove the retaining screw at the top 1 screw Remove the retaining screws at the bottom 2 screws Disconnect the plugs for the fiber optic cables and signal cables 2 plugs Remove the power connections 6 screws oa FWD Unscrew the two retaining screws for the fan and attach the tool for de installing the power block at this position You can now remove the power block CAUTION When removing the power block ensure that you do not damage any signal cables
169. apsed Fault FO7016 can be suppressed by p0607 0 If an induction motor is connected the drive continues operating with the data calculated in the thermal motor model If the system detects that the motor temperature sensor set in p0600 is not connected alarm A07820 Temperature sensor not connected is triggered FD 8016 Thermal monitoring motor FD 9576 TM31 temperature evaluation KTY PTC FD 9577 TM31 sensor monitoring KTY PTC e p0600 Motor temperature sensor for monitoring e p0604 Motor overtemperature alarm threshold e p0605 Motor overtemperature fault threshold e p0606 Motor overtemperature timer e p0607 Temperature sensor fault timer e p0610 Response to motor overtemperature condition e p4100 Temperature evaluation sensor type Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 291 Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 4 Monitoring and protective functions Inverter chassis units 292 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 10 Diagnosis faults and alarms Chapter content 10 1 This chapter provides information on the following e Troubleshooting e Service and support offered by Siemens AG The AOP30 operator panel PROFIBUS Input terminals TM31 Functions Protective functions Monitoring no E amp aw N 6 in Diagnostics Inverter chassis units 293 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Diagnosis faults and alarms 10 2 Diagnosis 10 2
170. arm active BO r2135 14 O Motor overtemperature alarm not active 14 Motor rotates forwards 1 Motor rotates forward n_act 2 0 BO r2197 3 n_act gt 0 0 Motor does not rotate forward n_act lt 0 15 Reserved Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 171 Operation 6 6 PROFIBUS NAMUR signaling bit bar Table 6 15 NAMUR signaling bit bar Actual speed value N_Act_A N_Act_SMOOTH e Actual speed value with 16 bit resolution incl sign bit e Bit 15 determines the actual value sign Bit 0 gt positive actual value Bit 1 gt negative actual value e The actual speed value is normalized via parameter p2000 N_act_A 4000 hex or 16384 dec speed in p2000 Actual speed N_act_B e Actual speed value with 32 bit resolution incl sign bit e Bit 31 determines the actual value sign Bit 0 gt positive actual value Bit 1 gt negative actual value e The actual speed value is normalized via parameter p2000 N_act_B 4000 0000 hex or 1073741824 dec speed in p2000 Actual current value la_Act la_Act_SMOOTH 172 e Actual current value with 16 bit resolution e The actual current value is normalized via parameter p2002 la_act 4000 hex or 16384 dec current in p2002 Bit Meaning 0 signal 1 signal 00 Fault drive converter data electronics SW error No Yes 01 Line supply fault No Yes 02 DC link overvoltag
171. as been eliminated Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Diagnosis faults and alarms 10 3 Service and support 10 3 Service and support Service and support helpline Online Support Field service Inverter chassis units If you need help and do not know who to contact we make sure that you receive all the help you need as quickly as possible The helpline ensures that a specialist in your area can provide you with professional support The helpline in Germany for example is available 24 hours a day 365 days a year German and English are spoken Tel 0180 50 50 111 Our round the clock worldwide online support service provides quick and efficient support in five languages The comprehensive Internet based information system which is available round the clock provides product support services and support tools in the shop Online support provides a wide range of technical information e FAQs tips and tricks downloads current news e Manual e Helpful programs and software products e http www siemens de automation service amp support If your plant is down and you need fast on site help we can provide the specialists with the required expertise wherever you are With our comprehensive service network we offer professional and reliable expertise to get your plant up and running again as quickly as possible Experts are available 24 hours a day 365 days a year Tel 01
172. ated by the control signal p1267 1 0 p1269 0 Signal source for contactor K1 feedback p1269 1 Signal source for contactor K2 feedback p3800 1 The internal voltages are used for synchronization p3802 r1261 2 Synchronizer activation is triggered by the bypass function p1200 1 The flying restart function is always active Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 277 Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 3 Extended functions 9 3 2 3 Description Activation 278 Bypass without synchronizer p1260 3 When the motor is transferred to the supply contactor K1 is opened following converter s pulse inhibit The system then waits for the motor excitation time to elapse after which contactor K2 is closed and the motor is run directly on the supply If the motor is switched on in a non synchronized manner when activated an equalizing current flows and this must be taken into account when designing the protective equipment see diagram Circuit bypass without synchronization When the motor is being transferred from the supply by the converter initially contactor K2 is opened and after the excitation time contactor K1 is closed The converter then captures the rotating motor and the motor is operated on the converter Contactor K2 must be designed for switching under load Contactors K1 and K2 must be interlocked against closing at the same time The flying restart funct
173. ating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Safety information 1 1 1 Warnings Z N WARNING Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation Non observance of the warnings can result in severe personal injury or property damage Only qualified personnel should work on or around the equipment These personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all warning and maintenance procedures described in these operating instructions The successful and safe operation of this device is dependent on correct transport proper storage and installation as well as careful operation and maintenance National safety guidelines must be observed Certification The following certificates can be found under Safety and Operating Instructions in the documentation folder e EC declaration of conformity e Certificate of compliance with order e EC manufacturer s declaration Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 13 Safety information 1 2 Safety and operating instructions 1 2 Safety and operating instructions Prerequisites 14 N DANGER This equipment is used in industrial high voltage installations During operation this equipment contains rotating and live bare parts For this reason they could cause severe injury or significant material damage if the required covers are removed if they are used or operated incorrectly or have not been properly maintained Wh
174. ation p1020 FSW bit 0 Vector r4022 1 TM31 DI1 TM31 p1021 FSW bit 1 Vector r4022 2 TM31 DI2 TM31 p1035 MOP raise Vector r4022 1 TM31 DI1 TM31 p1036 MOP lower Vector r4022 2 TM31 DI2 TM31 p1055 Jog bit 0 Vector 0 p1056 Jog bit 1 Vector 0 p1113 Direction reversal Vector 0 p1140 Enable RFG Vector 1 p1141 Start RFG Vector 1 p1142 Enable nsetp Vector 1 p2103 1 Acknowledge faults Vector 0 p2104 2 Acknowledge faults Vector r4022 3 TM31 DI3 TM31 p2106 Ext fault_1 Vector r4022 6 TM31 DI6 TM31 p2107 Ext fault_2 Vector 1 p2112 Ext alarm_1 Vector r4022 11 TM31 DI11 TM31 p2116 Ext alarm_2 Vector 1 p0738 DI DO8 CU Factory setting p0748 8 Invert DI DO8 CU Factory setting p0728 8 Set DI DO8 input or output CU Factory setting p0739 DI DO9 CU Factory setting p0748 9 Invert DI DO9 CU Factory setting p0728 9 Set DI DO9 input or output CU Factory setting p0740 DI DO10 CU Factory setting po748 10 Invert DI DO10 CU Factory setting po728 10 Set DI DO10 input or output CU Factory setting p0741 DI DO11 CU Factory setting p0748 1 1 Invert DI DO11 CU Factory setting Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 375 Appendix A 2 Parameter macros Sink Source Parameters Description DO Parameters Description DO p0728 1 1 Set DI DO11 input or output CU Factory setting p0742 DI DO12 CU r2138 7 Ack
175. being established 0 5 Hz flashing light DRIVE CLiQ component firmware update in progress 2 Hz flashing light Component firmware update complete Waiting for POWER ON of relevant components OFF Cyclic communication is not yet taking place Note The PROFIdrive is ready for communication when the Control Unit is ready to operate see RDY LED Dra Green Continuous Cyclic communication is taking place PROF Idrive cyclic P A TER 0 5 Hz flashing Cyclic communication is not fully underway yet transmission light Possible causes The controller is not transmitting any setpoints In isochronous mode the controller did not send a Global Control or it sent a defective Global Control GC Red Continuous Cyclic communication has been interrupted Orange 2 Hz flashing light Firmware checksum error CRC error OPT OFF Electronics power supply outside permissible tolerance range option The component is not ready to operate The Option Board is missing or an associated drive object has not been created Green Continuous Option board is ready 0 5 Hz flashing Depends on the option board used light Red Continuous At least one fault is present in this component The option board is not ready e g after power ON MOD OFF Reserved Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 295 Diagnosis faults and alarms 10 2 Diagnos
176. cable PPI v Standard for STEP 7 Interface Parameter Assignment Used Serial cable PPI Properties HA PC Adapter PROFIBUS aa Properties Serial cable PPI PC PPI cable PPI as PPI Local Connection Serial cable PPI Ls HA TCP IP gt Intel R PRO 100 VE Ne y Ee gt Station Parameters Address 0 lt M gt Assigning Parameters to an PC PPI cable for an PPI Network Timeout 1s Network Parameters M Advanced PPI Add Remove Interfaces E Multiple master networl Transmission rate 19 2 kbps v Highest station address Default Cancel Help Figure 5 30 Setting the interface 3 On CU320 set bus address 3 on the Profibus address switch 4 When creating the drive unit also set bus address 3 Inverter chassis units 116 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Commissioning Project Wizard Starter Introduction Create new project Preview EP Project a PG PC Set interface units 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Insert drive Summary Please enter the drive unit data Drive unit Device Sinamics X Type 6130 y Version 2 5 v Bus addr C Name SINAMICS_G1 30 Sinamics tutorial Insert lt Back Continue gt Figure 5 31 Setting the bus address Cancel Note The bus addresses on CU320 and on
177. cceceeeeeeeneeceeeeeeeseeeneaeeeeeeeeesenaeees 211 7 4 1 Vector control without encoder cccccceceee cece ceeeee aces ee eeeeeeaaeeeceeeeeeeeaeaeceeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeseeeneeeeeees 212 7 4 2 Vector control with encoder ccecesccce cece ee cece cece a aeee eee eeeaeaeaeceeeegaaeaeeeeeesesneaeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeteees 214 7 4 3 Speedcontroller taa dama lindas 215 7 4 3 1 Speed controller pre control integrated pre control with balancing ooocoiinnnnnninnninnnnonnnnnn 217 T 4 39 2 Reference model miae nisan aa eaa a liinda leerte ia ainda cont 220 7 4 3 3 Speed controller adaptation ooooninccccinnnnnnncinnnocccnconnnnnnonnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nn naar nro rnnnnn ennn 221 CABA gt Droop FUNCION it A E ae A Al A 223 7 4 4 Closed loop torque Control zmen S i a tia 224 7 4 5 Torque limiting sinirin nai a a A a a Aae ed ee eee eaves 227 7 4 6 Permanenterregte Synchronmotoren oococccccnncccccnnononcnnnanoncncnnnncncnnnoncnnnnn nn nr nan nn rr rn narran rca 228 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 9 Table of contents 10 Output terminal iv cui A EELA NEELA ETENA ai a 231 8 1 Chapter Content seis 2 5 01 it it ia 231 8 2 TMSAJanalog Outputs 0 A eee ad 232 8 2 1 List of signals for the analog signals ocoononcccnnnnniccnnnocccnononnccnanoncnnnno cnc nnno narran rc rra narran nn 233 8 3 TM31 digital OUtpUts cc di dd dida 235 Functions monitoring and prot
178. cedure is the V f characteristic whereby the stator voltage for the induction motor or synchronous motor is controlled proportionately to the stator frequency This method has proved successful in a wide range of applications with low dynamic requirements such as e Pumps and fans e Belt drives e Multi motor drives V f control aims to maintain a constant flux in the motor whereby the flux is proportional to the magnetization current lIu or the ratio of voltage U to frequency f Q Iu Vif The torque M generated by the induction motors is in turn proportional to the product or more precisely the vector product x l of the flux and current M 0xI To generate as much torque as possible with a given current the motor must function using the greatest possible constant flux To maintain a constant flux therefore the voltage V must change in proportion to the frequency f to ensure a constant magnetization current Iu V f characteristic control is derived from these basic premises The field weakening range is above the rated motor frequency where the maximum voltage is reached The flux and maximum torque decrease as the frequency increases this is illustrated in the following diagram U M P A Motor nominal working point 7 ic Voltage range f Field range f Figure 7 4 Operating areas and characteristic curves for the induction motor with converter supply Several variatio
179. ceeeeeeseeaeceseeeseeceaeeeeeceneeeeeeeess 260 9 2 8 3 Increasing the pulse frequency ooooconccccnnnccccnnncocccccnnnonc cinco cnn anar nc cn nn rr rr 261 9 2 8 4 Maximum output frequency achieved by increasing the pulse frequency ooooococonnnncccnnnacccccnn 262 9 2 8 95 Parametros Ta 262 9 2 9 Runtime operating hours counter oooooocccconociccnnoconcncnanoncnncnnnnnncnnn cnn cnnn nn nr nano rca rnnn nn nr rara rn 263 9 2 10 Simulation Operation eisiaa cette ceseneececeeececenaeeeceeeseeqeaeeeceeeeeseeeeaeeessananeeeeeeess 264 9 2 11 Direction reversal vivian e a add id dia atada 265 212 UNI SWItChOVE Reciclado lada ab ida Rt datos 266 9 2 13 Derating behavior at increased pulse frequenCy oooooccccnnoniccnnnocnccnnonnnccnnoncnnnno nc nr nano rca rra anar 268 9 3 Extended fUNCIONS pidio dass 270 9 3 1 Technology controllers cocida a ti id T eee 270 9 3 2 Bypass UNC atada daa 273 9 3 2 1 Bypass with synchronizer with degree of overlapping P1260 1 nncconncccnnnncccccnnonccccnoncccnnnns 274 9 3 2 2 Bypass with synchronizer without degree of overlapping p1260 2 assesseer 276 9 3 2 3 Bypass without synchronizer P1260 B ooonccccninnncccinnnoccccnnnncccnnnonncnnnn rn cnn narran rr 278 9 3 2 4 Function dla AM ad dd 279 9 3 2 Paramotor adi asa 280 9 3 3 Extended brake controlorii aiani iaa nara dada 281 9 3 4 Extended Monitoring TUNCHONS seske e EE 283 9 4 Monitoring and protective functions sesers nia ERE E ATEEN ERREA 285
180. commissioning tool supports complex drive system operations If you are confronted with any system conditions in online mode that are beyond your control you are advised to delete the drive project from the project navigator and carefully create a new project in STARTER using the appropriate configuration data for your application 5 3 4 Connection via serial interface Requirement Settings Inverter chassis units In addition to using the PROFIBUS connection data can also be exchanged via a serial interface The PC from which the connection is to be made must be equipped with a serial interface COM 1 In STARTER choose Project gt Set PC PG interface and select the serial cable PPI interface If this is not available from the dropdown list you first have to add it by choosing Select Note If the interface cannot be added to the selection menu the driver for the serial interface has to be installed This is located under the following path on the STARTER CD installation starter starter Disk1 SerialCable_PPI STARTER must not be active while the driver is being installed Make the following settings The 0 address and the transmission rate of 19 2 kbit s are important here Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 115 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Set PG PC Interface Access Path Access Point of the Application S7ONLINE STEP gt Serial
181. ct for which cyclic data is to be exchanged The project must be saved and compiled once all of the drive objects have been inserted Double click the drive unit A dialog containing the properties of the IO device is displayed Check the IP address assignment via controller box for volatile assignment of the IP address for the configured lO controller and IO device during power up The configured device name must match the device name of the IO device Configuration in HW Config is now complete Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 191 Operation 6 7 PROFINET IO RT communications with Device OM Introduction If the full version of STEP 7 V5 4 is installed on the engineering station PC Device OM is installed with STARTER setup SIMOTION SCOUT also includes Device OM The full version of STEP 7 is required unless SCOUT stand alone is installed in which case an OEM version of STEP 7 is supplied enabling you to process SIMOTION projects SCOUT contains STARTER which can be used for commissioning drives This means that SINAMICS drives can also be configured with the SIMATIC CPU and PROFINET Device OM allows drive objects to be configured in a user friendly manner the drive objects automatically include routing information Note In older firmware versions of SIMATIC controllers e g CPU317 PN DP lt V2 4 the GSD files for the drives must still be used SIMATIC CPU with SINAMICS drives and PRO
182. ction only for vector control Description If for closed loop speed control with encoder the speed threshold set in p1744 for stall detection is exceeded then r1408 11 speed adaptation speed deviation is set If the fault threshold value set in p1745 is exceeded when in the low speed range less than p1755 x p1756 r1408 12 motor stalled is set If one of the two signals is set then after the delay time in p2178 fault F7902 motor stalled is output Speed threshold stall detection speed control with encoder only 0 00 210 000 00 1 min p1744 100 00 Speed adaptation speed deviation Stall monitoring gt Motor stalled Motor stalled EY EJE F7902 p2178 0 010 0 000 1 000 s p1745 5 0 ON delay 0 0 Error threshold stall detection Figure 9 17 Stall protection Function diagram FD 6730 Current control FD 8012 Messages and monitoring Torque messages motor blocked stalled Parameters e 11408 CO BO Control status word 3 e p1744 Motor model speed threshold stall detection e p1745 Motor model error threshold stall detection e p1755 Motor model changeover speed encoderless operation e p1756 Motor model changeover speed hysteresis e p2178 Delay time motor stalled Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 289 Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 4 Monitoring and protective functions 9 4 5 Description Thermal motor protect
183. ctual value 7 frei SC 4 Diz AO 1 gt ND 5 AO 1C ihg av M2 Temp 52 Gn po 59 p I X541 aL 24v atthe 2 2 Ready to power up OF 24v Dupo 8 NO a j ree a eA 24V icc lt i 0 e al T DI DO 10 E JO ee Ll 3 15 Ext alarm Le ori 24V pwo 11 35 he i 5 0 EH 24 V giil 24V x542 11 Do 0 ee l 13 Enable pulses ne Pp o O 4 y apotshy No fault i I L JO APA AS If necessary the command source can be switched using the LOCAL REMOTE key on the AOP30 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 5 Setpoint sources 6 5 Setpoint sources 6 5 1 Analog inputs Description The customer terminal block TM31 features two analog inputs for specifying setpoints for current or voltage signals In the factory setting analog input O terminal X521 1 2 is used as a voltage input in the range 0 10 V Prerequisites e The TM31 has been correctly installed e The default setting for analog inputs was chosen during commissioning e STARTER TM31 terminals e AOP30 2 TM31 terminals v E 5 0 pons pis p p vV 5 1 mpo Smoothing p Offset p4053 p4063 act U I r4052 Current value r4055 only when p4056 3 p4058 F3505 Analog input wire breakage Figure 6 17 Signal flow diagram analog input 0 Scaling Function diagram FD 9566 TM31 analog input O Al 0 FD 9568 TM31 analog input 1 Al 1
184. d TM31 9 2 8 4 Maximum output frequency achieved by increasing the pulse frequency Maximum output frequencies achieved by increasing the pulse frequency By multiplying the basis pulse frequency with integers the following output frequencies can be achieved taking into account the derating factors Table 9 4 Maximum output frequency achieved by increasing the pulse frequency Pulse frequency Maximum output frequency kHz Hz 1 25 100 2 160 25 200 4 300 1 5 300 1 1 The maximum output frequency is limited to 300 Hz due to the closed loop control 9 2 8 5 Parameters e p0009 e p0112 e p01 13 e p01 15 e p1800 e p4099 262 Device commissioning parameter filter Sampling times pre setting p0115 Selects the minimum pulse frequency Sampling times Pulse frequency TM31 inputs outputs sampling time Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 2 Drive functions 9 2 9 Runtime operating hours counter Total system runtime The total system runtime is displayed in p2114 Control Unit Index 0 indicates the system runtime in milliseconds after reaching 86 400 000 ms 24 hours the value is reset Index 1 indicates the system runtime in days The value is saved when the system is switched off Once the drive unit has been switched on the counter continues to run with the value that was saved the last time the dr
185. d always have the same sub network mask as the IO controller The can be consecutively assigned from the IP address of the lO controller The IP address can be changed manually if necessary and is saved in a volatile fashion If the IP address is to be stored in a non volatile memory the address must be assigned using the Primary Setup Tool PST This can also be carried out in HWConfig in STEP 7 where the function is called Edit Ethernet node Note If the network is part of an existing Ethernet company network obtain the information from your network administrator IP address sub network mask and a router that is possibly being used When it is shipped an lO device does not have a device name An IO device can only be addressed by an IO controller for example for the transfer of project engineering data including the IP address during startup or for user data exchange in cyclic operation after it has been assigned a device name with the lO supervisor Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 7 PROFINET IO Replacing Control Unit CU320 IO Device If the IP address and device name are stored in a non volatile memory this data is also forwarded with the memory card CF card of the Control Unit If an lO device must be completely replaced due to a device or module defect the Control Unit automatically assigns parameters and configures the new device or module Following
186. d capability see Overload capability Derating data 1 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s 2 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s 3 Maximum output frequency at factory set default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output frequency see Functions monitoring and protective functions Increasing the output frequency for information on derating data see 4 The types of protection specified here are mandatory for installing a UL approved system 358 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Technical specifications Table 12 12 Power Module 500 V 600 V 3 AC part 2 12 3 Technical specifications Category Unit Order number 6SL3310 1GF33 3AA0 1GF34 1AA0 1GF34 7AA0 Rated motor output At 500 V 50 Hz kW 200 250 315 At 575 V 60 Hz hp 300 400 450 Rated input voltage V 500 V to 600 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 343 426 483 Rated output current A 330 410 465 Base load current IL A 320 400 452 Base load current IH 2 A 280 367 416 Max output frequency 3 Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 4 9 6 4 7 3 Max current requirements at 24 A 0 9 1 1 V DC Cooling air requirement m s 0 36 0 78 0 78 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A
187. d ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 337 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Replacing the fan right hand power block La E ss Co AH ae 5 eet Figure 11 17 Replacing the fan frame size HX right hand power block Inverter chassis units 338 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Description The average service life of the device fans is 50 000 hours In practice however the service life depends on other variables e g ambient temperature degree of cabinet protection etc and therefore may deviate from this value The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the chassis unit is available Preparatory steps e Disconnect the chassis unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access e Remove the protective cover Removal The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with the diagram 1 Remove the copper bar 12 screws 2 Remove the retaining screws for the fan 3 screws 3 Disconnect the supply cables 1 x L 1 x N You can now carefully remove the fan CAUTION When removing the fan ensure that you
188. d from the drive converter so that energy is not fed back to the fault location Function diagram FP 6721 Current control Id setpoint PEM p0300 2 FP 6724 Current control field weakening controller PEM p0300 2 FP 6731 Current control interface to motor module PEM p0300 2 230 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Output terminals 8 1 Chapter content This chapter provides information on e Analog outputs e Digital outputs Diagnostics Faults alarms Monitoring Functions Protective anA Function diagrams To supplement these operating instructions the CD contains simplified function diagrams describing the operating principle The diagrams are arranged in accordance with the chapters in the operating instructions The page numbers 8xx describe the functionality in the following chapter At certain points in this chapter reference is made to function diagrams with a 4 digit number These are stored on the CD in the SINAMICS G List Manual which provides experienced users with detailed descriptions of all the functions Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 231 Output terminals 8 2 TM31 analog outputs 8 2 TM31 analog outputs Description The TM31 terminal block module features two analog outputs for outputting setpoints via current or voltage signals Factory setting e AOO Actual speed value 0 10 V e AOf1 Actual motor curren
189. data motor cable resistance IGBT on state voltage and compensation for the IGBT lockout time can only be estimated if the data on the type plate is used For this reason the stator resistance for the stability of sensorless vector control or for the voltage boost with the V f characteristic is very important Motor identification is essential if long supply cables or third party motors are used When motor data identification is started for the first time the following data is determined with p1910 1 on the basis of the data on the type plate rated data e Equivalent circuit diagram data e Total resistance of Power cable resistance Reabie and Stator resistance Rs e IGBT on state voltage compensation for the IGBT lockout time Since the type plate data provides the initialization values for identification you must ensure that it is entered correctly and consistently taking into account the connection type star delta so that the above data can be determined If the resistance of the motor supply cable is known you are advised to enter this value before the standstill measurement P0352 so that it can be subtracted from the total measured resistance when the stator resistance p0350 is calculated Entering the cable resistance improves the accuracy of thermal resistance adaptation particularly when long supply cables are used This governs behavior at low speeds particularly during encoderless vector control Invert
190. des support with planning and design and offers a range of training courses For detailed contact information and the current link to our Internet pages see Service and Support Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 21 Device overview 2 5 Wiring principle 2 5 Wiring principle Wiring principle for SINAMICS G130 Main circuit breaker Fuses Main contactor Line reactor Line supply connection Rectifier Voltage DC link Braking Module Power Module Inverter Motor connection optional components Figure 2 3 Wiring principle for SINAMICS G130 Inverter chassis units 22 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Device overview 2 6 Type plate Specifications on the type plate SINAMICS 6130 input SAC Eingang Output 3AC Ausgang Temperatura Range Temperaturbereich Degree of pratection Schutzart Order number Bastailnummaz Serial Number Fabrik Nummer Varsion Version Figure 2 4 SIEMENS AC DRIVE FREQUENZUMRICHTER 380 480 V 775 A 0 480 V 75 A 0 400 IP00 Duty Class Bel Klasse Cooling method K hlart Weight Gewicht 1P 68L3310 1GE37 5AA0 UA 00080000 0000 O 5 T S52249230014345 gt Month of manufacture TN Made in EU Germany Date of manufacture The date of manufacture can be determined as follows Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 0
191. digital inputs Table 4 22 Terminal block X530 Terminal Designation Technical specifications 1 DI 4 Voltage 3 V to 30 V 2 DI5 Current input typical 10 mA up to 24 V 3 DI6 With electrical isolation The reference potential is terminal M2 4 DI7 Level 5 M2 High signal level 15 V to 30 V 6 M Low signal level 3 V to 5 V 1 DI digital input M2 ground reference M Electronics ground Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm AWG 14 Note An open input is interpreted as low To enable the digital inputs to work terminal M2 must be connected The following options are available 1 The provided ground reference of the digital inputs or 2 a jumper to terminal M notice this removes isolation for these digital inputs X521 2 analog inputs differential inputs Table 4 23 Terminal block X521 Terminal Designation Technical specifications 1 Al 0 10 V 10 V Ri 70 KQ factory setting 2 Al 0 4 mA 20 mA 3 Al 1 20 mA 20 mA Ri 250 Q 4 Al 1 0 mA 20 mA 5 P10 10 V 1 Imax 5 mA 6 M Reference potential for Al 0 7 N10 10 V 1 Imax 5 mA 8 M Reference potential for Al 1 1 Al analog input P10 N10 auxiliary voltage M Ground reference Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm AWG 14 CAUTION The input current of the analog inputs must not exceed 35 mA when current measurements are performed
192. do not damage any signal cables Installation For re installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current carrying parts must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 339 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components 11 4 12 Replacing the fan frame size JX Replacing the fan left hand power block oe yi ont NS Figure 11 18 Replacing the fan frame size JX left hand power block Inverter chassis units 340 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Description The average service life of the device fans is 50 000 hours In practice however the service life depends on other variables e g ambient temperature degree of cabinet protection etc and therefore may deviate from this value The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the chassis unit is available Preparatory steps e Disconnect the chassis unit from
193. e Example With a reference speed of 1500 1 min a fixed speed of 80 corresponds to a value of 1200 1 min Ifthe reference speed is changed to 3000 1 min the value of 80 is retained and is now 2400 1 min Restrictions e Values are rounded to decimal places in the context of unit changeover This can mean that the original value might change by up to one decimal place e If areferenced form is selected and the reference parameters e g p2000 are changed retrospectively the referenced value of some of the control parameters will also be adjusted to ensure that the control response is unaffected e Changing the reference variables p2000 to p2007 in the STARTER in offline mode can cause parameter value limit violations leading in turn to error messages when the values are loaded to the drive unit Inverter chassis units 266 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Functions monitoring and protective functions Changing over the units 9 2 Drive functions The units can be changed over via AOP30 and via the STARTER e Unit changeover via AOP30 is always undertaken immediately Once the corresponding parameters have been changed the values affected are displayed in the new selected unit e If operating using the STARTER the unit changeover can only take place in offline mode in the configuration screen of the corresponding drive object The new units are only displayed after the download Load proj
194. e BO r0899 4 coasting active OFF2 0 Coasting active OFF2 An OFF2 command is present 5 0 Fast stop active OFF3 1 No OFF3 active BO r0899 5 0 Coasting active OFF3 An OFF3 command is present 6 Power on disable 1 Power on disable BO r0899 6 A restart is only possible through OFF1 followed by ON O No power up inhibit Power up is possible 7 Alarm present 1 Alarm present BO r2139 7 The drive is operational again No acknowledgement necessary The active alarms are stored in the alarm buffer O No alarm present No active alarm is present in the alarm buffer 8 Speed setpoint actual value 1 Setpoint actual value monitoring within tolerance bandwidth BO r2197 7 deviation within tolerance Actual value within tolerance band dynamic overshoot or bandwidth shortfall permitted for t lt tmax tmax can be parameterized See FP8010 0 Setpoint actual value monitoring not within tolerance band 9 Control requested for PLC 1 Control from the PLC BO r0899 9 1 is always present O Local operation 10 forncomparison value reached 1 f orn comparison value reached or exceeded BO r2199 1 or exceeded O f or n comparison value not reached Note The message is parameterized as follows p2141 Threshold value p2142 Hysteresis 11 lL M or P limit not reached 1 1 MorP limit not reached BO r1407 7 l M or P limit reached 0 I M orP limit reached 12 Reserved 13 Alarm motor overtemperature 1 Motor overtemperature al
195. e No Yes 03 Fault drive converter power electronics No Yes 04 Overtemperature drive converter No Yes 05 Ground fault No Yes 06 Motor overload No Yes 07 Bus error No Yes 08 External safety trip No Yes 09 Fault motor encoder No Yes 10 Error internal communications No Yes 11 Fault infeed No Yes 15 Other faults errors No Yes Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 6 PROFIBUS Actual torque value M_Act M_Act_SMOOTH e Actual torque value with 16 bit resolution incl sign bit e Bit 15 determines the actual value sign Bit 0 gt positive actual value Bit 1 gt negative actual value e The actual torque value is normalized via parameter p2003 M_act 4000 hex or 16384 dec torque in p2003 Actual power value P_Act P_Act_SMOOTH e Actual power value with 16 bit resolution incl sign bit e Bit 15 determines the actual value sign Bit 0 gt positive actual value Bit 1 gt negative actual value e The actual power value is normalized via parameter p2004 P_act 4000 hex or 16384 dec power in p2004 Alarm code WARN_CODE The number of the current alarm and the last alarm to occur are output here Decimal notation is used i e value 7910 dec A07910 motor overtemperature Fault code FAULT_CODE The number of the oldest fault still active is output here Decimal notation is used i e value 7860 dec F07860 external fault 1 I
196. e On permanently DRIVE CLIQ communication is being established Red On permanently At least one fault is pending on this component Note LED is driven irrespective of the corresponding messages being reconfigured Green red 0 5 Hz flashing Firmware is being downloaded light 2 Hz flashing Firmware download is complete Waiting for POWER ON light Green orange 2 Hz flashing Detection of the components via LED is activated p0144 or light Note red orange Both options depend on the LED status when module recognition is activated via p0144 1 OUT gt 5V_ OFF Electronics power supply missing or outside permissible tolerance range Measuring system supply lt 5 V only when ready to operate Orange On permanently Electronics power supply for measuring system present Measuring system supply gt 5 V Notice You must ensure that the connected encoder can be operated with a 24 V supply Operating an encoder designed for a 5 V supply with a 24 V supply can damage the encoder electronics beyond repair Inverter chassis units 298 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Diagnosis faults and alarms 10 2 Diagnosis 10 2 2 Diagnostics via parameters All Objects key diagnostic parameters details in List Manual Parameters Name Description r0945 Fault code Displays the fault number Index 0 is the most recent fault last fault to have occurred r0948 Fault time received in millisec
197. e actual current smoothed Displays the smoothed actual value of the current Actual torque smoothed Displays the smoothed actual torque r0035 Motor temperature If r0035 does not equal 200 0 C the following applies e This temperature indicator is valid e AnKTY sensor is connected e f using an asynchronous motor the thermal motor model is activated p0600 0 or p0601 0 If r0035 equals 200 0 C the following applies e This temperature indicator is invalid temperature sensor fault e AnPTC sensor is connected If using a synchronous motor the thermal motor model is activated p0600 0 or p0601 0 10037 10046 Power Module temperatures Displays the measured temperatures in the Power Module Missing drive enable signals Displays missing enable signals that are preventing the closed loop drive control from being commissioned r0049 Motor encoder data set effective MDS EDS Displays the effective motor data set MDS and the effective encoder data sets EDS r0050 r0051 Command data set effective CDS Displays the effective command data set CDS Drive data set DDS effective 300 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Diagnosis faults and alarms 10 2 Diagnosis Name Effective drive data set DDS display r0206 Rated power module power Displays the rated power module power for various
198. e cross section 1 5 mm Relay outputs two way contacts Max load current 8A Max switching voltage 250 V AC 30 V DC Max switching power 2000 VA at 250 V AC Max switching power at 30 V DC Required minimum current 240 W ohmic load 100 mA Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 367 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications Max connectable cross section 2 5 mm2 Power loss lt 10W PE connection On housing with M4 screw Width 50 mm Height 150 mm Depth 119 mm Weight approx 0 87 kg 12 3 4 SMC30 Sensor Module Table 12 21 Technical specifications SMC30 Electronics power supply Voltage 24 V DC 20 4 28 8 Current max 0 6 A Max ambient temperature up to an altitude of 2000 m 55 C Note As of an altitude of 2000 m the max ambient temperature decreases by 7 C every 1000 m PE ground connection On housing with M4 1 8 Nm screw Weight 0 8 kg Inverter chassis units 368 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Appendix A 1 List of abbreviations A A AC Al AO AOP B Bl BICO BO Cc C CAN CB CDS CI COM CU D DC DDS DI DI DO DO E ESD EMC EN FAQ FW Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Alarm Alternating current Analog input Analog output Advanced operator panel with plain text display Binector inpu
199. e digital inputs 10747 Status of digital outputs CU Display of the CU digital output status This parameter shows the status of the digital inputs under the influence of simulation mode of the digital inputs 12054 Profibus status Displays the status of the Profibus interface Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 299 Diagnosis faults and alarms 10 2 Diagnosis Name TO9760 71 System load Displays the system load The individual values computation load and cyclic load are measured over short time slices from these values the maximum the minimum and the average value are generated and displayed in the appropriate indices Further the degree of memory utilization of the data and program memory is displayed Vector key diagnostic parameters details in List Manual Parameters r0002 Name Description Operating display The value provides information about the current operating status and the conditions necessary to reach the next status r0020 r0021 Speed setpoint smoothed Displays the actual smoothed speed velocity setpoint at the input of the speed velocity controller or V f characteristic after the interpolator Actual speed smoothed Displays the smoothed actual value of the motor speed velocity r0026 DC link voltage smoothed Displays the smoothed actual value of the DC link r0027 r0031 Absolut
200. e eyes and be connected to ground The cable also has a concentric flexible braided copper shield To comply with EN55011 regarding radio interference suppression the shield must contact at both ends and with the greatest possible surface area On the motor side cable glands that contact the shield with the greatest possible surface area are recommended for the terminal boxes Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 49 Electrical installation 4 7 Power connections 4 7 2 Connecting the motor and power cables Connecting the motor and power cables on the Power Module 1 If necessary remove the covers or front covers in front of the connection panel for motor cables terminals U2 T1 V2 T2 W2 T3 X2 and power cables terminals U1 L1 V1 L2 W1 L3 X1 2 Screw the protective earth PE into the appropriate terminal with earth symbol 50 Nm for M12 at the points provided in the cabinet 3 Connect the motor cables to the terminals Make sure that you connect the conductors in the correct sequence U2 T1 V2 T2 W2 T3 and U1 L1 V1 L2 W1 L3 CAUTION Tighten the screws with the appropriate torque 50 Nm for M12 otherwise the terminal contacts could be destroyed by burning during operation Note The motor ground must be fed back directly to the Power Module and connected Direction of motor rotation 50 With induction machines with a clockwise phase seque
201. e g pump and fan applications For p1580 100 the flux in the motor under no load operating conditions is reduced to half of the setpoint reference flux p1570 2 As soon as load is connected to the drive the setpoint reference flux increases linearly with the load and reaching the setpoint set in p1570 at approx r0077 r0331 x p1570 In the field weakening range the final value is reduced by the actual degree of field weakening The smoothing time p1582 should be set to approx 100 to 200 ms Flux differentiation see also p1401 1 is automatically deactivated internally following magnetization Function diagram FP 6722 Field weakening characteristic ld setpoint ASM p0300 1 FP 6723 Field weakening control flux control for induction motor p0300 1 Parameters e 10077 Current setpoints torque generating e 10331 Motor magnetizing current short circuit current actual e p1570 Flux setpoint e p1580 Efficiency optimization Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 245 Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 2 Drive functions 9 2 3 Vdc control Description The Vdc control function can be activated using the appropriate measures if an overvoltage or undervoltage is present in the DC link e Overvoltage in the DC link Typical cause The drive is operating in regenerative mode and is supplying too much energy to the DC link Remedy Reduce the reg
202. e position identification No flying restart is carried out for V f control and sensorless closed loop vector control Commissioning Simulation is activated using p1272 1 the following pre requisites must be fulfilled e The drive unit must have been commissioned for the first time default Standard induction motors e The DC link voltage must lie below 40 V observe the tolerance of the DC link voltage sensing Alarm A07825 simulation mode activated must be output during simulation operation Parameters e p1272 Simulation operation Inverter chassis units 264 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 2 Drive functions 9 2 11 Direction reversal Description Function diagram Parameters Inverter chassis units The direction of rotation of the motor can be reversed using direction reversal via p1821 without having to change the motor rotating field by interchanging two phases on the motor and inverting the encoder signals using p0410 Reversal via p1821 can be detected from the motor direction of rotation The speed setpoint and actual value torque setpoint and actual value remain unchanged as does the relative position change A pulse inhibit must be set prior to attempting reversal Reversing can be set differently for each drive data set Note When changing over the drive data set to differently set reversing and with pulse approval fault
203. e power supply e Allow unimpeded access e Remove the protective cover Removal steps The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with the diagram 1 Remove the CU320 mounts 1 screw and 2 nuts If necessary remove the PROFIBUS plug and connection to the operator panel X140 on the CU320 and remove the CU320 2 Disconnect the plugs for the fiber optic cables and signal cables 5 plugs 3 Remove the DRIVE CLiQ cables and connections to the CU320 5 plugs 4 Remove the retaining screws for the slide in electronics unit 2 screws When removing the slide in electronics unit you have to disconnect 5 further plugs one after the other 2 at the top 3 below CAUTION When removing the fan ensure that you do not damage any signal cables The Control Interface Board can then be removed from the slide in electronics unit CAUTION When removing the connector of the ribbon cable make sure that you actuate the locking lever on the connector very carefully e g with a screwdriver because otherwise the lock could be damaged Installation For re installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current conducting parts must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure When dealing with connectors with a lock make sure that
204. e project wizard To commission the following drives e Commissioning of a MICROMASTER 4th generation drive Project ss dl Press F1 to open Help display Offline mode Figure 5 2 Main screen of the STARTER parameterization and commissioning tool 1 Close the STARTER Getting Started Drive Commissioning screen by choosing HTML Help gt Close Note When you deactivate the Display Wizard during start checkbox the project Wizard is no longer displayed the next time you start STARTER You can call up the project Wizard by choosing Projec gt New with Wizard To deactivate the online help for Getting Started follow the instructions provided in Help You can call up the online help at any time by choosing Help gt Getting Started STARTER features a detailed online help function Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 83 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER The STARTER project Wizard Project Wizard Starter Create new project Introduction Summary 2 i PG PC Set Insert drive interface units Figure 5 3 Arrange drive units offline Aessssssesesssesesssescvscssssssosssssscsssssnssenssscsecseees e Find drive units online Open existing project offline IV Display Wizard during start Cancel STARTER project Wizard 2 Click Arrange drive units offline in the STARTER project Wizard Project Wizard Starte
205. e remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described Since variance cannot be precluded entirely we cannot guarantee full consistency However the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions Siemens AG A5E00331449A Copyright O Siemens AG 2007 Automation and Drives 09 2007 Technical data subject to change Postfach 48 48 90327 NURNBERG GERMANY Preface User documentation NWARNING Before installing and commissioning the converter make sure that you read all the safety notes and warnings carefully including all the warning labels on the components The warning labels must always be legible Missing or damaged labels must be replaced Further information is available from Technical support e Tel 49 0 180 50 50 222 e Fax 49 0 180 50 50 223 e Internet http www siemens de automation support request Internet address Information about SINAMICS can be found on the Internet at the following address http www siemens com sinamics Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Preface Inverter chassis units 6 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A
206. e simulation mode can only be activated under an actual DC link voltage of 40 V If the voltage lies above this threshold the simulation mode is reset and a fault message F07826 is issued Communications with a higher level automation system can be tested using the simulation mode If the drive is also to return actual values note that it must be switched over to encoderless operation during simulation mode This means that large parts of the SINAMICS software e g software channel sequence control communications technology function etc can be tested in advance without requiring a motor Another application is to test the correct functioning of the Power Module Especially for drive units with higher power ratings 75 kW 690 V and 110 kW 400 V after repairs it is necessary to test the gating of the power semiconductors This is done by injecting a low DC voltage as DC link voltage e g 12 V The drive unit is then powered up and the pulses enabled It must be possible to run through all of the pulse patterns of the gating unit software This means that the software must allow the pulses to be switched in and various frequencies approached If a speed encoder is not being used then this is generally implemented using V f control or sensorless closed loop speed control Note The following functions are de activated in the simulation mode e Motor data identification e Motor data identification rotating without encoder e Pol
207. e starting initial value of the motorized potentiometer is set to the last actual value that was present when the drive unit was powered down Prerequisites The default setting for the motorized potentiometer was chosen during commissioning e STARTER Motorized potentiometer e AOP30 3 Motorized potentiometer Signal flow diagram MOP raise Ramp up time Ramp down time p1047 p1048 MOP lower MOP nsetnRFG 11050 x Motorized potentioA p1038 meter implemente via internal Figure 6 18 Signal flow diagram Motorized potentiometer Function diagram FD 3020 Motorized potentiometer Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 157 Operation 6 5 Setpoint sources Parameters e p1030 e p1037 e p1038 e p1047 e p1048 e r1050 Motorized potentiometer configuration Motorized potentiometer maximum speed Motorized potentiometer minimum speed Motorized potentiometer ramp up time Motorized potentiometer ramp down time Motorized potentiometer setpoint after the ramp function generator 6 5 3 Fixed speed setpoints Description Three variable fixed speed setpoints are available They can be selected via terminals or PROFIBUS Prerequisites The default setting for the fixed speed setpoints was chosen during commissioning e STARTER e AOP30 Signal flow diagram Fixed speed setpoint 01 1001 Fixed speed setpoint 02 1002 Fixed speed setpoint 03 1003
208. ect in target system and subsequent upload Load project in PG Unit groups Each parameter which can be changed over is assigned to a unit group which can be changed over within certain limits depending on the group This assignment and the units groups for each parameter appear in the parameter list in the SINAMICS Parameter Manual 4 parameters p0100 p0349 p0505 and p0595 are available for changing over the units groups individually Parameters e p0010 e p0100 e p0349 e p0505 e p0595 e p0596 e p2000 e p2001 e p2002 e p2003 e p2004 e p2005 e p2007 Inverter chassis units Commissioning parameter filter IEC NEMA mot stds Selection of units system motor equivalent circuit diagram data Selection of units system Selection of technological unit Reference variable of technological unit Reference frequency speed Reference voltage Reference current Reference torque Reference power Reference angle Reference acceleration Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 267 Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 2 Drive functions 9 2 13 Derating behavior at increased pulse frequency Description To reduce motor noise or to increase output frequency the pulse frequency can be increased relative to the factory setting The increase in the pulse frequency normally results in a reduction of the maximum output current see Technical data current derating depending on the pulse frequency
209. ective fUNCtIONS ccocconnocccccncconannncancnnnnnnnnnacnnononcncnananononnnnnnnnnnn mennene 237 9 1 Chapter contentent tia idad ii 237 9 2 Drive functions cuca ii A dd id da idee es 239 9 2 1 Motor identification and automatic speed controller optimization ooooococcnnnnnnicnnnnnnnnnaconoccnnnn 239 SALL gt Standstill measurement da dae 240 9 2 1 2 Rotating measurement and speed controller OptiMizZatiOM oooooooocccnnnninincocccnnnnnnncconccncnnncnnnnnnos 243 9 2 2 EffiGl6NGy OptMIZAtiOM ss az es st aceea senate dag cateesdagtedends a doesatieadevashed R 245 9 2 3 Vde control cocina A a hanes AA read ade teed eel Ped Sears 246 9 2 4 Automatic restart TUNCHON nres anisi dd Ad ia 250 9 2 5 Flying TESTA aiii 253 9 2 5 1 Flying restart without entodat sir iuran innnan iaai conan cnc naar rca rra rr 254 925 2 Flying restart with encoder ci alan 255 9 2 5 3 Parametros A A id dd 255 9 2 6 Motor changeover selectiOn moocini taa 256 9261 UDeSChiPUON A ii tilda 256 9 2 6 2 Example of changing over between two MOtOTS ooooocccocinoccccconoccccnanccnnnnnoncnn nano cnn rana rca r nana nc 256 9 2 6 3 FUNCION dla Msi ca 257 9 2 6 4 Parameters ii A A A a A E A ad 258 9 2 7 Friction characteriStic CUIVE 1d ies 258 9 2 8 Increasing the Output frequency resecie te dieu EEE EEEE iE EE EA 260 928 1 Descriptor att A ERAS cae sea ee ee eed 260 9 2 8 2 Default pulse frequencies cccccccececseceeceeceeeeeseccaeceeeeeeeceeaeee
210. ed upper e p1464 Speed controller adaptation speed lower e p1465 Speed controller adaptation speed upper e p1466 Speed controller P gain scaling Dynamic response reduction field weakening encoderless VC only e p1400 0 Speed control configuration Automatic Kp Tn adaptation active Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder 7 4 3 4 Droop Function Description Requirement Inverter chassis units Droop enabled via p1492 ensures that the speed setpoint is reduced proportionally as the load torque increases The droop function has a torque limiting effect on a drive that is mechanically coupled to a different speed e g guide roller on a goods train In this way a very effective load distribution can also be realized in connection with the torque setpoint of a leading speed controlled drive In contrast to torque control or load distribution with overriding and limitation when using an the appropriate setting such a load distribution controls even a smooth mechanical connection or the case of slipping This method is only suitable to a limited extent for drives that are accelerated and braked with significant changes in speed The droop feedback is used for example in applications in which two or more motors are connected mechanically or operate with a common shaft and fulfill the above requirements I
211. eed 1 Skip frequency speed 4 p1091 Skip frequency speed 2 Skip frequency speed 3 p1094 p1092 p1093 Minimum speed p1080 Setp_after_limit r1114 nsetp_afterMinLim r1112 Minimum limit Bandwidth p1101 Figure 7 1 Signal flow diagram Skip frequency speeds and minimum speeds Function diagram FP 3050 Skip frequency bands and speed limiting Inverter chassis units 200 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 2 Setpoint channel Parameters e p1080 Minimum speed e p1091 Skip frequency speed 1 e p1092 Skip frequency speed 2 e p1093 Skip frequency speed 3 e p1094 Skip frequency speed 4 e p1101 Skip frequency speed bandwidth e 11112 Speed setpoint after minimum limiting 7 2 4 Speed limitation Description Speed limitation aims to limit the maximum permissible speed of the entire drive train to protect the drive and load machine process against damage caused by excessive speeds Signal flow diagram Speed limit positive nsetp_afterMinLim p1083 Setp_before_RFG 1112 1119 NYU Speed limit negative p1086 Figure 7 2 Signal flow diagram Speed limitation Function diagram FP 3050 Suppression bandwidth and speed limiting Parameters e p1082 Maximum speed e p1083 Speed limit in positive direction of rotation e p1086 Speed limit in negative direction of rotation Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 201 S
212. eed hysteresis p1758 Motor model changeover delay time closed open loop control p1759 Motor model changeover delay time open closed loop control Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 213 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder 7 4 2 Vector control with encoder Description Benefits of vector control with an encoder e The speed can be controlled right down to 0 Hz standstill e Stable control response throughout the entire speed range e Allows a defined and or variable torque for speeds below approx 10 of the rated motor speed to be maintained e Compared with speed control without an encoder the dynamic response of drives with an encoder is significantly better because the speed is measured directly and integrated in the model created for the current components Motor model change Function diagram 214 A model change takes place between the current model and the observer model within the speed range p1752 x 100 p1756 and p1752 In the current model range i e at lower speeds torque accuracy depends on whether thermal tracking of the rotor resistance is carried out correctly In the observer model range and at speeds of less than approx 20 of the rated speed torque accuracy depends primarily on whether thermal tracking of the stator resistance is carried out correctly If the resistance of the supply cable is greater than 20 to 30 of the total re
213. elegrams are sent cyclically in a deterministic cycle Isochronous Real Time In so doing the telegrams are exchanged in a bandwidth reserved by the hardware One IRT time interval and one standard Ethernet time interval are created for each cycle IRTtop In addition to the bandwidth reservation the telegram traffic can be further optimized by configuring the topology This enhances the performance during data exchange and the deterministic behavior The IRT time interval can thus be further optimized or minimized compared with IRTflex In addition to the isochronous data transfer with IRT even the application position control cycle IPO cycle can be synchronized in the devices This is an essential requirement for closed loop axis control and synchronization via the bus Table 6 17 Comparison between RT IRTflex and IRTtop RT class Transfer mode RT Switching based on the MAC address prioritization of the RT telegram possible using Ethernet Prio VLAN tag IRTflex Switching using the MAC address bandwidth reservation by reserving an IRTflex interval in which only IRTflex frames are transferred but for example no TCP IP frames IRTtop Path based switching using a topology based planning no transmission of TCP IP frames in the IRTtop interval MinDevicelnterval Typically 2 8 msec Typically 1 msec Fully deterministic also for 250 usec Isochronous application Yes Start time of
214. emperature A7910 13 r2129 14 Reserved 14 0 Alarm thermal overload in power unit A5000 15 r2129 15 1 Pulses enabled inverter is clocking drive is carrying current r0899 11 1 n_act lt p2155 r2197 1 1 n_act gt p2155 r2197 2 1 Ramp up ramp down completed r2199 5 1 n_act lt p2161 preferably as n_min or n 0 message r2199 0 1 Torque setpoint lt p2174 r2198 10 1 LOCAL mode active control via operator panel r0807 0 0 Motor blocked r2198 6 236 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 1 Chapter content This chapter provides information on e Drive functions Motor identification Vdc control automatic restart flying restart motor changeover friction characteristic increase in the output frequency runtime simulation operation direction reversal unit changeover e Extended functions Technology controller bypass function extended brake control extended monitoring functions e Monitoring and protective functions Power unit protection thermal monitoring functions and overload responses blocking protection stall protection thermal motor protection Monitoring Functions Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 237 Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 1 Chapter content Function diagrams To supplement these operating instructions the CD contains simplified f
215. en the machines are used in non industrial areas the installation location must be protected against unauthorized access protective fencing appropriate signs Those responsible for protecting the plant must ensure the following e The basic planning work for the plant and the transport assembly installation commissioning maintenance and repair work is carried out by qualified personnel and or checked by experts responsible e The operating manual and machine documentation are always available e The technical specifications regarding the applicable installation connection environmental and operating conditions are always observed e The plant specific assembly and safety guidelines are observed and personal protection equipment is used e Unqualified personnel are forbidden from using these machines and working near them This operating manual is intended for qualified personnel and only contain information and notes relating to the intended purpose of the machines The operating manual and machine documentation are written in different languages as specified in the delivery contracts Note We recommend engaging the support and services of your local Siemens service center for all planning installation commissioning and maintenance work Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Safety information 1 3 Components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge ESD 1
216. enerative torque to maintain the DC link voltage within permissible limits Note When switching off or during rapid load changes if failure often arises and fault F30002 DC link overvoltage is reported you may be able to improve the situation by increasing the gain factor for the Vdc controller p1250 p1290 e g from 1 00 to 2 00 e Undervoltage in the DC link Typical cause Failure of the supply voltage or supply for the DC link Remedy Specify a regenerative torque for the rotating drive to compensate the existing losses thereby stabilizing the voltage in the DC link This process is known as kinetic buffering Kinetic buffering is only possible as long as energy is generated by the movement of the drive Characteristics e Vdc control This comprises Vdc_max control and Vdc_min control kinetic buffering which are independent of each other It contains a joint Pl controller The dynamic factor is used to set Vdc_min and Vdc_max control independently of each other e Vdc_min control kinetic buffering With this function the kinetic energy of the motor is used for buffering the DC link voltage in the event of a momentary power failure thereby delaying the drive e Vdc_max Regelung This function can be used to control a momentary regenerative load without shutdown with overvoltage in DC link Vdc_max control is only recommended for a supply without active closed loop control for the DC li
217. eparate window in STARTER e Separate fault alarm system e Separate PROF idrive telegram for process data Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 135 Operation 6 3 Basic information about the drive system Optionally installed drive objects e Option board evaluation A further drive object handles evaluation of an installed option board The specific method of operation depends on the type of option board installed e Terminal Module evaluation A separate drive object handles evaluation of the respective optional Terminal Modules Configuring drive objects Parameters 136 When you commission the system for the first time using the STARTER tool you will use configuration parameters to set up the software based drive objects which are processed on the Control Unit Various drive objects can be created within a Control Unit The drive objects are configurable function blocks and are used to execute specific drive functions If you need to configure additional drive objects or delete existing ones after initial commissioning the drive system must be switched to configuration mode The parameters of a drive object cannot be accessed until the drive object has been configured and you have switched from configuration mode to parameterization mode Note Each installed drive object is allocated a number between 0 and 63 during initial commissioning for unique identification e p0101 D
218. eplacement 326 Frame size HX replacement 328 Frame size JX replace 330 Control Unit CU320 35 57 Control via PROFIBUS 160 Control word 1 164 165 CU320 57 383 Index D Data sets 137 Data Sets 137 Date of manufacture 23 DCNS 51 DCPS 51 DCPS DCNS connection for a dV dt filter with Voltage Peak Limiter 51 DDS Copy 141 DDS drive data set 138 Derating 349 Derating behavior at increased pulse frequency 268 Derating data 349 Current derating as a function of the pulse frequency 351 Current derating as a function of the site altitude and ambient temperature 349 Voltage derating as a function of the site altitude 350 Diagnosis 294 LEDs 295 Parameters 299 Digital inputs 68 69 Digital inputs outputs 58 59 71 Digital outputs 235 Dimension drawings Control Unit CU320 35 SMC30 Sensor Module 38 TM31 Terminal Module 37 Direction of rotation changeover 199 Direction reversal 265 Drive data set 138 Drive Data Set 138 Drive objects 135 DRIVE CLIQ interface 58 67 DRIVE CLiQ wiring diagram 54 Droop Function 223 E EC declaration of conformity 13 EC manufacturer s declaration 13 EDS encoder data set 139 Efficiency optimization 245 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC compliant design 43 Introduction 41 Noise emissions 41 Operational reliability and noise immunity 41 Electronics power supply 59 68 384 Encoder data set 139 Encoder Data Set 139 Ethernet interface
219. er chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Functions monitoring and protective functions Inverter chassis units 9 2 Drive functions Frequency Cable and Motor converter series inductance p1825 p1828 p0352 M p0353 M p0350 M pO356 M p0358 M p0354 M L series Figure 9 1 Equivalent circuit diagram for induction motor and cable If an output filter see p0230 or series inductance p0353 is used its data must also be entered before the standstill measurement is carried out The inductance value is then subtracted from the total measured value of the leakage With sine wave filters only the stator resistance valve threshold voltage and valve interlocking time are measured Note Leakage values in excess of 35 to 40 of the rated motor impedance will restrict the dynamic response of speed and current control in the voltage limit range and in field weakening operation Note Standstill measurement must be carried out when the motor is cold In p0625 enter the estimated ambient temperature of the motor during the measurement with KTY sensor set p0600 p0601 and read r0035 This is the reference point for the thermal motor model and thermal Rs Rr adaptation In addition to the equivalent circuit diagram data motor data identification p1910 3 can be used for induction motors to determine the magnetization characteristic of the motor Due to the higher accuracy the magnetiza
220. ernet gt Intel R PROV PC Adapter uto PC Adapter MPI PC Adapter PROFIBUS lt ill Parameter assignment of your PC adapter for a PROFIBUS network Interfaces Add Remove Figure 5 6 Setting the interface Select Note To parameterize the interface you must install an appropriate interface card e g PC adapter PROFIBUS Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Properties PC Adapter PROFIBUS PROFIBUS Local Connection Station Parameters IV PG PC is the only master on the bus Address 0 Timeout Network Parameters Transmission rate Highest station address Profile Standard Universal DP FMS User Defined Bus Parameters Default Cancel Help Figure 5 7 Setting the interface properties NOTICE You must activate PG PC is the only master on bus if no other master PC S7 etc is available on the bus Note Projects can be created and PROFIBUS addresses for the drive objects assigned even if a PROFIBUS interface has not been installed on the PC To prevent bus addresses from being assigned more than once only the bus addresses available in the project are proposed 6 Once you have done this click OK to confirm the settings and return to the project Wizard Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A
221. erter chassis units 65 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Electrical installation 4 10 Signal connections M 5 x500 X501 TM31 Terminal Module Ir X524 g g Q Q hele mia ARE x521 G t Alo 11 ae EM lt CSL E N2 M C Eo m e y ALO T NO S Al 1 l SL F N2 E 5 l RT OQ ak N10 1 29 M X520 X522 SE pio AO el O nnd wv Fi sH n1 A00 2 E ao oct E a oE DI 3 ao v AQ il Y gt M1 ao 1 Hg E oHm Aao 10 Q l Temp E JO X540 Temp 1E 5a y A SEL 24 21 24 1 X541 SC 31 24V p gt 1 JO s leav Di Do 8 123 IE 24v DIIDO 9 4H 2 oc Lac po 10 143 AEA 24V pino 11 y oo o ie T N I X530 1 X542 LCN EN m N 944 ns gt 2 Q Soars Ee Hy fe E OCH n7 mrj DA v i rie 5 O o O S l M OQ Figure 4 14 Connection overview of TM31 Terminal Module 66 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Electrical installation 4 10 Signal connections Note The diagram of the Terminal Module sh
222. es A command data set contains the following examples e Binector inputs for control commands digital signals ON OFF enable signals p0844 etc Jog p1055 etc e Connector inputs for setpoints analog signals Voltage setpoint for V f control p1330 Torque limits and scaling factors p1522 p1523 p1528 p1529 Two command data sets are available The following parameters are available for selecting command data sets and for displaying the currently selected command data set Table 6 1 Command data set selection and display Select bit 0 Display CDS p08 10 selected r0836 active r0050 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 If a command data set which does not exist is selected the current data set remains active 137 Operation 6 3 Basic information about the drive system CDS 01 pano 0 r0836 0 10836 1 CDS selected 0 1 gt CDS effective ro0s0 0 Figure 6 4 Example Switching between command data set 0 and 1 DDS Drive data set 138 A drive data set contains various adjustable parameters that are relevant with respect to open and closed loop drive control e Numbers of the assigned motor and encoder data sets p0186 assigned motor data set MDS p0187 to p0189 up to 3 assigned encoder data sets EDS e Various control parameters e g Fixed speed setpoints p1001 to p1015 Speed limits min max p1080 p1082 Characteristic
223. es Telegrams to send and receive process data are available for each drive object of a drive unit with cyclic process data exchange In addition to cyclic data transfer acyclic services can also be used for parameterizing and configuring the drive These acyclic services can be used by the supervisor or the controller Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 185 Operation 6 7 PROFINET IO The total length of the Ethernet frame increases with the number of drive objects in a drive unit Sequence of drive objects in the data transfer The sequence of drive objects is displayed via a list in p0978 0 15 where it can also be changed Note The sequence of drive objects in HW Config must be the same as that in the drive p0978 NOTICE A ring type topology is not permissible 6 7 4 Hardware setup 6 7 4 1 Configuring SINAMICS drives with PROFINET Communication Board Ethernet CBE20 The CBE20 option board is inserted in the option slot of the CU320 The CBE20 is equipped with four ports that can be used to connect the PROFINET sub network Step 7 routing with CBE20 The CBE20 does not support STEP 7 routing between PROFIBUS and PROFINET IO Connecting the supervisor You can go online with the STARTER in a number of ways which are illustrated below Inverter chassis units 186 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 7 PROFINET IO
224. et contains various adjustable parameters describing the connected encoder for the purpose of configuring the drive e Adjustable parameters e g Encoder interface component number p0141 Encoder component number p0142 Encoder type selection p0400 The parameters that are grouped together in the encoder data set are identified in the SINAMICS parameter list by Data Set EDS and are assigned an index 0 n A separate encoder data set is required for each encoder controlled by the Control Unit Up to 3 encoder data sets are assigned to a drive data set via parameters p0187 p0188 and p0189 An encoder data set can only be changed using a DDS changeover Each encoder may only be assigned to one drive and within a drive must in each drive data set either always be encoder 1 always encoder 2 or always encoder 3 One application for the EDS changeover would be a power component with which several motors are operated in turn A contactor circuit is used to changeover between these motors Each of the motors can be equipped with an encoder or be operated without an encoder sensorless Each encoder must be connected to its own SMx If encoder 1 90187 is changed over via DDS then an MDS must also be changed over One drive object can manage up to 16 encoder data sets The number of encoder data sets configured is specified in p0140 When a drive data set is selected the assigned encoder data sets are selected auto
225. etpoint channel and closed loop control 7 2 Setpoint channel 7 2 5 Description Ramp function generator The ramp function generator limits the rate at which the setpoint changes when the drive is accelerating or decelerating This prevents excessive setpoint step changes from damaging the drive train Additional rounding times can also be set in the lower and upper speed ranges to improve control quality and prevent load surges thereby protecting mechanical components such as shafts and couplings The ramp up and ramp down times each refer to the maximum speed p1082 The rounding times that can be set can prevent the actual speed value from being overshot when the setpoint is approached thereby improving control quality Notice if rounding times are too long this can cause the setpoint to be overshot if the setpoint is reduced abruptly during ramp up Rounding is also effective in the zero crossover in other words when the direction is reversed the ramp function generator output is reduced to zero via initial rounding the ramp down time and final rounding before the new inverted setpoint is approached via start rounding the ramp up time and end rounding Rounding times that can be set separately are active in the event of a fast stop OFF3 The actual ramp up ramp down times increase with active rounding The rounding type can be set using p1134 and separately activated deactivated using p1151 00 in the zero passage S
226. external events over a defined period Determinism means that a system responds in a predictable manner deterministically In industrial networks both of these requirements are important PROFINET meets these requirements PROFINET is implemented as a deterministic real time network as follows e Transmission of time critical data takes place at guaranteed time intervals To achieve this PROFINET provides an optimized communication channel for real time communication Real Time RT e An exact prediction of the time at which the data transfer takes place is possible e Problem free communication using other standard protocols is guaranteed within the same network Definition Isochronous real time communication IRT Isochronous Real Time Ethernet Real time properties of PROFINET IO where IRT telegrams are transmitted deterministically via planned communication paths in a defined sequence to achieve the best possible synchronism and performance This is also known as time scheduled communications whereby knowledge about the network structure is utilized IRT requires special network components that support planned data transfer When the transfer procedure is implemented in the ERTEC ASICs Enhanced Real Time Ethernet Controller this results in cycle times of at least 500 us and a jitter accuracy of less than 1 ys e g 1 ms cycle Reserved range gt Minimum width Cyclic scheduled Spontaneous communication commu
227. factor of the output current as a function of the pulse frequency for units with a rated pulse frequency of 1 25 kHz Order number Power Output current Derating factor Derating factor 6SL3310 kW at 1 25 kHz A at 2 5 kHz at 5 kHz Supply voltage 380 480 V 3 AC 1GE36 1AA0 315 605 72 60 1GE37 5AA0 400 745 72 60 1GE38 4AA0 450 840 79 60 1GE41 0AAO 560 985 87 60 Supply voltage 500 600 V 3 AC 1GF31 8AA0 110 175 87 60 1GF32 2AA0 132 215 87 60 1GF32 6AA0 160 260 88 60 1GF33 3AA0 200 330 82 55 1GF34 1AA0 250 410 82 55 1GF34 7AA0 315 465 87 55 1GF35 8AA0 400 575 85 55 1GF37 4AA0 500 735 79 55 1GF38 1AA0 560 810 72 55 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 351 Technical specifications 12 2 General specifications Order number Power Output current Derating factor Derating factor 6SL3310 kW at 1 25 kHz A at 2 5 kHz at 5 kHz Supply voltage 660 690 V 3 AC 1GH28 5AA0 75 85 89 60 1GH31 0AA0 90 100 88 60 1GH31 2AA0 110 120 88 60 1GH31 5AA0 132 150 84 55 1GH31 8AA0 160 175 87 60 1GH32 2AA0 200 215 87 60 1GH32 6AA0 250 260 88 60 1GH33 3AA0 315 330 82 55 1GH34 1AA0 400 410 82 55 1GH34 7AA0 450 465 87 55 1GH35 8AA0 560 575 85 55 1GH37 4AA0 710 735 79 55 1GH38 1AA0 800 810 72 55 For pulse frequencies in the range between
228. fficiently large bandwidth portion is available for the parallel transmission of IT services on the same line PROFINET IO telegrams have priority over IT telegrams in accordance with IEEE802 1q This ensures the required determinism in the automation technology Communication is possibly only within a network subnet The refresh time is in the range 1 ms 2 ms and 4 ms The real refresh time depends on the bus load the devices used and the quality structure of the I O data The refresh time is a multiple of the send clock 6 7 5 3 Configuring RT communication on Simatic RT communications with GSDML v1 0 Requirement 190 For example a Simatic 300 CPU version lt 2 5 is configured with a PROFINET sub network and a drive is inserted via the GSD file SINAMICS 120 CBE20 Pilot RT Now drives and drive objects DOs are to be parameterized For this version of the drive the telegrams must be inserted step by step To start a Parameter Access Point must be inserted then a telegram and then again another Parameter Access Point and so on Note The sequence in which the telegram is created must be the same as the sequence of the drive objects in the configuration screen for the drive in STARTER Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation Procedure 6 7 PROFINET IO Select the inserted drive in the hardware catalog Drag the Parameter Access Point entry to slot 1 in the station
229. from the setpoint channel and its actual value r0063 either directly from the speed actual value encoder vector control with encoder or indirectly via the motor model encoderless vector control The system difference is increased by the PI controller and in conjunction with the pre control results in the torque setpoint When the load torque increases the speed setpoint is reduced proportionately when the droop function is active which means that the single drive within a group two or more mechanically connected motors is relieved when the torque becomes too great Droop injection Closed loop speed control Speed setpoint Torque setpoint r0063 Actual speed value only active if pre control is active p1496 gt 0 Figure 7 10 Speed controller The optimum speed controller setting can be determined via the automatic speed controller optimization function p1900 1 rotating measurement If the moment of inertia has been specified the speed controller Kp Tn can be calculated by means of automatic parameterization p0340 4 The controller parameters are defined in accordance with the symmetrical optimum as follows Tn 4xTs Kp 0 5 x r0345 Ts 2 x r0345 Tn Ts Sum of the short delay times includes p1442 and p1452 215 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder Function diagram Parameters 216 If v
230. g for braking operation a Braking Module can also be installed in the DC link of the converter A slot is provided in the Power Module for this purpose The Power Module creates an output voltage with variable amplitude and frequency from a supply voltage with constant amplitude and frequency AN CAUTION The ventilation clearances above below and in front of the Power Module which are specified in the dimension drawings must be observed If these clearances are not observed this can result in a thermal overload of the Power Module Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 29 Mechanical installation 3 4 Power Module 3 4 1 Dimension drawings Dimension drawing frame size FX Table 3 1 Dimension drawing frame size FX Front view Side view DECIA A Y MAA Inverter chassis units 30 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Mechanical installation 3 4 Power Module Dimension drawing frame size GX Table 3 2 Dimension drawing frame size GX Front view Side view SA Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 31 Mechanical installation 3 4 Power Module Dimension drawing frame size HX Table 3 3 Dimension drawing frame size HX Side view Rear view Inverter chassis units 32 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Mechanical installation
231. g Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 7 PROFINET IO Note Drive objects without PZD do not transfer process data and are used for example to transfer parameters 6 7 5 4 PROFINET IO with IRT Overview Overview PROFINET IO with IRT is characterized by separate time domains for IRT RT and TCP IP communication This is safeguarded by high precision hardware based cycle monitoring IRT TCP IP IRT TCP IP IRT TCP IP component component component component component component Send clock interval Send clock interval gt _ Send clock interval gt e g 1 ms position controller cycle Isochronous TCP IP communication communication I O data a Figure 6 34 IRT Communication Overview PROFINET IO with IRT is available in two versions e IRTflex flexible with fixed bandwidth reservation e IRTtop top performance with planned IRT communication Time synchronization and isochronous mode on PROFINET IO with IRTflex and IRTtop In addition a high performance and isochronous connection to the application with low load on the application CPU is also ensured Isochronous data transfer with cycle times well below one millisecond and with a deviation in the cycle start jitter of less than a microsecond provide sufficient performance reserves for demanding motion control applications In contrast to standard Ethernet and PROFINET IO wit
232. g Parameters via AOP30 128 Permanent magnet synchronous motors 228 Power block Crane lifting lugs 309 Frame size FX replace 312 Frame size GX replacement 314 Frame size HX replacement 316 Frame size JX replace 320 Power connections 49 Connecting the motor and power cables 50 Preparation Mechanical installation 28 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Principles Command data set CDS 137 Copy motor data set MDS 141 Copying the command data set CDS 141 Copying the drive data set DDS 141 Drive data set DDS 138 Encoder data set EDS 139 Interconnecting signals 143 Motor data set MDS 140 PROFIBUS Address switches 61 Bus terminating resistor 61 Connectors 60 PROFIBUS connection 60 PROFINET IO 182 Addresses 184 Device OM 192 GSDML V1 0 190 GSDML v2 0 191 IRT 193 IRTflex 194 IRTtop 195 RT 190 RT and IRT 182 RT classes 188 Protecting power components 285 Protective functions 285 Q Quality 20 R Ramp function generator 202 Reference model 220 Relay outputs 72 Removing the noise suppression capacitor 53 Replacement Automatic firmware update 345 Control Interface Board frame size FX 324 Control Interface Board frame size GX 326 Control Interface Board frame size HX 328 Control Interface Board frame size JX 330 Crane lifting lugs 309 Error messages 345 Fan frame size FX 332 Fan frame size GX 334 Fan frame size HX 33
233. guidelines cabinet assembly e Connect painted or anodized metal components using toothed self locking screws or remove the insulating layer e Use unpainted de oiled mounting plates e Establish a central connection between ground and the protective conductor system ground Shield gaps e Bridge shield gaps at terminals circuit breakers contactors and so on with minimum impedance and the greatest possible surface area Using large cross sections e Use underground and grounding cables with large cross sections or better still with litz wires or flexible cables Laying the motor supply cable separately e The distance between the motor supply cable and signal cable should be gt 20 cm Do not lay power cables and motor supply cables in parallel to each other Securing the potential to ground between modules with widely differing interference potential e Lay an equalizing cable parallel to the control cable the cable cross section must be at least 16 mm e Ifrelays contactors and inductive or capacitive loads are connected the switching relays or contactors must be provided with anti interference elements Cable installation e Cables that are subject to or sensitive to interference should be laid as far apart from each other as possible e Noise immunity increases when the cables are laid close to the ground potential For this reason you are advised to lay these cables in corners and at ground potential
234. h RT the telegrams for PROFINET IO with IRT are transmitted based on a schedule Sync domain The sync domain can be configured in HW Config SINAMICS S120 is an lO device and has to be assigned to a sync master as a sync slave Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 193 Operation 6 7 PROFINET IO 6 7 5 5 Description Send clock Compatibility 194 PROFINET IO with IRTflex For PROFINET IO with IRTflex the largest IRT bandwidth requirement of a device plus a reserve for the complete network is reserved It is not defined when which telegram in the IRT time window over which port will be transferred 1 2 3 4 Bus cycle Device Full duplex Device SS ALLLILSLLL S SSS VISIIIIIID Device SSS SASS E LLLILLLLL LL A perry SLLLSLSS S Reserved bandwidth Required bandwidth Figure 6 35 Overview of communication with IRTflex As for PROFINET IO with IRTtop the synchronization of all devices on a shared Sync master is necessary All synchronized devices combined form a sync domain A send clock of 0 5 ms planned as of FW2 5 SP1 1 0 ms 2 0 ms and 4 0 ms can be selected A sync domain can only contain either IRTtop devices or IRTflex devices The communication between and through different sync domains over PROFINET RT is possible If no topology is configured it is not necessary to observe a topology whe
235. he weighting factor p1496 For p1496 100 pre control is calculated according to the motor and load moment of inertia p0341 p0342 A balancing filter is used automatically to prevent the speed controller acting against the injected torque setpoint The time constant of the balancing filter corresponds to the equivalent delay time of the speed control loop Speed controller pre control is correctly set p1496 100 calibration using p0342 if the component of the speed controller r1482 does not change while ramping up or ramping down in the range n gt 20 x p0310 Thus pre control allows a new speed setpoint to be approached without overshoot prerequisite torque limiting does switch in and the moment of inertia remains constant If the speed controller is pre controlled by means of injection the speed setpoint r0062 is delayed with the same smoothing time p1442 or p1452 as the actual value r1445 This ensures that no target actual difference r0064 occurs at the controller input during acceleration which would be attributable solely to the signal propagation time When speed pre control is activated the speed setpoint must be specified continuously or without a higher interference level avoids sudden torque changes An appropriate signal can be generated by smoothing the speed setpoint or activating ramp function generator rounding p1130 p1131 Inverter chassis units 218 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A
236. he required cooling capacity cannot be provided because the fan rotates too slowly e The fan fuses may blow due to an overcurrent Table 4 5 Supply voltage assignments for setting the fan transformer 380 V 480 V 3 AC Supply voltage Fan transformer tap 380 V 10 380 V 400 V 10 400 V 440 V 10 440 V 480 V 10 480 V Table 4 6 Supply voltage assignments for setting the fan transformer 500 V 600 V 3 AC Supply voltage Fan transformer tap 500 V 10 500 V 525 V 10 525 V 575 V 10 575 V 600 V 10 600 V Table 4 7 Supply voltage assignments for setting the fan transformer 660 V 690 V 3 AC Supply voltage Fan transformer tap 660 V 10 660 V 690 V 10 690 V Inverter chassis units 52 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Electrical installation 4 8 External 24 V DC supply 4 7 5 Removing the connection bracket for the interference suppression capacitor with operation from an ungrounded supply If the built in unit is operated from a non grounded supply IT system the connection bracket for the noise suppression capacitor of the Power Module must be removed For the position of the connection bracket see the Connection overview section NWARNING Failing to remove the connection bracket for the noise suppression capacitor on a non grounded system IT system can cause significant damage to the built in unit
237. hese parameters are used to display internal variables Example current motor current bere Parameters Sees read r write read p BICO output Normal read BICO input Normal parameters read write parameters Figure 6 1 Parameter types All these drive parameters can be read and changed via PROFIBUS using the mechanisms defined in the PROF Idrive profile Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 133 Operation 6 3 Basic information about the drive system Parameter categories The parameters for the individual drive objects see Drive objects are categorized according to data sets as follows see Operation data sets e Data set independent parameters These parameters exist only once per drive object e Data set dependent parameters These parameters can exist several times for each drive object and can be addressed via the parameter index for reading and writing A distinction is made between various types of data set CDS Command data set By parameterizing several command data sets and switching between them the drive can be operated with different pre configured signal sources DDS Drive Data Set The drive data set contains the parameters for switching between different drive control configurations The CDS and DDS can be switched over during normal operation Further types of data set also exist however these can only be activated indirectly by means of a DDS swi
238. ibrations occur with these settings the speed controller gain Kp will need to be reduced manually Actual speed value smoothing can also be increased standard procedure for gearless or high frequency torsion vibrations and the controller calculation performed again because this value is also used to calculate Kp and Tn The following relationships apply for optimization e Increasing Kp will speed up the controller and reduce overshoot However signal ripples and vibrations in the speed control loop will increase e Although reducing Tn will also speed up the controller it will increase overshoot When setting speed control manually you are advised to define the dynamic response via Kp and actual speed value smoothing first so that the integral time can subsequently be reduced as much as possible Please remember that closed loop control must also remain stable in the field weakening range To suppress any vibrations that occur in the speed controller it is usually only necessary to increase the smoothing time in p1452 for operation without an encoder or p1442 for operation with an encoder or reduce the controller gain The integral output of the speed controller can be monitored via r1482 and the limited controller output via r1508 torque setpoint Note In comparison with speed control with an encoder the dynamic response of drives without an encoder is significantly reduced The actual speed is derived by means of a mode
239. ical power consumption 10 mA at 24 V DC Level incl ripple 10 DI DO 14 High level 15 V to 30 V 11 DI DO 15 Low level 3 V to 5 V 12 M Terminal numbers 8 10 and 11 are fast inputs Signal propagation times for inputs fast inputs L gt H approx 50 us 5 us H gt L approx 100 us 50 us e As output Voltage 24 V DC Max load current per output 500 mA continued short circuit proof 1 DI digital input DI DO Bidirectional digital input output M Electronic ground M2 Ground reference Max connectable cross section 0 5 mm X124 Electronics power supply Table 4 14 Terminal block X124 Terminal Function Technical specifications Electronics power supply Voltage 24 V DC 20 4 V 28 8 V Electronics power supply Current consumption max 0 8 A without load L M Electronic ground Max current via jumper in connector 20 A at 55 C M Electronic ground Max connectable cross section 2 5 mm AWG 12 Note The two and M terminals are jumpered in the connector This ensures that the supply voltage is looped through The power can be supplied via terminals X41 1 2 on the Power Module Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 59 Electrical installation 4 10 Signal connections X126 PROFIBUS connection The PROFIBUS is connected by means of a 9 pin S
240. ignal flow diagram RFG t_ramp up RFG T_StartRdg RFG T_EndRdg RFG t_ramp down 0 00 999999 00 s 0 00 30 00 s 0 00 30 00 s 0 00 999999 00 s p1120 10 00 p1130 0 00 p1131 0 00 p1121 10 00 nsetp_after_RFG r1150 Setp_before_RFG r1119 Figure 7 3 Signal flow diagram Ramp function generator Function diagram 202 FP 3060 Simple ramp function generator FP 3060 Extended ramp function generator Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Setpoint channel and closed loop control Parameters e 1119 e p1120 e p1121 e p1130 e p1131 e p1134 e p1135 e p1136 e p1137 e 11150 e p1151 7 2 Setpoint channel Ramp function generator setpoint at the input Ramp function generator ramp up time Ramp function generator ramp down time Ramp function generator initial rounding time Ramp function generator final rounding time Ramp function generator rounding type OFF3 ramp down time OFF3 initial rounding time OFF3 final rounding time Ramp function generator speed setpoint at the output Ramp function generator configuration Note The effective ramp up time increases when you enter initial and final rounding times Effective ramp up time p1120 0 5 x p1130 0 5 x p1131 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 203 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 3 V f control 7 3 V f control Description The simplest solution for a control pro
241. iguring the motor and selecting the motor type 13 Under Name choose a name for the motor 14 From the selection box next to Motor type select the appropriate motor for your application Inverter chassis units 98 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Note The steps described below also apply to induction motors When commissioning a permanent magnet synchronous motor there are a few special conditions which are detailed in a separate chapter see Setpoint channel and closed loop control Permanent magnet synchronous motors 15 Click Continue gt Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 99 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Configuring the motor and entering motor data Configuration SINAMICS_G130 Motor data OBDODODO Figure 5 18 Configuring the motor and entering motor data Drive unit Options Control structure Drive setting Motor Motor holding brake Encoder Defaults of the setpoint Drive functions PROFIBUS Important parameters Summary Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 MDS 0 Motor data Induction motor rotary Rated motor voltage Rated motor current Rated motor power Rated motor power factor Rated motor frequency Rated motor speed Motor cooling type The motor data must be entered completely MV Do
242. information 1 3 Components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge ESD Residual risks of power drive systems When carrying out a risk assessment of the machine plant in accordance with the EU Machinery Directive the machine manufacturer plant operator must consider the following residual risks associated with the control and drive components of a power drive system PDS 1 Unintentional movements of driven machine components during commissioning operation maintenance and repairs caused by for example Hardware defects and or software errors in the sensors controllers actuators and connection technology Response times of the controller and drive Operating and or ambient conditions not within the scope of the specification Parameterization programming cabling and installation errors Use of radio devices cellular phones in the immediate vicinity of the controller External influences damage 2 Exceptional temperatures as well as emissions of light noise particles or gas caused by for example Component malfunctions Software errors Operating and or ambient conditions not within the scope of the specification External influences damage 3 Hazardous shock voltages caused by for example Component malfunctions Influence of electrostatic charging Induction of voltages in moving motors Operating and or ambient conditions not within the scope of the specification Condensation conductive contami
243. ing and restoring the operating condition of the device Required tools The following tools are required for replacing components Spanner or socket spanner w f 10 Spanner or socket spanner w f 13 Spanner or socket spanner w f 16 17 Spanner or socket spanner w f 18 19 Hexagon socket spanner size 8 Torque wrench up to 50 Nm Screwdriver size 1 2 Screwdriver Torx T20 Screwdriver Torx T30 Tightening torques for current carrying parts When securing connections for current carrying parts DC link motor connections busbars you must observe the following tightening torques Table 11 141 Tightening torques for connecting current carrying parts Screw Torque M6 6 Nm M8 13 Nm M10 25 Nm M12 50 Nm Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 307 Maintenance and servicing 11 3 Maintenance 11 3 2 Installation device Description The installation device is used for installing and removing the power blocks It is used as an installation aid which is placed in front of and secured to the module The telescopic guide support allows the withdrawable device to be adjusted according to the height at which the power blocks are installed Once the mechanical and electrical connections have been removed the power block can be removed from the module whereby the power block is guided and supported by the guide rails on the withdrawable devices Figure 11 1 Installati
244. inputs Cl for Vector 10001 PROFIdrive Vector speed setpoints p1001 CO Fixed speed setpoint 1 Vector 300 rpm Vector p1002 CO Fixed speed setpoint 2 Vector 600 rpm Vector p1003 CO Fixed speed setpoint 3 Vector 1500 rpm Vector p1083 CO Speed limit in positive direction Vector 6000 rpm Vector of rotation p1086 CO Speed limit in negative Vector 6000 rpm Vector direction of rotation p1115 Ramp function generator selection Vector 1 Extended RFG Vector p1120 Ramp function generator ramp up Vector 20s Vector time p1121 Ramp function generator ramp Vector 30s Vector down time p1135 OFF3 ramp down time Vector 10s Vector p1200 FlyRest oper mode Vector 0 Flying restart not active Vector Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 371 Appendix A 2 Parameter macros Sink Source Parameters Description DO Parameters Description DO p1240 Vdc controller configuration Vector 1 Vdc max controller enabled Vector p1280 Vdc controller configuration V f Vector 1 Vdc max controller enabled Vector p1300 Open loop closed loop control Vector 20 Sensorless speed control Vector operating mode p1911 Number of phases to be identified Vector 3 3 phases Vector p2051 0 Cl PROFIBUS PZD send word Vector r2089 0 STW1 Vector p2051 1 Cl PROFIBUS PZD send word Vector r0063 n act Vector p2051 2 Cl PROFIBUS PZD send word Vecto
245. intenance and servicing 11 7 Upgrading the chassis unit firmware 11 7 Upgrading the chassis unit firmware When you upgrade the built in unit firmware by installing a new CompactFlash Card with a new firmware version for example you might also have to upgrade the firmware for the DRIVE CLiQ components in the built in unit If the system detects that the firmware in the DRIVE CLiQ components needs to be updated it will trigger this process automatically when the automatic firmware update is performed Automatic firmware update sequence 1 346 During an automatic firmware update the RDY LED on the CU320 Control Unit flashes slowly orange 0 5 Hz The firmware update is performed automatically and in sequence on the DRIVE CLiQ components during the update process an LED on the component whose firmware is being updated will flash slowly green red 0 5 Hz Once the firmware update on an individual DRIVE CLiQ component is complete the LED on that component will flash quickly green red 2 Hz Once the firmware update on all components is complete the LED on the CU320 Control Unit will flash quickly orange 2 Hz To complete the automatic firmware update process a POWER ON is required switch the unit off and back on again Note The power supply to the components must not be interrupted while the firmware is being upgraded CAUTION New firmware should only be installed if the
246. ion The priority of thermal motor protection is to identify critical situations If alarm thresholds are exceeded the user can set parameterizable response options p0610 that enable continued operation e g with reduced power and prevent immediate shutdown The signal characteristic is shown in plan 902 Effective protection is also possible without a temperature sensor p4100 0 The temperatures of different motor components stators core rotors can be determined indirectly using a temperature model Connecting temperature sensors KTY84 or PTC100 to the Customer Terminal Block TM31 terminal X522 7 8 allows the motor temperature to be determined directly In this way accurate start temperatures are available immediately when the motor is switched on again or after a power failure Temperature measurement via KTY 290 The device is connected to terminals X522 7 anode and X522 8 cathode on the Customer Terminal Block in the forward direction of the diode The measured temperature is limited to between 48 C and 248 C and is made available for further evaluation Set the KTY temperature sensor type p4100 2 Activate motor temperature measurement via the external sensor p0600 10 When the alarm threshold is reached set via p0604 factory setting 120 C alarm A7910 is triggered Parameter p0610 can be used to set how the drive responds to the alarm triggered 0 No response only alarm no reduction
247. ion must be activated p1200 1 Line supply Converter Protective device Interlock to prevent simultaneous closing Figure 9 13 Example circuit for bypass without synchronization The bypass with synchronizer p1260 3 can be triggered by the following signals p1267 e Bypass by means of control signal p1267 0 1 The bypass can be activated by means of a digital signal p1266 e g from a higher level automation system If the digital signal is canceled a changeover to converter operations is triggered once the debypass delay time 1263 has expired Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Functions monitoring and protective functions Parameterization 9 3 Extended functions e Bypass at speed threshold p1267 1 1 Once a certain speed is reached the system switches to bypass i e the converter is used as a start up converter The bypass cannot be connected until the speed setpoint is greater than the bypass speed threshold p1265 The system reverts to converter mode when the setpoint on the input of the ramp function generator r1119 falls below the bypass speed threshold p1265 The setpoint gt comparison value condition prevents the bypass from being reactivated straight away if the actual speed is still above the bypass speed threshold p1265 after switching back to converter operations The bypass time debypass time bypass speed variables and the command source
248. ion values from higher level closed loop controls This can be implemented using the summing point of the main supplementary setpoint in the setpoint channel Both variables are imported simultaneously via two separate or one setpoint source and added in the setpoint channel Function diagram Parameters 198 FD 3030 Main added setpoint setpoint scaling jogging e p1070 Main setpoint e p1071 Main setpoint scaling e 11073 Main setpoint effective e p1075 Supplementary setpoint e p1076 Supplementary setpoint scaling e 11077 Supplementary setpoint effective e 11078 Total setpoint effective Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 2 Setpoint channel 7 2 2 Direction reversal Description Due to the direction reversal in the setpoint channel the drive can be operated in both directions Use the p110 or p111 parameter to block negative or positive direction of rotation Note If an incorrect rotating field was connected when the cables were installed and the rotating field cannot be corrected by swapping the motor cables it can be corrected when commissioning the drive via p1821 rotating field direction reversal by changing the rotating field and thus enabling a direction reversal see section Direction reversal Prerequisites Direction of rotation changeover is triggered e via PROFIBUS by means of control word 1 bit 11 e via the cabi
249. is Customer terminal block TM31 Table 10 2 Description of the LEDs on the TM31 LED Status Description RDY OFF The electronics power supply is missing or lies outside permissible tolerance range Green On permanently The component is ready to operate and cyclic DRIVE CLIQ communication is taking place Orange On permanently DRIVE CLIQ communication is being established Red On permanently At least one fault is pending on this component Note LED is driven irrespective of the corresponding messages being reconfigured Green red 0 5 Hz flashing Firmware is being downloaded light 2 Hz flashing Firmware download is complete Waiting for POWER ON light Green orange 2 Hz flashing Detection of the components via LED is activated p0154 or light Note red orange Both options depend on the LED status when module recognition is activated via p0154 1 Inverter chassis units 296 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Diagnosis faults and alarms 10 2 Diagnosis Control Interface Board in the Power Module Table 10 3 Description of the LEDs on the Control Interface Board LED state Description H200 H201 Off Off No electronics power supply or electronics power supply is outside permissible tolerance range Green Off The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE CLiQ communication is taking place Orange The component is ready for operation and cyclic DR
250. is active If the drive can no longer generate any regenerative energy because for example it is almost at a standstill the DC link voltage continues to drop If the minimum DC link voltage is undershot see Switching Vdc_min control on off lt 1 gt the drive is switched off with fault F30003 power unit DC link undervoltage If a speed threshold set with parameter p1257 p1297 for active Vdc_min control see Switching Vdc_min control on off lt 2 gt is undershot the drive is shut down with F7405 drive kinetic buffering minimum speed undershot If a shutdown with undervoltage in the DC link F30003 occurs without the drive coming to a standstill despite the fact that Vdc_min control is active the controller may have to be optimized via dynamic factor p1247 p1287 Increasing the dynamic factor in p1247 p1287 causes the controller to intervene more quickly The default setting for this parameter however should be sufficient for most applications Parameter p1256 1 p1296 can be used to activate time monitoring for kinetic buffering The monitoring time can be set in parameter p1255 p1295 If buffering i e the power failure lasts longer than the time set here the drive is switched off with fault F7406 drive kinetic buffering maximum time exceeded The standard fault reaction for this fault is OFF3 which means that this function can be used for controlled drive deceleration in the event of a power failure In thi
251. is triggered when the analog input type p4056 is set to 3 4 20 mA with open circuit monitoring and the input current of 2 mA has been undershot The fault value can be used to determine the analog input in question Table 6 6 Fault screen TM Analog input wire breakage Component number F value 00000003 0x00000003 hex 3 1 TM31 Cause 4 2 TM31 0 Analog input 0 X521 1 2 1 Analog input 1 X521 3 4 TM31 Wire break analog input Remedy TM31 Check analog input cables Back A v F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 Inverter chassis units 156 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 5 Setpoint sources 6 5 2 Motorized potentiometer Description The digital motorized potentiometer enables you to set speeds remotely using switching signals keys It is activated via terminals or PROFIBUS As long as a logical 1 is present at signal input MOP raise setpoint higher the internal numerator integrates the setpoint You can set the integration time time taken for the setpoint to increase using parameter p1047 In the same way you can decrease the setpoint using signal input MOP lower The deceleration ramp can be set using parameter p1048 Configuration parameter p1030 0 1 default setting 0 is used to activate that the actual motorized potentiometer is saved in a non volatile fashion when powering down the drive unit When powering up the drive unit th
252. istors must be switched off at all other connectors The cable shield must be connected at both ends over large surface area contacts First bus node Last bus node gt From previous To next bus node bus node Figure 4 10 Posisition of the bus terminating resistors PROFIBUS address switches Table 4 16 PROFIBUS address switches Switch Significance Technical specifications S1 20 1 Significance 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 2 21 2 E ay ae fon s4 nze Pa lore ie 4 ibe 5 Example Cier by ON OFF S7 26 64 Note The factory settings are ON or OFF for all switches With these two settings the PROFIBUS address is set by parameterization The address switch is behind the blanking plate Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 61 Electrical installation 4 10 Signal connections X140 serial interface RS232 The AOP30 operator panel for operating parameterizing the device can be connected via the serial interface The interface is located on the underside of the Control Unit A standard cable can be used for connecting the AOP30 operator panel to the RS232 interface Table 4 17 Serial interface RS232 X140 Pin Designation Technical specifications 2 RxD Receive data D 3 TxD Transmit data O O Ground Ground reference 90 O on Connector type 9 pin SUB D socket
253. it Parameters e r0036 Power Module overload e 10037 Power Module temperatures e p0290 Power Module overload response e p0294 Power Module alarm with i t overload Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 287 Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 4 Monitoring and protective functions 9 4 3 Block protection Description The error message Motor blocked is only triggered if the speed of the drive is below the variable speed threshold set in p2175 With vector control it must also be ensured that the speed controller is at the limit With V f control the current limit must already have been reached Once the ON delay p2177 has elapsed the message Motor blocked and fault F7900 are generated 0 00 210 000 00 rpm p2175 120 00 n_act 12169 n_act lt p2175 p1300 gt 20 gt Vector controls p1300 lt 20 gt V f characteristics Control mode p1300 Speed controller at limit Motor locked Current limit reached F7900 p2177 1 000 0 000 65 000 s ON delay Figure 9 16 Blocking protection Function diagram FD 8012 Messages and monitoring Torque messages motor blocked stalled Parameters e p2175 Speed threshold motor blocked e p2177 Delay time motor blocked Inverter chassis units 288 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 4 Monitoring and protective functions 9 4 4 Stall prote
254. itching to phase opposition when the drive is being restarted there is a delay while the motor demagnetizes t 2 3 x motor magnetization time constant Once this time has elapsed the inverter is enabled and the motor is supplied with power Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 2 5 Description 9 2 Drive functions Flying restart The Flying restart function enabled via p1200 allows the converter to switch to a motor that is still rotating Switching on the converter without the flying restart function would not allow any flux to build up in the motor while it is rotating Since the motor cannot generate any torque without flux this can cause it to switch off due to overcurrent FO7801 The flying restart function first determines the speed of the drive with which V f or vector control is initialized so that the converter and motor frequency can be synchronized During the standard start up procedure for the converter the motor must be at a standstill The converter then accelerates the motor to the setpoint speed In many cases however the motor is not at a standstill Two different situations are possible here 1 The drive rotates as a result of external influences such as water pump drives or air fan drives In this case the drive can also rotate against the direction of rotation The drive rotates as a result of a previou
255. its Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 109 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Defining the technological application motor identification 110 Configuration SINAMICS_G130 Drive functions Drive unit Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 Options Control structure Drive setting Motor Technological application Pumps and fans 1 Motor data Optional Motor Dat Equivalent Circuit OI A motor identification is recommended at the initial commissioning Calculation of the te ar brake Motor identification Motor data identification at stan ncoder Defaults of the setf a K K K K K K K K K ae PROFIBUS proces Important paramete Summary mA 4 motor data identification is performed once at the drive enable The motor is under current and may turn up to a quarter of a revolution Cancel Help Figure 5 26 Defining the technological application motor identification 36 Select the required data e Technological application Pumps and fans edge modulation is enabled default setting Standard drive VECTOR edge modulation is not enabled e Motor identification In most cases Motor data identification at standstill is the appropriate default setting for SINAMICS G130 37 Click Continue gt Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for c
256. ive was switched off Relative system runtime The relative system runtime since the last POWER ON is displayed in p0969 Control Unit The value is in milliseconds and the counter is reset to 0 after 49 days Actual motor operating hours The motor operating hours counter p0650 drive resumes when the pulses are enabled When the pulse enable is withdrawn the counter is stopped and the value saved To store the value you need a CU320 with order number 6SL3040 OAA1 and version C or higher The counter is deactivated with p0651 0 If the maintenance interval set in p0651 is reached fault FO1590 is triggered Once the motor has been maintained the maintenance interval must be reset Operating hours counter for the fan The operating hours of the fan in the power unit are displayed in p0251 drive The number of hours operated can only be reset to 0 in this parameter e g after a fan has been replaced The service life of the fan is entered in p0252 drive Alarm A30042 is output 500 hours before this figure is reached Monitoring is deactivated with p0252 0 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 263 Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 2 Drive functions 9 2 10 Simulation operation Description The simulation function is predominantly used to simulate the drive without a motor being connected and without a DC link voltage In this case it should be noted that th
257. ization completed Bl Bypass switch feedback signal Bl Bypass switch monitoring time Synchronization e p3800 e p3801 e p3802 e 13803 e 13804 e 13805 e p3806 e 13808 e p3809 e p3811 e 13812 e p3813 e 13814 e p3815 e 13819 280 Sync supply drive activation Sync supply drive drive object number Bl Sync supply drive enable CO BO Sync supply drive control word CO Sync supply drive target frequency CO Sync supply drive frequency difference Sync supply drive frequency difference threshold CO Sync supply drive phase difference Sync supply drive phase setpoint Sync supply drive frequency limitation CO Sync supply drive correction frequency Sync supply drive phase synchronism threshold CO Sync supply drive voltage difference Sync supply drive voltage difference threshold CO BO Sync supply drive status word Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 3 Extended functions 9 3 3 Extended brake control Description Commissioning Function diagram The extended braking control function module allows complex braking control for motor holding brakes and operational brakes The brake is controlled as follows the sequence reflects the priority e Via parameter p1215 e Via binector parameters p1219 0 3 and p0855 e Via zero speed detection e Via a connector interconnection threshold value The extended braking contr
258. k limits via routers However PROFINET IO with IRTtop only runs within a sync domain Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 195 Operation 6 7 PROFINET IO Inverter chassis units 196 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Setpoint channel and closed loop control T 7 1 Chapter content This chapter provides information on the setpoint channel and closed loop control functions e Setpoint channel Direction reversal Skip speed Minimum speed Speed limitation Ramp function generator e V f control e Speed control with without encoder Diagnostics Faults alarms Monitoring Functions Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 197 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 2 Setpoint channel Function diagrams To supplement these operating instructions the CD contains simplified function diagrams describing the operating principle The diagrams are arranged in accordance with the chapters in the operating instructions The page numbers 7xx describe the functionality in the following chapter At certain points in this chapter reference is made to function diagrams with a 4 digit number These are stored on the documentation CD in the SINAMICS G List Manual which provides experienced users with detailed descriptions of all the functions 7 2 Setpoint channel 7 2 1 Setpoint addition Description The supplementary setpoint can be used to enter correct
259. l The motor brake if parameterized is closed immediately Switching on inhibited is activated e OFF3 Switch to speed controlled operation n_set 0 is input immediately to brake the drive along the OFF3 deceleration ramp p1135 When standstill is detected the motor brake if parameterized is closed The pulses are inhibited when the motor brake closing time 91217 has elapsed Standstill is detected when the speed actual value of the speed threshold p1226 is undershot or when the monitoring time p1227 started when speed setpoint lt speed threshold p1226 expires Switching on inhibited is activated Function diagram FP 6060 Parameters e p0341 e p0342 e p1300 e p1499 e p1501 e p1503 e p1511 e p1512 e p1513 e p1514 e 1515 226 Torque setpoint Motor moment of inertia Ratio between the total and motor moment of inertia Open loop closed loop control mode Accelerating for torque control scaling Change over between closed loop speed torque control Torque setpoint Supplementary torque 1 Supplementary torque 1 scaling Supplementary torque 2 Supplementary torque 2 scaling Supplementary torque total Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder 7 4 5 Torque limiting Description Figure 7 17 Torque limiting The value specifies
260. l calculation based on the converter output variables for current and voltage that have a corresponding interference level To this end the actual speed must be adjusted by means of filter algorithms in the software FP 6040 Speed controller e 10062 CO Speed setpoint after the filter e r0063 CO Actual speed value smoothed e p0340 Automatic calculation control parameters e 10345 CO Rated motor startup time e p1442 Speed actual value smoothing time VC e p1452 Speed actual value smoothing time encoderless VC e p1460 Speed controller P gain with encoder e p1462 Speed controller integral time with encoder e p1470 Speed controller encoderless operation P gain e p1472 Speed controller encoderless operation integral time e 11482 CO Torque output speed controller e 11508 CO Torque setpoint before supplementary torque e p1960 Speed controller optimization selection Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder Examples of speed controller settings A few examples of speed controller settings with vector control without encoders p1300 20 are provided below These should not be considered to be generally valid and must be checked in terms of the control response required e Fans large centrifugal masses and pumps Kp p1470 2 10 Tn p1472 250 500 ms The Kp 2 and Tn 500 ms setti
261. l inputs auxiliary contacts The digital inputs for the feedback signal of the motor contactors are assigned p0833 00 and 01 0 0 The drive controls the contactor circuit and pulse suppression Motor changeover sequence 1 Pulse suppression The pulses are suppressed following the selection of a new drive data set using p0820 to p0824 Open motor contactor Motor contactor 1 is opened r0830 0 and the status bit Motor changeover active r0835 0 is set Change over drive data set The requested data set is activated r0051 data set currently effective r0837 requested data set Energize motor contactor After the feedback signal motor contactor opened from motor contactor 1 the appropriate bit of r0830 is set and motor contactor 2 is energized Enable pulses After the feedback signal motor contactor closed from motor contactor 2 the bit motor data set changeover active r0835 0 is reset and the pulses are enabled The motor has now been changed over 9 2 6 3 Function diagram Inverter chassis units FP 8565 FP 8575 Drive Data Set DDS Motor Data Sets MDS Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 257 Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 2 Drive functions 9 2 6 4 Parameters e r0051 Drive data set DDS effective e p0130 Motor data sets MDS number e p0180 Drive data set DDS number e p0186 Motor data sets MDS number e p0819 0
262. l specifications 12 3 3 TM31 Terminal Module Table 12 20 Technical specifications TM31 12 3 Technical specifications Max current requirement at 24 V DC not taking into 0 5A account digital outputs Max connectable cross section 2 5 mm2 Digital inputs Voltage 3 V to 30 V Low level 3Vto5V an open digital input is interpreted as low High level 15 V to 30 V Current consumption at 24 V DC 10 mA Signal propagation times of the digital inputs L gt H 50 us H gt L 100 us Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm Digital outputs continued short circuit proof Voltage 24 V DC Max load current per digital output External internal 24 V supply 100 mA 20 mA Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm2 Analog inputs switching between the voltage and current input via the switch As voltage input Voltage range 10 V to 10 V Internal resistance Ri 70 KQ As current input Current range 4 mA to 20 mA 20 mA to 20 mA 0 mA to 20 mA Internal resistance Ri 250 Q Resolution 12 bits Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm Analog outputs continued short circuit proof Voltage range 10 V to 10 V Max load current 3 mA to 3 mA Current range Max load resistance 4 mA to 20 mA 20 mA to 20 mA 0 mA to 20 mA 500 Q for outputs in the range 20 mA to 20 mA Resolution 12 bits Max connectabl
263. ld up to the device connection but do not connect it again Create a low impedance ground connection for additional cabinets system components and distributed devices with the largest possible cross section at least 16 mm Ground unused lines at one end in the cabinet Choose the greatest possible clearance between the power and signal cables at least 20 cm The greater the distance over which the cables are routed in parallel the greater the clearance must be If a sufficient clearance cannot be maintained you must install additional shields Avoid unnecessarily long cable loops Line supply cables and power supply cables for devices and modules may have to be filtered in the cabinet to reduce incoming or outgoing disturbances To reduce emissions the device is equipped with a radio interference suppression filter as standard in accordance with the limit values defined in category C3 Optional filters which are available on request can be fitted for use in environment 1 category C2 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Electrical installation 4 6 Connection overview 4 6 Connection overview Power Module frame size FX PE1 connection Line connection Type plate Connection bracket for basic noise suppression capacitor Dr Connection for Braking Module Y a Ls e q Lo E Mounting point for CU320 Control Interface Board
264. ling time for the current control circuit remains constant e Reducing the output frequency p0290 0 2 This variant is recommended when you do not need to reduce the pulse frequency or the pulse frequency has already been set to the lowest level The load should also have a characteristic similar to a fan that is a quadratic torque characteristic with falling speed Reducing the output frequency has the effect of significantly reducing the converter output current which in turn reduces losses in the power unit Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 4 Monitoring and protective functions e No reduction p0290 1 You should choose this option if it is neither possible to reduce the pulse frequency nor reduce the output current The converter does not change its operating point once an alarm threshold has been overshot which means that the drive can be operated until it reaches its shutdown values Once it reaches its shutdown threshold the converter switches itself off and the Overtemperature overload fault is output The time until shutdown however is not defined and depends on the degree of overload To ensure that an alarm can be output earlier or that the user can intervene if necessary in the drive process e g reduce load ambient temperature only the alarm threshold can be changed Function diagram FD 8014 Thermal monitoring power un
265. load duty cycles r0207 Rated power module current Displays the rated power module power for various load duty cycles r0208 Rated power module line supply voltage Displays the rated line supply voltage of the power module TM31 key diagnostic parameters details in List Manual Parameters Name Description r0002 TM31 operating display Operating display for terminal board 31 TB31 r4021 Digital inputs actual terminal value Displays the actual value at the digital input terminals on the TM31 This parameter shows the actual value uninfluenced by simulation mode of the digital inputs r4022 Status of digital inputs Displays the status of the digital inputs on the TM31 This parameter shows the status of the digital inputs under the influence of simulation mode of the digital inputs r4047 Status of digital outputs Displays the status of the TM31 digital outputs Inversion via p4048 is taken into account Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 301 Diagnosis faults and alarms 10 2 Diagnosis 10 2 3 Indicating and rectifying faults The device features a wide range of functions that protect the drive against damage if a fault occurs faults and alarms Indicating faults and alarms What is a fault If a fault occurs the drive displays the fault and or alarm on the AOP30 operator panel Faults are indicated by the red
266. lso be acknowledged if this is successful the startup attempt will be resumed The failure of the CU s 24 V power supply will be interpreted as a line supply failure Restart after any fault with additional startup attempts If p1210 6 an automatic restart will be performed after any fault or at p1208 0 1 If the faults occur one after the other then the number of startup attempts is defined using p1211 Monitoring over time can be set using p1213 Startup attempts p1211 and waiting time p1212 p1211 is used to specify the number of startup attempts The number is decremented internally after each successful fault acknowledgement line supply voltage must be restored or the infeed signals that it is ready Fault FO7320 is output when the number of parameterized startup attempts is reached If p1211 x x 1 startup attempts will be made Note A startup attempt starts immediately when the fault occurs The faults are acknowledged automatically at intervals of half the waiting time p1212 Following successful acknowledgement and restoration of the voltage the system is automatically powered up again Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 251 Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 2 Drive functions The startup attempt has been completed successfully once the flying restart and magnetization of the motor induction motor has been completed r00
267. lying restart function is started with the maximum search speed Nsearch max once the de excitation time p0347 has elapsed see diagram Flying restart Nsearch max 1 25 X Nmax p1082 The flying restart function behaves differently with V f control and vector control e V f characteristic p1300 lt 20 The search speed yielded from parameter p1203 reduces the search frequency in accordance with the motor current The parameterizable search current p1202 is injected here If the search frequency is similar to the rotor frequency a current minimum occurs Once the frequency has been found the motor is magnetized The output voltage during the magnetization time p0346 is increased to the voltage value yielded from the V f characteristic see Flying restart e Vector control without encoder The motor speed is determined using the speed adaptation control loop for the electric motor model To begin with the search current p1202 is injected and then the controller is activated starting from the maximum search frequency The dynamic response of the controller can be altered using the search speed factor p1203 If the deviation of the speed adaptation controller is not too great the motor continues to be magnetized for the duration parameterized in p0346 Once the excitation build up time p0346 has elapsed the ramp function generator is set to the actual speed value and the motor ramped up to the current setpoint frequency O
268. m The factor p0342 between the total moment of inertia J and the motor moment of inertia must be determined manually or by optimizing the speed controller Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 217 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder Note When speed controller optimization is carried out the ratio between the total moment of inertia and that of the motor p0342 is determined and acceleration pre control scaling p1496 is set to 100 If p1400 2 p1400 3 0 then the pre control balancing is automatically set Droop injection p1400 2 Acceleration pre control p0341 p0342 11515 Torque setpoint 1538 Speed r1 547 0 r controller Y 2 5 TP p1452 p1470 p1442 p1460 Th p1472 p1462 Actual speed value SLVC Ti VC aes 1 only effective when p1400 2 2 only effective when p1400 2 1 0 Figure 7 11 Speed controller with pre control When correctly adapted when accelerating the speed controller only has to compensate disturbance variables in its control loop This is achieved with a relatively minor controlled variable change at the controller output Speed setpoint changes on the other hand are carried out without involving the speed controller and are therefore achieved more quickly The effect of the pre control variable can be adapted according to the application using t
269. matically Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 139 Operation 6 3 Basic information about the drive system MDS Motor data set A motor data set contains various adjustable parameters describing the connected motor for the purpose of configuring the drive It also contains certain visualization parameters with calculated data e Adjustable parameters e g Motor component number p0131 Motor type selection p0300 Rated motor data p0304 ff e Visualization parameters e g Calculated rated data p0330 ff The parameters that are grouped together in the motor data set are identified in the SINAMICS parameter list by Data Set MDS and are assigned an index 0 n A separate motor data set is required for each motor that is controlled by the Control Unit via a Motor Module The motor data set is assigned to a drive data set via parameter p0186 A motor data set can only be changed using a DDS changeover The motor data set changeover is for example used for e Changing over between different motors e Changing over between different windings in a motor e g star delta changeover e Motor data adaptation If several motors are operated alternately on one Motor Module a corresponding number of drive data sets must be created See Functions Drive functions for additional information and instructions on changing over motors One drive object can manage up to 16 motor data sets The number of moto
270. ments e Either Windows 2000 SP3 or SP4 e or Windows XP SP1 or SP2 e or Windows Server 2003 SP1 e and Internet Explorer V6 0 5 2 1 Installing STARTER STARTER is installed using the setup file on the CD supplied When you double click the Setup file the installation Wizard guides you through the process of installing STARTER Inverter chassis units 80 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Commissioning 5 2 STARTER commissioning tool 5 2 2 The STARTER user interface STARTER features four operating areas EA 5 ma 1 5 fete 13 jujeje Figure 5 1 STARTER operating areas Operating area Explanation 1 Toolbars In this area you can access frequently used functions via the icons 2 Project navigator The elements and projects available in the project are displayed here 3 Working area In this area you can change the settings for the drive units 4 Detail view Detailed information about faults and alarms for example is displayed this area Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 81 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Basic procedure using STARTER 5 3 1 82 STARTER uses a sequence of dialog screens for entering the required drive unit data NOTICE These dialog screens contain default settings which you may have to change according to your application and
271. missioning via STARTER Note Carefully check whether the selected options are connected to your built in unit Since the wizard establishes internal interconnections on the basis of the options selected you cannot change the selected options by clicking lt Back If you make an incorrect entry delete the entire drive unit from the project navigator and create a new one 7 Check your options carefully and then click Continue gt Inverter chassis units 94 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Selecting the control structure Inverter chassis units Configuration SINAMICS_G130 Control structure Drive unit Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 Options Drive setting Function modules Motor TT Technology controller Motor holding brake Extended messages monitoring Encoder Defaults of the setpoin Drive functions Closed loop control Important parameters Setpt Summary p O n M control F control C Yf control Control method Speed control with encoder v Actual speed value preparation Figure 5 15 Selecting the control structure 8 Select the required data e Function modules Technology controller Extended messages monitoring Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 0 95 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER e Control method
272. mmissioning Function diagram Parameters Inverter chassis units 9 2 Drive functions Speeds for making measurements as a function of the maximum speed p1082 are pre assigned in p382x when commissioning the drive system for the first time These can be appropriately changed corresponding to the actual requirements The automatic friction characteristic plot can be activated using p3845 The characteristic is then plotted the next time that it is enabled The following settings are possible e p3845 0 Friction characteristic plot de activated e p3845 1 Friction characteristic plot activated all directions of rotation The friction characteristic is plotted in both directions of rotation The result of the positive and negative measurement is averaged and entered into p383x e p3845 2 Friction characteristic plot activated positive direction of rotation e p3845 3 Friction characteristic plot activated negative direction of rotation DANGER When the friction characteristic is plotted the drive can cause the motor to move As a result the motor may reach maximum speed When commissioning the drive the EMERGENCY STOP functions must function perfectly To protect the machines and personnel the relevant safety regulations must be observed FD 7010 Friction characteristic curve e p3820 Friction characteristic value nO Sc e p3839 Friction characteristic value M9 e 13840 Friction characteristic status e 13
273. mmunication at field level Within the framework of Totally Integrated Automation TIA PROFINET represents a consequent enhancement of e PROFIBUS DP the established field bus and e Industrial Ethernet the communications bus for the cell level Experience gained from both systems was and is being integrated into PROFINET As an Ethernet based automation standard defined by PROFIBUS International PROFIBUS user organization PROFINET is a manufacturer independent communication and engineering model When a CBE20 Communication Board is inserted SINAMICS G130 becomes an lO device in terms of PROFINET With SINAMICS G130 and CBE20 can be used for communication via PROFINET IO with RT Note PROFINET for drive technology is standardized and described in the following document References PROF ldrive Profile Drive Technology PROFINET System Description Order no 6ES7398 8FA10 8AA0 6ES7151 1AA10 8AA0 Real time RT and isochronous real time IRT communication Real time communication 182 If supervisors are involved in communication this can result in excessively long runtimes for the production automation system When communicating time critical IO user data PROFINET therefore uses its own real time channel rather than TCP IP Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 7 PROFINET IO Definition Real Time RT and determinism Real time means that a system processes
274. mpensation Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 205 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 3 V f control Parameter value Meaning Precise frequency drives with flux current control FCC Application property Characteristic see parameter value 1 that takes into account the technological particularity of an application e g textile applications e Whereby current limitation Imax controller only affects the output voltage and not the output frequency e By disabling slip compensation Voltage losses in the stator resistance for static dynamic loads are also compensated flux current control FCC This is particularly useful for small motors since they have a relatively high stator resistance 19 Independent voltage setpoint The user can define the output voltage of the Power Module independently of the frequency using BICO parameter p1330 via the interfaces e g analog input AlO of the TM31 gt p1330 r4055 0 Function diagram Parameter 206 FD 6300 e p1300 V f characteristic and voltage boost Open loop closed loop control operating mode Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 3 1 Description Inverter chassis units 7 3 V F control Voltage boost With low output frequencies the V f characteristics yield only a small output
275. n assembling the devices as opposed to IRTtop where devices must connected one to another according to the configured topology Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 7 PROFINET IO 6 7 5 6 PROFINET IO with IRTtop The performance capability is significantly increased with PROFINET IRTtop for motion control applications A hardware support enables a significant increase in performance compared with the present field bus solutions By planning the telegram traffic in time for IRTtop a considerable data traffic optimization is achieved compared with IRTflex IRTtop is particularly suited for e The control and synchronization of axes via PROFINET e A fast isochronous I O integration with short terminal terminal times For PROFINET IO with IRTtop the synchronization of all devices on a shared Sync master is necessary All synchronized devices combined form a sync domain Send clock Refresh time Within this time all cyclic and acyclic data IRTtop data is transferred The send clock of 500 us planned as of FW2 5 SP1 1 ms 4 ms is the maximum range in which the send clock can be set The actual send clock that can be set depends on various factors e The bus traffic load e The type of devices used e The computing power available in the controller e The supported send clocks on the PROFINET devices involved in a sync domain A typical send clock is for example 1 ms It can be set in
276. n a control range greater than 1 10 Allows a defined and or variable torque for speeds below approx 10 of the rated motor frequency p0310 to be maintained With regard to setpoint input vector control is divided into Speed control Torque current control in short torque control Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 211 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder 7 4 1 Description 212 Vector control without encoder For vector control without encoder only SLVC Sensorless Vector Control the position of the flux and actual speed must be determined via the electric motor model The model is buffered by the incoming currents and voltages At low frequencies approx O Hz the model cannot determine the speed For this reason and due to uncertainties in the model parameters or inaccurate measurements the system is switched from closed loop to open loop operation in this range The changeover between closed loop open loop operation is controlled on the basis of time and frequency conditions 91755 p1756 p1758 only for induction motors The system does not wait for the time condition to elapse if the setpoint frequency at the ramp function generator input and the actual frequency are below p1755 x 1 p1756 100 simultaneously f_actl p1755 1 min p1755 1 p1756 100 rpm Open control loop Closed control loop Figure 7 9
277. n bracket for interference suppression capacitor Control Interface Board Installation location for CU320 Shield connection F10 F11 fan fuses X9 external 24 V DC supply Setting terminals for the fan transformer PE2 connection Motor connection Figure 4 5 Connection overview of Power Module frame size HX without front cover Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 47 Electrical installation 4 6 Connection overview Power Module frame size JX PE1 connection DCPS Connection for dv dt filter DCNS Connection bracket for interference suppression capacitor Type plate Control Interface Board Installation location for CU320 Shield connection X9 external 24 V DC supply PE2 connection Setting terminals for the fan transformer F10 F11 fan fuses Motor connection Figure 4 6 Connection overview of Power Module frame size JX without front cover 48 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Electrical installation 4 7 Power connections 4 7 Power connections Z N WARNING Swapping the input and output terminals can destroy the device
278. n commissioned for the first time e 2 motor data sets MDS p0130 2 e 2 drive data sets DDS p0180 2 e 2 digital outputs to control the auxiliary contactors e 2 digital inputs to monitor the auxiliary contactors e 1 digital input to select the data set e 2 auxiliary contactors with auxiliary switches 1 NO contact e 2 motor contactors with positively driven auxiliary switches 1 NC contact 1NO contact 5 l r0830 r0830 0 r0830 1 KiH K2H Figure 9 7 Example of motor changeover Inverter chassis units 256 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 2 Drive functions Table 9 2 Settings for the motor changeover example Parameters Settings Comments p0130 2 Configure 2 MDS p0180 2 Configure 2 DDS p0186 0 1 0 1 The MDS are assigned to the DDS p0820 Digital input DDS selection The digital input to change over the motor is selected via the p0821 to p0824 0 DDS Binary coding is used p0820 bit 0 etc po826 0 1 1 2 Different numbers mean different thermal models po827 0 1 0 1 The bits of p0830 are assigned to the MDS If p0827 0 0 for example bit p0830 0 is set via DDSO when MDSO is selected 0830 0 and p0830 1 Digital outputs auxiliary The digital outputs for the auxiliary contactors are assigned to contactors the bits p0831 0 1 Digita
279. nation External influences damage Improper protective conductor connection at high leakage currents 4 Electrical magnetic and electromagnetic fields that can pose a risk to people with a pacemaker and or implants if they are too close 5 Emission of pollutants if components or packaging are not disposed of properly An assessment of the residual risks of Power Drive System components see points 1 to 5 above established that these risks do not exceed the specified limit values For more information about residual risks of the Power Drive System components see the relevant chapters in the technical user documentation 16 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Device overview 2 1 Chapter content This chapter provides information on the following e Introduction to the chassis units e The main components and features of the chassis units e The chassis unit wiring e Explanation of the type plate Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 17 Device overview 2 2 Overview of the chassis units 2 2 Overview of the chassis units 3 AC supply Connection systems Line side power components Signal cables Switch disconnector Line contactors Line filters Line reactors SINAMICS G130 components Power Modules Control Unit kit CU320 Control Unit with CompactFlash Card Additional system components Terminal Board Terminal Module Sensor Mod
280. nce looking at the drive shaft the motor must be connected to the Power Module as follows Table 4 3 Power Module and motor connection terminals Power Module connection terminals Motor connection terminals U2 T1 U V2 T2 V W2 T3 W In contrast to the connection for the clockwise phase sequence two phases have to be reversed with a counter clockwise phase sequence looking at the drive shaft Note If an incorrect rotating field was connected when the cables were installed and the rotating field cannot be corrected by swapping the motor cables it can be corrected when commissioning the drive via p1821 rotating field direction reversal by changing the rotating field and thus enabling a direction reversal see section Direction reversal With motors that can be operated in a star delta configuration the windings must be checked to ensure that they have been connected properly Refer to the relevant documentation for the motor and note the required insulation voltage for operating the device Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Electrical installation 4 7 Power connections 4 7 3 DCPS DCNS connection for a dV dt filter with Voltage Peak Limiter Table 4 4 DCPS DCNS Frame size Connectable cross section Terminal screw FX 1 x 70 mm M8 GX 1 x 70 mm M8 HX 1 x 185 mm M10 JX 2 x 185 mm M10 With frame sizes FX and GX the connecti
281. nd activate with lt F5 gt Another window appears in which you can enter the required value directly or select the value from a list Final confirmation Confirm the basic parameters to save them Once you have selected Continue and activated your entries with lt F5 gt the basic parameters you entered are permanently saved and the calculations required for closed loop control are carried out NOTICE A filter on the motor side must be entered in p0230 motor reactor p0230 1 dV dt filter with Voltage Peak Limiter p0230 2 Siemens sine wave filter p0230 3 third party sine wave filter p0230 4 otherwise motor control does not function properly Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 125 Commissioning 5 5 First commissioning Basic commissioning Motor identification 126 2 VECTOR motor identification Select the type of identification Stationary and rotating Only stationary No identification F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 Help v OK 2 VECTOR motor identification NOTE Start the drive with LOCAL and ON key Help Cancel Selecting motor identification To navigate through the selection fields choose lt F2 gt or lt F3 gt To activate a selection choose lt F5 gt Stationary measurement increases the control performance as deviations in the electrical characteristic values are
282. nected The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 329 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components 11 4 8 Replacing the Control Interface Board frame size JX Replacing the Control Interface Board 1 4 lo 2 F K I 3 Fife Ah jz i gt Figure 11 13 Replacing the Control Interface Board frame size JX Inverter chassis units 330 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Preparatory steps e Disconnect the chassis unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access e Remove the protective cover Removal The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with the diagram 1 Remove the CU320 mount 1 nut If necessary remove the PROFIBUS plug and connection to the operator panel X140 on the CU320 and carefully remove the CU320 2 Disconnect the plugs for the fiber optic cables and signal cables 5 plugs 3 Remove the DRIVE CLiQ cables and connections to the CU320 5 plugs 4 Remove the retaining screws for the slide in electronics unit 2 screws When removing the slide in electronics unit you have to disconnect 5
283. ner w f 16 17 Spanner or socket spanner w f 18 19 Hexagon socket spanner size 8 Torque wrench up to 50 Nm Screwdriver size 2 Screwdriver Torx T20 Screwdriver Torx T30 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 4 39 Electrical installation 4 3 Important safety precautions 4 3 40 Important safety precautions NWARNING The built in units are operated with high voltages All connection procedures must be carried out when the cabinet is de energized All work on the device must be carried out by trained personnel only Death serious injury or substantial material damage can result if these warnings are not taken into account Work on an open device must be carried out with extreme caution because external supply voltages may be present The power and control terminals may be live even when the motor is not running Dangerously high voltage levels are still present in the device up to five minutes after it has been disconnected due to the DC link capacitors For this reason the cabinet should not be opened until a reasonable period of time has elapsed Reforming the DC link capacitors The storage period should not exceed two years If the device is stored for more than two years the DC link capacitors of the devices must be reformed during commissioning The reforming procedure is described in Maintenance and Servicing The operator is responsible for ensuring that the Power Module and othe
284. net operator panel LOCAL mode with the direction of rotation changeover key Note Note that only one direction of rotation is enabled in the factory setting when control is carried out via the AOP30 Function diagram FP 3040 Direction of rotation limiting and direction of rotation changeover Parameters e p1110 Inhibit negative direction e p1111 Inhibit positive direction e p1113 Direction reversal Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 199 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 2 Setpoint channel 7 2 3 Skip speeds and minimum speeds Description Variable speed drives can generate critical whirling speeds within the control range of the entire drive train This prevents steady state operation in their proximity in other words although the drive can pass through this range it must not remain within it because resonant oscillations may be excited The skip frequency bands allow this range to be blocked for steady state operation Because the points at which critical whirling speeds occur in a drive train can vary depending on age or thermal factors a broader control range must be blocked To ensure that the speed does not constantly increase and decrease in the suppression bandwidth speeds the bands are assigned a hysteresis Specifying a minimum speed allows a specific range to be disabled around speed rpm for steady state operation Signal flow diagram Skip frequency sp
285. nformation BICO technology 142 Binector input Bl 143 Binector output BO 143 Command data set CDS 137 Connector input Cl 143 Connector output CO 143 Copy motor data set MDS 141 Copying the command data set CDS 141 Copying the drive data set DDS 141 Data sets 137 Data Sets 137 Drive data set DDS 138 Drive objects 135 Encoder data set EDS 139 Motor data set MDS 140 Parameter categorization 134 Parameter types 133 Parameters 133 Basic Information about the Drive System 133 BICO technology 142 Interconnecting signals 143 Binector input BI 143 Binector output BO 143 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Blocking protection 288 Bypass Bypass with synchronizer with degree of overlapping 274 Bypass with synchronizer without degree of overlapping 276 Without synchronization 278 Bypass function 273 C Cable Lengths 49 CBE20 174 CDS Copy 141 CDS command data set 137 Certificate of compliance with order 13 Certification 13 Cleaning 306 Closed loop torque control 224 Command data set 137 Command Data Set 137 Command sources CU terminals 151 PROFIdrive 147 PROFIdrive TM31 153 TM31 terminals 149 Communication Board Ethernet CBE20 Option G33 174 CompactFlash card 36 Slot 63 Connection cross sections 49 Connector input CI 143 Connector output CO 143 Control Interface Board Frame size FX replace 324 Frame size GX r
286. ng Signal C Unipolar Bipolar Measuring system m gy Zero marks Incremental HTL TTL E Configuration No zero mark v Zero mark spacing Pulses Encoder evaluation SMC30 Supply voltage ss Remote sense le 24 Encoder connection C SUB D Terminal Cancel Figure 5 24 Entering encoder data user defined encoder data 31 Select the measuring system You can choose the following encoders e HTL e TTL 32 Enter the required encoder data 33 Then click OK Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 107 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER CAUTION Once the encoder has been commissioned the supply voltage 5 24 V set for the encoder is activated on the SMC30 module If a 5 V encoder is connected and the supply voltage has not been set correctly the encoder may be damaged Default settings for setpoints command sources Configuration SINAMICS_G130 Defaults of the setpoints command sources Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 Drive unit 4 Options Control structure Select the default macros for your command sources Drive setting Motor M 0 Optional Motor Dat Command sources at Equivalent Circuit C CDS1 No selection Calculation of the te Motor holding brake All binector inputs B1 of the corresponding command data Encoder set CDS will be interconnected accordinaly CDSs0 PROFIdrive
287. ng cables are routed down through the Power Module and out 4 7 4 Adjusting the fan voltage Inverter chassis units The power supply for the device fan 1 AC 230 V in the Power Module is generated from the line supply using a transformer The transformer is fitted with primary taps so that it can be fine tuned to the supply voltage When delivered the taps are always set to the highest level With a low supply voltage the appropriate transformer tap must be activated For the position of the setting terminals see the Connection overview section Note One transformer is installed in frame sizes FX GX and HX two transformers are installed in frame size JX The two primary terminals on these devices must be set together The setting terminals must be connected to 0 and the supply voltage Figure 4 7 Setting terminals for the fan transformer 380 V 480 V 3 AC 500 V 600 V 3 AC 660V 690 V 3 AC The supply voltage assignments for making the appropriate setting on the fan transformer are indicated in the following tables Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 51 Electrical installation 4 7 Power connections Note With the 660 V 690 V 3 AC fan transformer a jumper is inserted between the 600 V terminal and CON terminal The 600V and CON terminals are for internal use NOTICE If the terminals are not reconnected to the actual supply voltage e T
288. ngs result in asymptotic approximation of the actual speed to the setpoint speed after a setpoint step change During many simple control procedures this is satisfactory for pumps and fans Stone mills separators large centrifugal masses Kp p1470 12 20 Tn p1472 500 1000 ms Kneader drives Kp p1470 10 Tn p1472 200 400 ms Note We recommend checking the effective speed control gain r1468 during operation If this value changes during operation the Kp adaptation is being used p1400 5 1 Kp adaptation can if necessary be deactivated or its behavior changed When operating with encoder p1300 21 A smoothing value for the actual speed value p1442 5 20 ms ensures quieter operations for motors with gear units 7 4 3 1 Speed controller pre control integrated pre control with balancing Description Inverter chassis units The command behavior of the speed control loop can be improved by calculating the accelerating torque from the speed setpoint and connecting it on the line side of the speed controller This torque setpoint mv is applied to the current controller the current controller is pre controlled using adaptation elements directly as additive reference variable enabled via p1496 The torque setpoint mv is calculated from mv p1496 x J x dw dt p1496 x p0341 x p0342 x dw dt w 2mf The motor moment of inertia p0341 is calculated when commissioning the drive syste
289. nication Monitored limit Monitored limit Figure 6 32 Broadband distribution reservation PROFINET lO IRT Note When operating S7 300 stations with SINAMICS drives presently only communications via PROFINET IO with RT are possible Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 183 Operation 6 7 PROFINET IO 6 7 3 3 Addresses Definition MAC address IP address Each PROFINET device is assigned a worldwide unique device identifier in the factory This 6 byte long device identifier is the MAC address The MAC address is divided up as follows e 3 bytes manufacturer s ID and e 3 bytes device identifier consecutive number The MAC address is usually indicated on the front of the device e g 08 00 06 6B 80 CO To allow a PROFINET device to be addressed as a node on Industrial Ethernet this device also requires an IP address that is unique within the network The IP address is made up of 4 decimal numbers with a range of values from 0 through 255 The decimal numbers are separated by a period The IP address is made up of e The address of the sub network and e The address of the node generally called the host or network node IP address assignment Device name 184 The TCP IP protocol is a prerequisite for establishing a connection and parameterization This is the reason that an IP address is required The IP addresses of IO devices can be assigned by the IO controller an
290. nk and without feedback Inverter chassis units 246 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 2 Drive functions Description of Vdc_min control kinetic buffering Vdc Power failure Power restoration 11246 r1286 lt 1 gt SSS SS SS SS eS a aaa a without V_dc min control fault F30003 OV 1 Vdc controller active nsetp lt 2 gt rpm Power failure time Iqsetp oe eee regenerative Figure 9 4 Switching Vdc_min control on off kinetic buffering Note Kinetic buffering must only be activated when the optional components TM31 SMC30 VSM etc are supplied by an external voltage source When Vdc_min control is enabled with p1240 2 3 p1280 it is activated if the power fails when the Vdc_min switch in level r1246 r1286 is undershot In general the regenerative power braking energy of the drive machine generated when the motor speed is reduced is used to buffer the DC link voltage of the converter in other words when Vdc_min control is active the motor speed no longer follows the main setpoint and can be reduced to zero The SINAMICS system continues operating until the shutdown threshold of the DC link voltage is undershot see Switching Vdc_min control on off lt 1 gt Note All parameter specifications in parentheses refer to V f control Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E0033144
291. nnection Maximum DIN VDE mm2 4 x 240 4 x 240 6 x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 500 4 x 500 6 x 500 Fixing screw M12 M12 M12 Protective conductor connection Max PE1 GND mm 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 500 2 x 6 500 2 x 500 Max PE2 GND mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 6 x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 500 4 x 500 6 x 500 Fixing screw M12 M12 M12 Frame size HX HX JX Approx weight kg 294 294 530 Dimensions W x H x D mm 503 x 1 506 x 540 503 x 1 506 x 540 908 5 x 1 510 x 540 Recommended protection Line protection w o semicond protection 3NA3252 6 3NA3354 6 3NA3365 6 Rated current A 2x 315 2x 355 2 x 500 frame size to DIN 43620 1 2 3 3 Line and semi cond protection 3NE1435 2 3NE1447 2 3NE1448 2 Rated current A 560 670 850 frame size to DIN 43620 1 3 3 3 see Overload capability see Overload capability Derating data 1 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s 2 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s 3 Maximum output frequency at factory set default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output frequency see Functions monitoring and protective functions Increasing the output frequency for information on derating data see 364 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Technical specifications Table 12 18
292. nnnonononcnonnonnn nro cnn 309 11 4 Replacing Component a si ieie ideta aaiae anaa ia arei ia ea aaae eiaa 311 11 4 1 Replacing the power block frame size FX cecccceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeerseesseeeees 312 11 4 2 Replacing the power block frame size GX ooccocinincccnnonococccoconccnnnnnoncnnononcnnnnnn cnn rnnn rca rnnnnnnnrnnn nn 314 11 4 3 Replacing the power block frame size HX ooooocccnonoccccconnocccccononcccnnoncncnnnnnccnnno nc nc nana nccnnnnncccnannnnna 316 11 44 Replacing the power block frame size JX oooooooonicccccnnnoccccconoccccononcccnnnnnccnn nono ncnnnnncn cnn nnccnannnnna 320 1145 Replacing the Control Interface Board frame Size PX oooooocncocccccnnccoccononcconccnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnannnnnnnno 324 11 4 6 Replacing the Control Interface Board frame size GX ooooonococcccnncccccnononcconccnnnnnnoncnnnnnnnannnnnnnno 326 11 4 7 Replacing the Control Interface Board frame size HX 0oooccnoncccnnnoccccnconcccnononcnnnnnancnr cnn nna nana 328 11 48 Replacing the Control Interface Board frame size JX ooooccinnnnccnnnincccnnonncccnnonnnccnnanannnnncnnnnnn no 330 11 4 9 Replacing the fan frame size FX ccccceeceeceeeeeecee cece cess ceaeaeeeeeesecacaeeeeeeeecseaeeeeeeeeteeneeeeteees 332 11 4 10 Replacing the fan frame size GX eee eeeeee cece eter ee ee eetee eee ae ee ee tees canon cnc naar cnc naar n nn cnnnnncccnnncnnns 334 1134 11 Replacing the fan frame size HA siessen aa gece
293. ns of the V f characteristic exist which are listed in the following table Inverter chassis units 204 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 3 V f control Table 7 1 p1300 V f characteristics Parameter Meaning Application property value 0 Linear characteristic Standard with variable voltage boost v p1300 0 1 Linear characteristic Characteristic that compensates for voltage v with flux current losses in the stator resistance for static Vax control FCC dynamic loads flux current control FCC toari pogge This is particularly useful for small motors N since they have a relatively high stator e Load current resistance dependent 0 at t 2 Parabolic Characteristic that takes into account the characteristic motor torque curve e g fan pump e Quadratic characteristic f characteristic e Energy saving because the low voltage also results in small currents and losses 3 Programmable Characteristic that takes into account the characteristic motor machine torque characteristic g f2 13 f4 fmax p1320 p1322 p1324 p1326 p1082 5 Precise frequency Characteristic see parameter value 0 that takes into account the technological drives particularity of an application e g textile applications e Whereby current limitation Imax controller only affects the output voltage and not the output frequency e By disabling slip co
294. nsion drawings The cooling air for the power unit is drawn from the lower part of the device The warmed air is expelled through the heat sink When installing the device in cabinet units you must ensure that suitable barriers are in place to ensure that the warmed air is not drawn back into the suction area of the heat sink According to EN 61800 3 the built in unit is not suitable for use in low voltage public networks that supply residential buildings High frequency interference may occur if they are used in this type of network Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Mechanical installation 3 4 Power Module Unpacking the cabinets Check the delivery against the delivery note to ensure that all the items have been delivered Check that the devices are intact The packaging material must be discarded in accordance with the applicable country specific guidelines and rules Required tools To install the connections you will require e Spanner or socket spanner w f 10 e Spanner or socket spanner w f 13 e Spanner or socket spanner w f 16 17 e Spanner or socket spanner w f 18 19 e Hexagon socket spanner size 8 e Torque wrench up to 50 Nm e Screwdriver size 2 e Screwdriver Torx T20 e Screwdriver Torx T30 3 4 Power Module Description The Power Module is the power unit of an AC AC converter Line or motor side components can be added to create a converter system If required e
295. nts is displayed in r0069 6 For operation the value in p0287 1 must be greater than the sum of the phase currents when the insulation is intact Line phase failure F30011 Line phase failure in main circuit gt OFF2 detection 1 The monitoring thresholds are permanently set in the converter and cannot be changed by the user Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 285 Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 4 Monitoring and protective functions 9 4 2 Description Example 286 Thermal monitoring and overload responses The priority of thermal monitoring for power components is to identify critical situations If alarm thresholds are exceeded the user can set parameterizable response options that enable continued operation e g with reduced power and prevent immediate shutdown The parameterization options however only enable intervention below the shutdown thresholds which cannot be changed by the user The following thermal monitoring options are available e i t monitoring A07805 F30005 it monitoring is used to protect components that have a high thermal time constant compared with semi conductors Overload with regard to i t is present when the converter load r0036 is greater than 100 load in in relation to rated operation e Heatsink temperature A05000 F30004 Monitoring of the heat sink temperature r0037 of the power semi c
296. nverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 173 Operation 6 7 PROFINET IO 6 7 PROFINET IO 6 7 1 Communication Board Ethernet CBE20 Description Interface module CBE20 is used for communication via PROFINET The module must be installed line side in the option slot of the CU320 Control Unit 4 Ethernet interfaces are available on the module Diagnosis of the function mode and communication are possible via LEDs Interface overview MAC address 174 CBE 0 Port 1 pm 0 Port 2 ray X1400 interfaces rt Ethernet interfaces i Port 3 Pi EP Port 4 A OO LEDs Sync green Fault red Figure 6 21 Communication Board Ethernet CBE20 The MAC address of the Ethernet interfaces is indicated on the upper side of the CBE20 The label is only visible when the module has not yet been installed Note Please note the MAC address prior to installing the module so that it is available to you for the subsequent commissioning Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 7 PROFINET IO X1400 Ethernet interface Table 6 16 Connector X1400 port 1 4 Pin Signal name Technical specifications 1 RX Receive data 2 RX Receive
297. ny signal cables The Control Interface Board can then be removed from the slide in electronics unit CAUTION When removing the connector of the ribbon cable make sure that you actuate the locking lever on the connector very carefully e g with a screwdriver otherwise the lock could be damaged Installation For re installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current carrying parts must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure When dealing with connectors with a lock make sure that the locking lever is securely engaged once connected The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 327 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 7 11 4 Replacing components Replacing the Control Interface Board frame size HX Replacing the Control Interface Board 328 Frank la i 062320 000 SD o o 10 e O og o ot sa nm rA w C w En Figure 11 12 Replacing the Control Interface Board frame size HX Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Preparatory steps e Disconnect the chassis unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access e
298. of _max 1 Alarm with reduction of _max and fault F701 1 2 Alarm and fault F7011 no reduction of _max When the fault threshold is reached set via p0605 factory setting 155 C fault F7011 is triggered in conjunction with the setting in p0610 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 4 Monitoring and protective functions Temperature measurement via PTC The device is connected to terminal X522 7 8 on the Customer Terminal Block TM31 The threshold for switching to an alarm or fault is 1650 Q If the threshold is exceeded the system switches internally from an artificially generated temperature value of 50 C to 250 C and makes it available for further evaluation e Set the KTY temperature sensor type p4100 1 e Activate motor temperature measurement via the external sensor p0600 10 e Alarm A7910 is triggered once the PTC responds e Fault F7011 is triggered once the waiting time defined in p0606 has elapsed Sensor monitoring for wire breakage short circuit Function diagram Parameters Inverter chassis units If the temperature of the motor temperature monitor is outside the range 50 C to 250 C the sensor cable is broken or has short circuited Alarm A07915 Alarm temperature sensor fault is triggered Fault FO7016 Fault temperature sensor fault is triggered once the waiting time defined in p0607 has el
299. oject navigator configuring the drive unit 1 In the project navigator click the plus sign next to the drive unit that you want to configure The plus sign becomes a minus sign and the drive unit configuration options are displayed as a tree below the drive unit 2 Double click Configure drive unit Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 91 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Configuring the drive unit 92 Configuration SINAMICS_G130 Drive unit Configure the drive unit Options Connection voltage Control structure Drive setting Motor Motor holding brake Drive unit selection Defaults of the setpoini Cooling method Drive functions 65L3310 1GE32 1440 65L3310 1GE32 6440 ee 65L3310 1GE33 1440 Summary 6SL3310 1GE33 8440 6 L3310 1GE35 0440 65L3310 1GE36 1440 65L3310 1GE37 5440 65L3310 1GE38 44 40 6SL3310 1GE 41 0440 65L3310 1GF 31 8440 65L3310 1GF 32 2440 65L3310 1GF 32 6440 65L3310 1GF 33 3440 6SL3310 1GF 34 1440 AA ARR eens see Configure the drive Drive object type Vector Default macro G130 chassis unit F Parallel connection Figure 5 13 Configuring the drive unit 3 Under Voltage selection choose the correct voltage Under Cooling type choose the correct cooling type for your drive unit Note In this step you make a preliminary selection of the
300. ol function module can be activated by running the commissioning Wizard Parameter r0108 14 indicates whether the function module has been activated Parameter p1215 must be set to 3 and the brake controlled via a digital output on customer terminal strip TM31 FD 2704 Zero speed detection FD 2707 Release apply brake FD 2711 Signal outputs Example 1 Starting against applied brake Inverter chassis units When the device is switched on the setpoint is enabled immediately if other enable signals are issued even if the brake has not yet been released p1152 1 The factory setting p1152 r0899 15 must be separated here The drive starts by generating a torque against the applied brake The brake is not released until the motor torque or motor current p1220 has exceeded braking threshold 1 p1221 This configuration is used for example when the drive is connected to a belt that is under tension loop accumulator in the steel industry Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 281 Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 3 Extended functions Example 2 Emergency brake If emergency braking is required electrical and mechanical braking is to take place simultaneously This can be achieved if OFF3 is used as a tripping signal for emergency braking p1219 0 r0898 2 OFF3 to apply brake immediately To prevent the converter working in opposition to the brake the OFF3 ramp p1135 should be set to 0
301. ommand is issued in accordance with the settings in p1959 and p1960 e Encoder test If a speed controller is in use the direction of rotation and pulse number per revolution are checked e Only for induction motors Measurement of the magnetization characteristic p0362 to p0369 Measurement of the magnetization current p0320 and determination of the offset voltage of the converter for offset compensation Measurement of the leakage inductance saturation and setting of the current controller adaptation p0391 p0393 This is activated automatically on 1LA1 and 1LA8 motors p0300 11 18 see p1959 5 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 243 Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 2 Drive functions Parameters 244 e Speed controller optimization p1470 and p1472 if p1960 1 encoderless operation p1460 and p1462 if p1960 2 operation with encoder Kp adaptation switch off e Acceleration pre control setting 91496 e Setting for ratio between the total moment of inertia and that of the motor p0342 Note To set the new controller setting permanently the data must be saved with p0977 or p0971 to non volatile memory on the CompactFlash card N DANGER During speed controller optimization the drive triggers movements in the motor that can reach the maximum motor speed The EMERGENCY STOP functions must be fully operational during commissioning To protec
302. ommissioning via STARTER Selecting the PROFIBUS message frame Configuration SINAMICS_G130 PROFIBUS process data exchange drive Drive unit Options Control structure Drive setting Motor Motor data Optional Motor Dat Calculation of the lv Motor holding brake Encoder Defaults of the setg K KK K K K K K K K K K K Drive functions Important paramete Summ ary lt iii a Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 Select the PROFIBUS message frame type PROFIBUS PZD message frame Free telegram configuration with BII Equivalent Circuit C S Input data actual values words Output data setpoints words Notes 1 The PROFIBUS process data will be interconnected to BICO parameters in accordance with the selected message frame type These BICO parameters cannot be subsequently changed Cancel Help Figure 5 27 Selecting the PROFIBUS message frame 38 In the PROFIBUS PZD message frame field select the PROFIBUS message frame type Message frame types 39 Click Continue gt Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Standard message frame 1 Standard message frame 2 Standard message frame 3 Standard message frame 4 VIK NAMUR message frame 20 PCS7 message frame 352 Free message frame configuration with BICO 111 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Entering im
303. on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 2 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 3 Maximum output frequency at factory set default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output frequency see Functions monitoring and protective functions Increasing the output frequency for information on derating data see Derating data Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 363 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications Table 12 17 Power Module 660 V 690 V 3 AC part 4 Category Unit Order number 6SL3310 1GH34 7AA0 1GH35 8AA0 1GH37 4AA0 Rated motor output kW 450 560 710 Rated input voltage V 660 V to 690 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 483 598 764 Rated output current A 465 575 735 Base load current IL A 452 560 710 Base load current IH 2 A 416 514 657 Max output frequency 3 Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 8 5 10 3 12 8 Max current requirements at 24 A 1 1 1 25 V DC Cooling air requirement m s 0 78 0 78 1 48 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 70 73 70 73 73 75 Line connection Maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 6 x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 500 4 x 500 6 x 500 Fixing screw M12 M12 M12 Motor co
304. on device Order number Order number for the installation device 6SL3766 1FA00 OAAO Inverter chassis units 308 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Maintenance and servicing 11 3 Maintenance 11 3 3 Using crane lifting lugs to transport power blocks Crane lifting lugs The power blocks are fitted with crane lifting lugs for transportation on a lifting harness in the context of replacement The positions of the crane lifting lugs are illustrated by arrows in the figures below NWARNING A lifting harness with vertical ropes or chains must be used to prevent any risk of damage to the housing CAUTION The power block busbars must not be used to support or secure lifting harnesses for the purpose of transportation Figure 11 2 Crane lifting lugs on FX GX power block Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 309 Maintenance and servicing 11 3 Maintenance A il AI aw Figure 11 3 Crane lifting lugs on HX JX power block Note On HX and JX power blocks the front crane lifting lug is located behind the busbar Inverter chassis units 310 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components 11 4 Replacing components Inverter chassis units NWARNING The following must be taken into account when the devices are transported e Some of the
305. onds Displays the system runtime in ms at which the fault occurred r0949 Fault value Displays additional information about the fault This information is required for detailed fault diagnosis 12109 Fault time removed in milliseconds Displays the system runtime in ms at which the fault was rectified 12123 Alarm time received in milliseconds Displays the system runtime in ms at which the alarm occurred 12124 Alarm value Displays additional information about the alarm This information is required for detailed alarm diagnosis r2125 Alarm time removed in milliseconds Displays the system runtime in ms at which the alarm was rectified CU320 key diagnostic parameters details in List Manual Parameters Name Description r0002 Control Unit status display Status display for the Control Unit r0018 Control Unit firmware version Displays the firmware version of the Control Unit For the display parameters for the firmware version of the other connected components see the parameter description in the List Manual 10721 Digital inputs actual terminal value Displays the actual value at the digital input terminals on the CU This parameter shows the actual value uninfluenced by simulation mode of the digital inputs 10722 Status of digital inputs CU Displays the status of the digital inputs on the CU This parameter shows the status of the digital inputs under the influence of simulation mode of th
306. onductor IGBT e Chip temperature A05001 F30025 Significant temperature differences can occur between the barrier layer of the IGBT and the heatsink These differences are taken into account and monitored by the chip temperature r0037 If an overload occurs with respect to any of these three monitoring functions an alarm is first output The alarm threshold p0294 i t monitoring can be parameterized relative to the shutdown trip values The factory setting for the alarm threshold for chip temperature monitoring is 15 Kelvin K and 5 K for the heat sink and inlet air This means that the Overtemperature overload alarm is triggered at 15 K or 5 K below the shutdown threshold The parameterized responses are induced via p0290 simultaneously when the alarm is output Possible responses include e Reduction in pulse frequency p0290 2 3 This is a highly effective method of reducing losses in the power unit since switching losses account for a high proportion of overall losses In many applications a temporary reduction in the pulse frequency can be tolerated to allow the process to continue Disadvantage As a result of the pulse frequency reduction the current ripple is increased which can mean that the torque ripple is increased at the motor shaft for low moments of inertia and also an increased noise level Reducing the pulse frequency does not affect the dynamic response of the current control circuit since the samp
307. oning Function diagram Inverter chassis units 9 3 Extended functions The output can be scaled via parameter p2295 and the control direction reversed It can be limited via parameters p2291 and p2292 and interconnected as required via a connector output r2294 The actual value can be integrated for example via an analog input on the TM31 If a PID controller has to be used for control reasons the D component is switched to the setpoint actual value difference p2263 1 unlike in the factory setting This is always necessary when the D component is to be effective even if the reference variable changes The D component can only be activated when p2274 gt 0 Note With the entry 0 sec as power up time or ramp down time for the ramp function generator of the technology controller the current values of the respective ramp function generator will be frozen The technology controller function module can be activated by running the commissioning Wizard Parameter r0108 16 indicates whether the function module has been activated FD 7950 Technology controller fixed values FD 7954 Technology controller motorized potentiometer FD 7958 Technology controller closed loop controller Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 271 Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 3 Extended functions Example liquid level control The objective here is to maintain a constant level in the container
308. ons are available for the motor type 1 Induction motor 2 Permanent magnet synchronous motor Other values are not permitted To navigate through the selection fields choose lt F2 gt or lt F3 gt To activate a selection choose lt F5 gt Entering motor data specified on the type plate To navigate through the selection fields choose lt F2 gt or lt F3 gt To activate a selection choose lt F5 gt To change a parameter value navigate to the required selection field and activate with lt F5 gt The system displays another window in which you can 2 VECTOR motor parameter m 0 p0308mMot cosphi_Bemes 0 870 e Enter the value directly or p0310mMot f_Bemes L_90 00 Hz e select the value from a list 0311mMot n_B 1485 00 min 1 ES f a AN sisi sra When you have finished entering the motor i data choose Continue underneath the iS Genin final parameter value and activate your eP A y entries with lt F5 gt F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 Note The steps described below also apply to induction motors When commissioning a permanent magnet synchronous motor p0300 2 there are a few special conditions which are detailed in a separate chapter see Setpoint channel and closed loop control Permanent magnet synchronous motors Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Commissioning Basic commissioning entering the encoder data if available
309. ot be changed through this measure Consequently in this case the selection possibility for the parameter p0290 is limited to 0 and 1 Activation of the variable pulse frequency At commissioning the parameter p 0290 is automatically set to the value 2 This activates pulse frequency reduction at overload Deactivation of the variable pulse frequency By changing the parameter p0290 to 0 or 1 the variable pulse frequency is deactivated Inverter chassis units 268 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Functions monitoring and protective functions Function diagram FD 8014 Parameter e 10036 e 10037 e p0230 e p0290 e p1082 e 2135 13 e 2135 15 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 9 2 Drive functions Signals and monitoring functions thermal monitoring power unit Power unit overload 2t CO Power unit temperatures Drive filter type motor side Power unit overload response Maximum speed Fault thermal overload power unit Thermal overload in power unit alarm 269 Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 3 Extended functions 9 3 9 3 1 Description 270 Extended functions Technology controller The technology controller function module allows simple control functions to be implemented e g e Liquid level control e Temperature control e Dancer position control e Pressure control e Flow control e Simple control without highe
310. ows the factory setting The digital inputs terminals X520 and X530 in the example are powered by the internal 24 V supply of the Terminal Module terminal X540 The two groups of digital inputs optocoupler inputs have a common reference potential ground reference M1 or M2 To close the circuit when the internal 24 V supply is used the ground references M1 M2 must be connected to internal ground M If the power is not supplied from the internal 24 V supply terminal X540 the jumper between ground M1 and M or M2 and M must be removed and M1 or M2 must be connected to the ground of the external 24 V DC supply If you do nat do this this can result in potential rounding X500 X501 DRIVE CLiQ interface Table 4 19 DRIVE CLiQ interface X500 and X501 Pin Signal name Technical specifications 1 TXP Transmit data 2 TXN Transmit data 3 RXP Receive data 4 Reserved do not use 5 Reserved do not use 6 RXN Receive data 7 Reserved do not use 8 Reserved do not use A 24 V Power supply B GND 0 V Electronic ground Blanking plate for DRIVE CLiQ interface Tyco order no 969556 5 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 67 Electrical installation 4 10 Signal connections X524 Electronics power supply Table 4 20 Terminal block X524 Terminal Function Technical specifications
311. pass or Ready to operate and bypass The two motor contactors must be designed for switching under load Note The examples contained in the following descriptions are only basic circuits designed to explain the basic function The dimensions of specific circuit configurations contactors protective equipment must be calculated for specific systems The bypass function is only available for sped control without encoders p1300 20 or V f control p1300 0 19 and when using an asynchronous motor Establishing the bypass function The bypass function is part of the technology controller function module that can be activated by running the commissioning Wizard Parameter r0108 16 indicates whether the function module has been activated Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 273 Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 3 Extended functions 9 3 2 1 Bypass with synchronizer with degree of overlapping p1260 1 Description When Bypass with synchronizer with degree of overlapping p1260 1 is activated the synchronized motor is transferred to the supply and retrieved again During the changeover both contactors K1 and K2 are closed at the same time for a period phase lock synchronization A restrictor is used to disconnect the converter and supply voltage The uk value for the restrictor is 10 2 Line supply i Converter with Voltage Sensing Protec
312. permissible output current can be calculated using the following tables The site altitude and ambient temperature are compensated here Table 12 2 Current derating as a function of the ambient temperature and site altitude Site altitude above Ambient temperature in C sea level in m 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 0 to 2000 100 95 0 87 0 Up to 2500 100 96 3 91 4 83 7 Up to 3000 100 96 2 92 5 87 9 80 5 Up to 3500 100 96 7 92 3 88 8 84 3 77 3 Up to 4000 100 97 8 92 7 88 4 85 0 80 8 74 0 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 349 Technical specifications 12 2 General specifications Voltage derating as a function of the site altitude In addition to current derating voltage derating must also be considered at site altitudes gt 2000 m above sea level Table 12 3 Voltage derating as a function of the site altitude 380 V 480 V 3 AC Site altitude Rated converter input voltage above sea level in m 380 V 460 V 480 V 0 to 2000 100 to 2250 100 96 to 2500 100 98 94 to 2750 100 98 94 90 to 3000 100 95 91 88 to 3250 100 97 93 89 85 to 3500 100 98 93 89 85 82 to 3750 100 95 91 87 83 79 to 4000 96 92 87 83 80 76 Table 12 4 Voltage derating as a function of the site altitude 500 V 600 V 3 AC
313. ple 2 TTL encoder unipolar without zero marker Inverter chassis units 78 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Commissioning 5 1 Chapter content This chapter provides information on the following e Initial commissioning of the chassis unit initialization Entering the motor data drive commissioning Entering the most important parameters basic commissioning concluding with motor identification e Data backup e Parameter reset to factory settings The AOP30 operator panel Monitoring Functions Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 79 Commissioning 5 2 STARTER commissioning tool 5 2 STARTER commissioning tool Description You can use the STARTER commissioning tool to configure and commission SINAMICS drives and drive systems The drive can be configured using the STARTER drive configuration Wizard Note This chapter shows you how to carry out commissioning using STARTER STARTER features a comprehensive online help function which provides detailed explanations of all the processes and available system settings For this reason this chapter only describes the individual commissioning steps Prerequisites for installing STARTER Hardware requirements e PGorPC with e Windows 2000 Pentium Il 400 MHz 256 MB RAM 512 MB recommended e Windows XP Pentium III 500 MHz 256 MB RAM 512 MB recommended e 1024 x 768 pixel screen resolution Software require
314. ponents Description The average service life of the device fans is 50 000 hours In practice however the service life depends on other variables e g ambient temperature degree of cabinet protection etc and therefore may deviate from this value The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the cabinet unit is available Preparatory steps e Disconnect the built in unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access e Remove the protective cover Removal The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with the diagram 1 Remove the retaining screws for the fan 2 screws 2 Disconnect the supply cables 1 x L 1 x N You can now carefully remove the fan CAUTION When removing the fan ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation steps For installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current conducting parts must be observed Carefully establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwed union connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 333 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components 11 4 10 Replacing the fan frame size GX Replacing the fan y An A Y ie
315. portant parameters 112 Configuration SINAMICS_G130 Important parameters Figure 5 28 j Drive unit Options Control structure Drive setting Motor Motor data Optional Motor Dat Equivalent Circuit C S Calculation of the t Motor holding brake Encoder Defaults of the sete Drive functions PROFIBUS proces 1 Summary m Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 Set the values for the most important parameters 30750 Arms 000002 RM 5000 000 RPM 0000s 0000s ioc s Current limit Minimum speed Maximum speed Ramp up time Ramp down time Ramp down time with OFF3 Important parameters 40 Enter the required parameter values Cancel Help Note STARTER provides tool tips if you position your cursor on the required field without clicking in the field 41 Click Continue gt Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Commissioning Summary of the drive unit data 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Configuration SINAMICS_G130 Summary Opti Con Driv Opti Equ YO t Enc Defi Driv PROFIBUS proces Important paramete ons trol structure e setting yi O t or Motor data onal Motor Dat valent Circuit C Calculation of the t or holding brake oder aults of the sete e functions
316. pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 69 73 69 73 70 73 Line connection Maximum DIN VDE mm2 2 x 240 2 x 240 4 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 500 2 x 500 4 x 500 Fixing screw M10 M10 M12 Motor connection Maximum DIN VDE mm 2 x 240 2 x 240 4 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 500 2 x 500 4 x 500 Fixing screw M10 M10 M12 Protective conductor connection Max PE1 GND mm 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 500 2 x 500 2 x 500 Max PE2 GND mm 2 x 240 2 x 240 4 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 500 2 x 500 4 x 500 Fixing screw M10 M10 M12 Frame size GX GX HX Approx weight kg 162 162 294 Dimensions W x H x D mm 326 x 1 533 x 545 326 x 1 533 x 545 503 x 1 506 x 540 Recommended protection Line protection w o semicond 3NA3365 3NA3372 3NA3475 protection Rated current A 500 630 800 frame size in accordance with DIN 3 3 3 43620 1 Line and semicond protection 4 A 3NE1334 2 3NE1436 2 3NE1438 2 Rated current 500 630 800 frame size to DIN 43620 1 2 3 3 1 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 2 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 3 Maximum output frequency at factory set default pulse frequency for information on increasing the output frequency see Functions monitoring and protective functions Increasing the output f
317. ptized so that the STARTER can establish communication 4 Select online operation in STARTER Set the IP address in Windows XP On the desktop right click on Network environment gt Properties gt double click on Network card and choose gt Properties gt Internet Protocol TCP IP gt Properties gt Enter the freely assignable addresses Inverter chassis units 176 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 7 PROFINET IO Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask pour network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address 192 168 0 10 Subnet mask 55 255 0 0 Default gateway Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server Figure 6 24 Properties of the Internet Protocol TCP IP Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 177 Operation 6 7 PROFINET lO Settings in STARTER The following settings are required in STARTER for communication via PROFINET e Extras gt Set PG PC interface Set PG PC Interface Access Path Access Point of the Application S7ONLINE STEP gt TCP IP Auto gt Broadcom Ne
318. r gt Create new project Introduction 2 PG PC Set Insert drive Summary interface units Figure 5 4 84 Create new project Please enter the project data Project name Project Author Cr Storage loc je Siemens Step7 5 proj E Comment Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Commissioning Inverter chassis units 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER 3 Enter a project name and if necessary the author memory location and a comment 4 Click Continue gt to set up the PG PC interface Project Wizard Starter i El zl 4 Introduction Create PG PC Set Insert drive Summary new project interface units Specify the online connection to the drive unit Set ae PC Adapter PROFIBUS lt Back Continue gt Cancel Figure 5 5 Set up interface Note The online connection to the drive unit can only be established via PROFIBUS 5 Click Change and test and set up the interface in accordance with your device configuration The Properties Copy and Select pushbuttons are now active Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 85 86 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Set PG PC Interface Access Path Access Point of the Application S7ONLINE STEP gt PC Adapter PROFIBUS Standard for STEP 7 Interface Parameter Assignment Used PC Adapter PROFIBUS H3150 Ind Eth
319. r r0068 l act Vector p2051 3 Cl PROFIBUS PZD send word Vector r0080 M act Vector p2051 4 Cl PROFIBUS PZD send word Vector r0082 P act Vector p2051 5 Cl PROFIBUS PZD send word Vector r2131 FAULT Vector p2080 0 Bl PROFIBUS send status word 1 Vector r0899 0 Ready to power up Vector p2080 1 Bl PROFIBUS send status word 1 Vector r0899 1 Ready to operate Vector p2080 2 Bl PROFIBUS send status word 1 Vector r0899 2 Operation enabled Vector p2080 3 Bl PROFIBUS send status word 1 Vector r2139 3 Fault Vector p2080 4 Bl PROFIBUS send status word 1 Vector r0899 4 No OFF2 Vector p2080 5 Bl PROFIBUS send status word 1 Vector r0899 5 No OFF3 Vector p2080 6 Bl PROFIBUS send status word 1 Vector r0899 6 Power on inhibit Vector p2080 7 Bl PROFIBUS send status word 1 Vector r2139 7 Alarm present Vector p2080 8 BI PROFIBUS send status word 1 Vector r2197 7 Setpoint actual value deviation in Vector tolerance p2080 9 BI PROFIBUS send status word 1 Vector r0899 9 Control from PLC Vector p2080 10 Bl PROFIBUS send status word 1 Vector r2199 1 Comparison value reached Vector p2080 11 BI PROFIBUS send status word 1 Vector r1407 7 M I P limiting not active Vector p2080 12 Bl PROFIBUS send status word 1 Vector O Vector p2080 13 BI PROFIBUS send status word 1 Vector r2129 14 No alarm for motor Vector overtemperature p2080 14 BI PROFIBUS send status word 1 Vector r2197 3 Clock
320. r chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Command Data Sets CDS Drive Data Set DDS Encoder data set EDS Motor Data Sets MDS 141 Operation 6 3 Basic information about the drive system Parameters 6 3 4 Description 142 e p0120 Power Module data sets PDS number e p0130 Motor data sets MDS number e p0139 0 2 Copy motor data set MDS e p0140 Encoder data sets EDS number e p0170 Command data set CDS number e p0180 Drive data set DDS number e p0186 Assigned motor data set MDS e p0187 0 n Encoder 1 encoder data set number e p0188 0 n Encoder 2 encoder data set number e p0189 0 n Encoder 3 encoder data set number e p0809 Copy command data set CDS e p0810 Bl Command data set selection CDS bit 0 e p0811 Bl Command data set selection CDS bit 1 e p0812 Bl Command data set selection CDS bit 2 e p0813 Bl Command data set selection CDS bit 3 e p0819 0 2 Copy drive data set DDS e p0820 BI Drive data set selection bit 0 e p0821 BI Drive data set selection bit 1 e p0822 BI Drive data set selection bit 2 e p0823 BI Drive data set selection bit 3 e p0824 BI Drive data set selection bit 4 BICO technology interconnecting signals Every drive contains a large number of interconnectable input and output variables and internal control variables BICO technology Binector Connector Technology allows the drive to be adapted to a wide variety of condition
321. r components are installed and connected in accordance with the recognized technical rules in the country of installation and applicable regional guidelines Special attention should be paid to cable dimensioning fuses grounding shutdown disconnection and overcurrent protection If an item of protective gear trips in a branch circuit a leakage current may have been disconnected To reduce the risk of fire or an electric shock the current conducting parts and other components in the cabinet unit should be inspected and damaged parts replaced When an item of protective gear trips the cause of the trip must be identified and rectified Note The built in units are equipped with shock hazard protection in accordance with BGV A 3 to DIN 57 106 Part 100 VDE 0106 Part 100 Note On line systems with a grounded phase conductor and a line voltage gt 600 V AC line side components should be installed to limit overvoltages to overvoltage category II in accordance with IEC 60664 1 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Electrical installation 4 4 Introduction to EMC 4 4 Introduction to EMC What is meant by EMC Electromagnetic compatibility EMC describes the capability of an electrical device to function satisfactorily in an electromagnetic environment without itself causing interference unacceptable for other devices in the environment EMC therefore represents a quality feature for
322. r data sets in p0130 may not exceed the number of drive data sets in p0180 Example of data set assignment Table 6 2 Example data set assignment DDS Motor p0186 Encoder 1 p0187 Encoder 2 p0188 Encoder 3 p0189 DDS 0 MDS 0 EDS 0 EDS 1 EDS 2 DDS 1 MDS 0 EDS 0 EDS 3 DDS 2 MDS 0 EDS 0 EDS 4 EDS 5 DDS 3 MDS 1 EDS 0 140 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 3 Basic information about the drive system Copying the command data set CDS Set parameter p0809 as follows 1 p0809 0 number of the command data set to be copied source 2 p0809 1 number of the command data to which the data is to be copied target 3 p0809 2 1 Start copying Copying is finished when p0809 2 0 Copying the drive data set DDS Set parameter p0819 as follows 1 p0819 0 Number of the drive data set to be copied source 2 p0819 1 Number of the drive data set to which the data is to be copied target 3 p0819 2 1 Start copying Copying is finished when p0819 2 0 Copy motor data set MDS Set parameter p0139 as follows 1 p0139 0 Number of the motor data set that is to be copied source 2 p0139 1 Number of the motor data set which should be copied into target 3 p0139 2 1 Start copying Copying has been completed if p0139 2 0 Function diagram FP 8560 FP 8565 FP 8570 FP 8575 Inverte
323. r example are transferred here Depending on their application these variables are generally normalized via parameters p2000 to p2004 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 167 Operation 6 6 PROFIBUS 6 6 6 Description of status words and actual values Overview Table 6 12 Overview of status words and actual values Abbreviation Description Parameters Function diagram ZSW 1 Status word 1 interface mode SINAMICS See table Status word 1 interface FP2452 MICROMASTER p2038 0 mode SINAMICS MICROMASTER p2038 0 ZSW 1 Status word 1 interface mode PROFldrive See table Status word 1 interface FP2451 VIK NAMUR p2038 2 mode PROFIdrive VIK NAMUR p2038 2 N_act_A Speed setpoint A 16 bit r0063 0 FP4715 N_act_B Speed setpoint B 32 bit r0063 FP4710 la_act Actual value of current r0068 0 FP6714 M_act Actual torque value r0080 0 FP6714 P_act Actual power value r0082 0 FP6714 N_act_SMOOTH Actual speed smoothed r0063 1 FP4715 la_act_ SMOOTH Current actual value smoothed r0068 1 FP6714 M_act_SMOOTH Torque actual value smoothed r0080 1 FP6714 P_act_ SMOOTH Power actual value smoothed r0082 1 FP6714 MELD_NAMUR VIK NAMUR message bit bar r3113 see table NAMUR message bit bar WARN_CODE Alarm code r2132 FP8065 ERROR_CODE Error code r2131 FP8060 Inverter chassis units 168 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation
324. r level control e Tension control The technology controller features e Two scalable setpoints e Scalable output signal e Separate fixed values e Separate motorized potentiometer e The output limits can be activated and deactivated via the ramp function generator e The D component can be switched to the system deviation or actual value channel e The motorized potentiometer of the technology controller is only active when the drive pulses are enabled The technology controller is designed as a PID controller whereby the differentiator can be switched to the control deviation channel or the actual value channel factory setting The P I and D components can be set separately A value of 0 deactivates the corresponding component Setpoints can be specified via two connector inputs The setpoints can be scaled via parameters p2255 and p2256 A ramp function generator in the setpoint channel can be used to set the setpoint ramp up ramp down time via parameters p2257 and p2258 The setpoint and actual value channel each have a smoothing element The smoothing time can be set via parameters p2261 and p2265 The setpoints can be specified via separate fixed setpoints p2201 to p2215 the motorized potentiometer or via the field bus e g PROFIBUS Pre control can be integrated via a connector input Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Functions monitoring and protective functions Commissi
325. r must be greater than p1755 Closed loop operation up to approx 1 Hz settable via parameter p1755 and the ability to start or reverse at 0 Hz directly in closed loop operation settable via parameter p1750 result in the following benefits No switchover required within closed loop control smooth operation no dips in frequency Stationary speed torque control up to approx 1 Hz Note When the motor is started or reversed in closed loop control mode at 0 Hz you must remember that a switchover is made from closed loop to open loop control automatically if the system remains in the 0 Hz range for too long gt 2 s or gt p1758 Permanent magnet synchronous motors are always started and reversed in open loop operation The changeover speeds are set to 10 or 5 of the rated motor speed Changeover is not subject to any time condition p1758 is not evaluated Prevailing load torques motor or regenerative are adapted in open loop operation facilitating constant torque crossover to closed loop operation even under high static loads Whenever the pulses are enabled the rotor position is identified FD 6730 Interface to Motor Module p0305 Rated motor current r0331 Motor magnetizing current short circuit current p1610 Torque setpoint static SLVC p1611 Supplementary accelerating torque SLVC p1750 Motor model configuration p1755 Motor model changeover speed encoderless operation p1756 Motor model changeover sp
326. re is a problem with the unit Problems with the unit cannot be ruled out after the firmware has been upgraded Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Technical specifications 1 2 12 1 Chapter content This chapter provides information on the following e General and specific technical specifications for the devices e Information on restrictions that apply when the devices are used in unfavorable ambient conditions derating Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 347 Technical specifications 12 2 General specifications 12 2 Table 12 1 General specifications General technical specifications Electrical data Line frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz Output frequency 0 Hz to 300 Hz Line power factor total fundamental 20 98 factor 0 93 to 0 96 Converter efficiency gt 98 Switching at input Mechanical data Once every 3 minutes Degree of protection IP20 frame sizes FX and GX IPOO frame sizes HX and JX Class of protection To EN 50178 Part 1 Cooling method Sound pressure level Touch protection Forced air cooling lt 73 dB A at 50 Hz line frequency lt 75 dB A at 60 Hz line frequency BGVA3 Compliance with standards Standards EN 60 146 1 EN 61 800 2 EN 61 800 3 EN 50 178 EN 60 204 1 EN 60 529 CE mark To EMC directive No 89 336 EC and low voltage directive No 73 23 EC
327. requency for information on derating data see Derating data 4 The types of protection specified here are mandatory for installing a UL approved system 356 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Technical specifications Table 12 10 Power Module 380 V 480 V 3 AC part 3 12 3 Technical specifications Category Unit Order number 6SL3310 1GE37 5AA0 1GE38 4AA0 1GE41 0AA0 Rated motor output At 400 V 50 Hz kW 400 450 560 At 460 V 60 Hz hp 600 700 800 Rated input voltage V 380 V to 480 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Rated input current A 775 873 1024 Rated output current A 745 840 985 Base load current IL A 725 820 960 Base load current IH 2 A 570 700 860 Max output frequency 3 Hz 100 100 100 Power loss kW 9 1 9 6 13 8 Max current requirements at 24 A 1 1 1 25 V DC Cooling air requirement m s 0 78 0 78 1 48 Sound pressure level at 50 60 Hz dB A 70 73 70 73 72 75 Line connection Maximum DIN VDE mm2 4 x 240 4 x 240 6 x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 500 4 x 500 6 x 500 Fixing screw M12 M12 M12 Motor connection Maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 6 x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 500 4 x 500 6 x 500 Fixing screw M12 M12 M12 Protective conductor connection Max PE1 GND mm 2 x 240 2 x 240 4 x 240 AWG MCM 2 x 500 2 x 500 4 x 500 Max PE2 GND mm 4 x 240 4x 240 6 x 240 AWG MCM 4 x 500 4 x 500 6 x 500 Fixing screw M
328. resetting parameters to the factory settings with AOP30 Advanced access level Setting the Extended access level on the operator panel 7 lt Key pushbutton gt lt Access level gt Set Extended Select parameter reset Setting the parameter filter to Parameter reset lt MENU gt lt Commissioning Service gt lt Device commissioning gt lt OK gt lt 30 Parameter Reset gt lt OK gt Reset all parameters to factory settings The factory settings for all the device parameters are restored Parameter reset via STARTER With STARTER the parameters are reset in online mode The required steps are described below Step Selection in toolbar Choose Project gt Connect to target system i J a Click the drive unit whose parameters you want to reset to the factory settings and click Restore factory settings icon in the toolbar Inverter chassis units 128 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Commissioning 5 7 Parameter reset to factory settings Step Selection in toolbar To confirm click OK Restore Factory Settings Do you really want to restore the factory settings Bus address and baud rate will not be reset Restore factory settings IV Save factory settings to ROM Cancel Choose Target system gt Copy from RAM to ROM Bs Note The Copy from RAM to ROM icon is only active when the drive unit is selected in the project navigator When the parameters ha
329. ring Telegrantiallure mierenie a E E A cti baii 161 6 6 4 Telegrams and process datana iinan EE NEA EEEE EEEE EEES 161 6 6 5 Description of control words and setpoints oooooocnncnnonocccnncnononnononncnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnn nano nn nn cnn cnn 163 6 6 6 Description of status words and actual ValU8s oooonninciccncnnncnnnococcconcncnnnnonccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnn 168 6 7 PRORFINE TIO eena a a dc cea onet avian doesent hats Bec iain oadawaeadsvaleeocaseatened Guan Betas 174 6 7 1 Communication Board Ethernet CBE20 ccccccceeceeeececceeeeeeeeceneaeeeeeeesesesaeeeeeeeeesenieeeeeeeetees 174 6 7 2 Activating online operation STARTER via PROFINET lO 1 0 0 0 eeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeaaes 176 6 7 3 General information about PROFINET IO 0 ceeceeeceeeenecceeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeesecaeeeeeeeseeenieeeeeeeeneees 182 6 7 3 1 General information about PROFINET lO for SINAMICS c cceececeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseesteeeeeees 182 6 7 3 2 Real time RT and isochronous real time IRT COMMUNICATION eee eee etteee cette teeeenteeeeeeaee 182 0 13 3 CAGGIESSES A a a a cites ts ge ad a Peace Araceae a ged aiaa Pelee eaves dae delete 184 0 13 44 Data tranSMISSiOn ciclones obec liducee anos tected Seb aeia a a aaas 185 6 7 4 Hardware Setup st a ccssia tctecditeentahiate lili ist ti 186 6 7 4 1 Configuring SINAMICS drives with PROFINET 22 2 ecceceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseceenaeceeeeeeesnnieaeeeeeess 186 6 7
330. rive filter type 0 no filter p0700cMacro BI 1 Profidrive p1000cMacro Cl n_target 1 Profidrive Help A v OK F1 F2 F3 F4 FS t y 2 VECTOR basic commissioning d 0 p1070cMain setpoint 02 02050 001 p1080dMinimum speed 0 000 min 1 p1082dMaximum speed LR min 1 p1120dHLG Ramp up time 20 000 s Help A v OK F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 T y p1120dHLG Ramp up time p1121dHLG Ramp down time p1135dHLG OFF3 t_R down Help A 2 VECTOR basic commissioning d 0 20 000 s 30 000 s 10 000 s OK ei e Fs Final confirmation Permanent parameter transfer execute with continue and OK Help v Contin OK rer Tre FS a Fs 5 5 First commissioning Entering the basic commissioning parameters If a sine wave filter is connected it must be activated in p0230 p0230 3 4 Otherwise it could be destroyed p0700 Preset command source 1 PROF Idrive 2 TM31 terminals 3 CU terminals 4 PROF Idrive TM31 p1000 Preset setpoint source 1 PROF Idrive 2 TM31 terminals 3 Motorized potentiometer 4 Fixed setpoint Once a setpoint source has been selected p1000 the main setpoint p1070 is defaulted accordingly To navigate through the selection fields choose lt F2 gt or lt F3 gt To activate a selection choose lt F5 gt To change a parameter value navigate to the required selection field a
331. rive object numbers e 10102 Number of drive objects e p0107 Drive object type e p0108 Drive object configuration Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 3 3 Description 6 3 Basic information about the drive system Data sets For many applications it is beneficial if more than one parameter can be changed simultaneously by means of one external signal during operation when the system is ready for operation This can be carried out using indexed parameters whereby the parameters are grouped together in a data set according to their functionality and indexed Indexing allows several different settings which can be activated by switching the data set to be defined in each parameter Note The command and drive data sets can be copied in STARTER Drive gt Configuration gt Command data sets or Drive data sets tab The displayed command and drive data sets can be selected in the associated STARTER screen forms CDS Command data set Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A The BICO parameters binector and connector inputs are grouped together in a command data set These parameters are used to interconnect the signal sources of a drive see Operation BICO technology Interconnecting signals By parameterizing several command data sets and switching between them the drive can be operated with different pre configured signal sourc
332. rminal Designation Technical specifications 1 P24 As input 2 DI DO 8 Voltage 3 V to 30 V 3 DI DO 9 Current input typical 10 mA at 24 V DC 4 DI DO 10 As output 5 DI DO 11 The aggregate current of the four digital outputs is software limited 6 M e at p4046 0 100 mA factory setting e atp4046 1 1A Continued short circuit proof 1 DI DO Digital input output M Electronic ground Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm AWG 14 Note An open input is interpreted as low When externally generated 24 V DC signals are connected the ground must also be connected CAUTION The aggregate current set via p4046 must be provided via the external electronic power supply Due to the limitation of the aggregate of the output currents an over current can cause a short circuit on an output terminal or even intrusion of the signal of a different terminal Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 71 Electrical installation 4 10 Signal connections X542 2 relay outputs two way contact Table 4 28 Terminal block X542 Terminal 1 Designation DO 0 NC DO 0 COM DO 0 NO DO 1 NC DO 1 COM D N 2B 0 N DO 1 NO Technical specifications Max load current 8 A Max switching voltage 250 V AC 30 V DC Max switching voltage at 250 V AC 2000 VA at 30 V DC 240 W ohmic load Required minimum load 20 m
333. rter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 101 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Configuring the motor and entering optional data Configuration SINAMICS_G130 Optional Motor Data Drive unit Options Control structure Drive setting Motor Motor data K K K K K K Equivalent Circuit C Calculation of the f Motor holding brake Encoder Defaults of the setg Drive functions PROFIBUS proces Important paramete Summary ii gt A Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 MDS 0 Motor data Induction motor rotary Motor rated magnetization current short circ 91 000 Arms Maximum motor speed 5000 0 RPM Motor moment of inertia 0 666000 kgm Ratio between the total and motor moment of 1 000 Motor weight kg Cable resistance 0 00000 Ohm Motor series inductance 0 000 mH The optional motor data do not have to be entered completely Note Unknown data must be set to their default values If you want to reset all optional data you must deselect their input on the Motor Data page lt Back A Cancel Help Figure 5 19 Entering optional motor data 20 If necessary enter the optional motor data 21 Click Continue gt 102 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Configuring the motor and entering the equivalent circuit diagram data
334. s Digital and analog signals which can be connected freely by means of BICO parameters are identified by the prefix Bl BO Cl or CO in their parameter name These parameters are identified accordingly in the parameter list or in the function diagrams Note The STARTER parameterization and commissioning tool is recommended when using BICO technology Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 3 Basic information about the drive system Binectors BI binector input BO Binector output A binector is a digital binary signal without a unit which can assume the value 0 or 1 Binectors are subdivided into binector inputs signal sink and binector outputs signal source Table 6 3 Binectors Abbreviation and Name Description symbol Binector input Can be interconnected to a binector output as BY Binector Input source The number of the binector output must be signal sink entered as a parameter value Binector output Can be used as a source for a binector input so Binector output signal source Connectors Cl connector input CO connector output A connector is a digital signal e g in 32 bit format It can be used to emulate words 16 bits double words 32 bits or analog signals Connectors are subdivided into connector inputs signal sink and connector outputs signal source The options for interconnecting connectors are restricted
335. s Certif E oH 0 87 1485 No 235 Rotor SOU CAGE Kt 13 ENEC O MEC 6 034 1___GewNvt_1 3t__ i Figure 5 35 Example of a motor type plate Table 5 1 Motor data Parameter no Values Unit System of units for line frequency and entering p0100 0 IEC 50 Hz kW motor data 1 NEMA 60 Hz hp Motor Rated voltage p0304 M Rated current p0305 A Rated output p0307 kW hp Rated power factor Cos at p0100 0 only p0308 Rated efficiency at p0100 1 only p0309 Rated frequency p0310 Hz Rated speed p0311 min 1 rpm Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 121 Commissioning 5 5 First commissioning Basic commissioning Selecting the motor type and entering the motor data 2 VECTOR motor standard motor type p0100 Motor standard IEC NEMA 0 IEC 50Hz kW p0300m motor type selection 1 Async_motor Contin Help A v OK F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 y 2 VECTOR motor parameter m 0 p0210 supply voltage E aoojv p0304mMot U_Bemes MI v rms p0305mMot I _Bemes 405 00 Aeff p0307mMot P_Bemes 235 00 kW Help A v OK t y You can select the motor standard and type in the dialog screen The following is defined for the motor standard 0 Line frequency 50 Hz motor data in kW 1 line frequency 60 Hz motor data in hp The following selection opti
336. s after replacing DRIVE CLiQ components 11 6 Messages after replacing DRIVE CLiQ components After DRIVE CLiQ components are replaced Control Interface Board TM31 SMCxx when service is required generally after power up a message is not output The reason for this is that an identical component is detected and accepted as spare part when running up If unexpectedly a fault message of the topology fault category is displayed then when replacing a component one of the following faults errors should have occurred e A Control Interface Board with different firmware data was installed e When connecting up DRIVE CLiQ cables connections were interchanged Automatic firmware update As of firmware 2 5 an automatic firmware update can be carried out once the electronics have been powered up on replacement DRIVE CLiQ components e The following LEDs will flash slowly to indicate that an automatic firmware update is in progress the RDY LED on the Control Unit orange 0 5 Hz and an LED on the relevant DRIVE CLiQ component green red 0 5 Hz e Once the automatic firmware update is complete the RDY LED on the Control Unit will flash quickly orange 2 Hz along with an LED on the relevant DRIVE CLiQ component green red 2 Hz e To complete the automatic firmware update process a POWER ON is required switch the device off and back on again Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 345 Ma
337. s case excess regenerative energy can only be dissipated via an additional braking resistor Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Functions monitoring and protective functions Description of Vdc_max control Function diagram Parameters Inverter chassis units V Controller active i Figure 9 5 In 9 2 Drive functions Switch on level Activating deactivating the Vdc_max control The switch on level of the Vdc_max control r1242 or r1282 is calculated as follows e when the automatic switch in level sensing is disabled p1254 0 r1242 r1282 1 15 x p0210 device supply voltage DC link FD 6220 FP 6320 p1240 p1280 r1242 r1282 p1243 p1283 p1245 p1285 p1246 p1286 p1247 p1287 p1250 p1290 p1251 p1291 p1252 p1292 p1293 p1254 p1294 p1255 p1295 p1256 p1296 p1257 p1297 r1258 r1298 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A e when the automatic switch on level sensing is enabled p1254 1 11242 r1282 Vdc_max 50 V Vdc_max overvoltage threshold of the converter Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller Vdc controller configuration Vdc_min controller switch in level Vdc_max controller dynamic factor Vdc_min controller switch in level Vdc_min controller switch in level Vdc_min controller dynamic factor Vdc controller proportional gain Vdc controller integral action time Vdc controller derivative action time
338. s shutdown e g OFF 2 or a power failure The drive slowly coasts to a standstill as a result of the kinetic energy stored in the drive train example induced draft fan with a high moment of inertia and a steeply descending load characteristic in the lower speed range In accordance with the setting chosen p1200 the flying restart function is activated in the following situations e Once power has been restored and the automatic restart function is active e After a shutdown with the OFF2 command pulse inhibit when the automatic restart Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 253 function is active When the ON command is issued Note The flying restart function must be used when the motor may still be running or is being driven by the load to prevent shutdowns due to overcurrent F7801 Note If the value set for parameter p1203 search speed factor is higher the search curve is flatter and as a result the search time is longer A lower value has the opposite effect In motors with a low moment of inertia the flying restart function can cause the drive to accelerate slightly In group drives the flying restart function should not be activated due to the different coasting properties of the individual motors Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 2 Drive functions 9 2 5 1 Flying restart without encoder Description Depending on parameter p1200 the f
339. sistance this should be entered in p0352 before motor data identification is carried out p1900 p1910 To deactivate thermal adaptation set p0620 0 This may be necessary if adaptation cannot function accurately enough due to the following supplementary conditions For example if a KTY sensor is not used for temperature detection and the ambient temperatures fluctuate significantly or the overtemperatures of the motor p0626 p0628 deviate significantly from the default settings due to the design of the motor FP 4715 Actual speed value and rotor position measurement motor encoder FD 6030 Speed setpoint droop FP 6040 Speed controller FP 6050 Kp_n Tn_n adaptation FP 6060 Torque setpoint FP 6490 Speed control configuration Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder 7 4 3 Speed controller Description Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Both closed loop control techniques with and without encoder SLVC VC have the same speed controller structure that contains the following components as kernel e Pl controller e Speed controller pre control e Droop Function The torque setpoint is generated from the total of the output variables and reduced to the permissible magnitude by means of torque setpoint limitation The speed controller receives its setpoint rO062
340. specified condition of the chassis unit Dirt and contamination must be removed regularly and parts subject to wear replaced The following points must generally be observed 11 2 1 Cleaning Dust deposits Ventilation Dust deposits inside the chassis unit must be removed at regular intervals or at least once a year by qualified personnel in line with the relevant safety regulations The unit must be cleaned using a brush and vacuum cleaner and dry compressed air max 1 bar for areas that cannot be easily reached When installing the devices in a cabinet make sure that the cabinet ventilation slots are not obstructed The fan must be checked to make sure that it is functioning correctly Cable and screw terminals 306 Cable and screw terminals must be checked regularly to ensure that they are secure in position and if necessary retightened Cabling must be checked for defects Defective parts must be replaced immediately Note The actual intervals at which maintenance procedures are to be performed depend on the installation conditions and the operating conditions Siemens offers its customers support in the form of a service contract For further details contact your regional office or sales office Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Maintenance and servicing 11 3 Maintenance 11 3 Maintenance 11 3 1 Maintenance Servicing involves activities and procedures for maintain
341. ssioning Function diagrams To supplement these operating instructions the CD contains simplified function diagrams describing the operating principle of the SINAMICS G130 The diagrams are arranged in accordance with the chapters in the operating instructions The page numbers 6xx describe the functionality in the following chapter At certain points in this chapter reference is made to function diagrams with a 4 digit number These are stored on the CD in the SINAMICS G List Manual which provides experienced users with detailed descriptions of all the functions Inverter chassis units 132 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 3 Basic information about the drive system 6 3 Basic information about the drive system 6 3 1 Parameters Overview The drive is adapted to the relevant drive task by means of parameters Each parameter is identified by a unique parameter number and by specific attributes e g read write BICO attribute group attribute and so on The parameters can be accessed via the following means e PC with the STARTER commissioning tool via PROFIBUS e The user friendly AOP30 Operator Panel Parameter types The following adjustable and visualization parameters are available e Adjustable parameters write read These parameters have a direct impact on the behavior of a function Example Ramp up and ramp down time of a ramp function generator e Visualization parameters read only T
342. structions 07 07 A5E00331449A Commissioning 5 5 First commissioning 5 5 First commissioning 5 5 1 First commissioning Start screen When the system is switched on for the first time the Control Unit CU320 is initialized automatically The following screen is displayed SIEMENS Figure 5 33 Initial screen When the system boots up the parameter descriptions are loaded into the operating field from the CompactFlash card NOTE Load parameter description AN T T T T T 0 50 100 PLEASE WAIT F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 Figure 5 34 Load the parameter descriptions while booting up the system Selecting the language When the system is first booted up a screen for selecting the language appears Sprachauswahl Language selection You can select the language in the dialog English screen Deutsch Francais Espa ol To change the language choose lt F2 gt or Italiano lt F3 gt Chinese To select the language choose lt F5 gt Ma a El MA El Once the language has been selected the booting up process continues Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 119 Commissioning 5 5 First commissioning Once the system has successfully ramped up the drive has to be commissioned when the system is switched on for the first time after it has been delivered The converter can then be switched on When
343. structions 07 07 A5E00331449A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Preparatory steps Removal Installation Inverter chassis units e Disconnect the chassis unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access to the power block e Remove the protective cover The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with the diagram Remove the busbars 12 screws Unscrew the connection to the DC link 8 nuts Remove the retaining screw at the top 1 screw Remove the retaining screws at the bottom 2 screws Disconnect the plugs for the fiber optic cables and signal cables 3 plugs oOah wWhHD Remove the connection for the current transformer and associated PE connection 2 plugs 7 Unscrew the two retaining screws for the fan and attach the tool for de installing the power block at this position You can now remove the power block CAUTION When removing the power block ensure that you do not damage any signal cables For re installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current carrying parts must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 319 Maintenance
344. supply e Allow unimpeded access to the power block e Remove the protective cover Removal steps The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with the diagram Unscrew the connection to the outgoing motor section 3 screws Unscrew the connection to the line supply 3 screws Remove the retaining screws at the top 2 screws Remove the retaining screws at the bottom 2 screws Remove the DRIVE CLiQ cables and connections to the CU320 5 plugs Remove the CU320 mounts 1 screw and 2 nuts If necessary remove the PROFIBUS plug and connection to the operator panel X140 on the CU320 and remove the CU320 Oona fF OO N gt N Disconnect the plugs for the fiber optic cables and signal cables 5 plugs 8 Disconnect the plug for the thermocouple 9 Unscrew the two retaining screws for the fan and attach the tool for de installing the power block at this position You can now remove the power block CAUTION When removing the power block ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation steps For installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current conducting parts must be observed Carefully establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwed union connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand
345. supply line The contactors are activated by the converter The feedback signals for the contactor positions have to be returned to the converter The bypass circuit can be implemented in two ways without synchronizing the motor to the supply and with synchronizing the motor to the supply The following applies to all bypass versions Prerequisites The bypass switch is also shut down when one of the OFF2 or OFF3 control word signals is canceled Exception If necessary the bypass switch can be interlocked by a higher level controller such that the converter can be shut down completely i e including the controller electronics while the motor is operated on the supply The protective interlocking must be implemented on the system side When the converter is started up again after POWER OFF the status of the bypass contactors is evaluated After powering up the converter can thereby change straight into Ready to start and bypass status This is only possible if the bypass is activated via a control signal the control signal p1266 is still present once the system has been ramped up and the automatic restart function p1200 4 is active Changing the converter into Ready to start and bypass status after powering up is of a higher priority than switching back on automatically Monitoring of the motor temperatures using temperature sensors is active while the converter is in one of two statuses Ready to start and by
346. t 0 10 V Prerequisites e The Power Module CU320 and TM31 have been correctly installed e The TM31 terminals or PROF Idrive TM31 default setting was chosen during commissioning STARTER TM31 terminals or PROF Idrive TM31 AOP30 2 TM31 terminals or 4 PROF Idrive TM31 Signal flow diagram AO signal p4071 AO_type Smoothing Curr U I p4076 Actual Speed value p4073 14074 AO 0V Voltage output X522 1 Output current DC link voltage 10070 Output power 70082 Scaling Figure 8 1 Signal flow diagram analog output O Function diagram FD 1840 TM31 analog outputs AO 0 AO 1 FD 9572 Inverter chassis units 232 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Output terminals 8 2 TM31 analog outputs Parameters e p4071 Analog outputs signal source e p4073 Analog outputs smoothing time constant e 14074 Analog outputs actual output voltage current e p4076 Analog outputs type e p4077 Analog outputs characteristic value x1 e p4078 Analog outputs characteristic value y1 e p4079 Analog outputs characteristic value x2 e p4080 Analog outputs characteristic value y2 8 2 1 List of signals for the analog signals List of signals for the analog outputs Table 8 1 List of signals for the analog outputs Signal Parameters Unit Scaling 100 See table below Speed setpoint before the setpoint filter r0060 rom p2000 Motor
347. t Binector connector Binector output Capacitance Serial bus system Communication board Command data set Connector input Center contact on a changeover contact Control Unit Direct current Drive data set Digital input Digital input output bidirectional Digital output Electrostatic devices Electromagnetic compatibility European standard Fault Frequently asked questions Firmware 369 Appendix A 1 List of abbreviations 370 NEMA NO P Pp PDS PE PROFIBUS PTC R e RAM RS 232 RS 485 SI STW SW TIA TM UL Vdc ZSW Ramp function generator Hardware Input output International electrical engineering standard Insulated gate bipolar transistor Jog mode Inductance Light emitting diode Ground Motor data set Normally closed contact Standardization body in the USA United States of America Normally open contact Adjustable parameter Power unit data set Protective earth Serial data bus Positive temperature coefficient Visualization parameter read only Read and write memory Serial interface Standard Describes the physical characteristics of a digital serial interface Safety Integrated PROFldrive control word Software Totally Integrated Automation Terminal Module Underwriters Laboratories Inc DC link voltage PROFldrive status word Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Appendix A 2 Parameter macros Par
348. t limits the torque differences that can occur as a result of the mechanical connection between the motors by modifying the speeds of the individual motors drive is relieved when the torque becomes too great Droop injection P1488 Speed setpoint Torque setpoint AC dios aa 1 p n Only active if pre control is active SLVC p1452 p1470 p1472 PRD pi442 pia60 p1462 Encoderless VC only Figure 7 15 Speed controller with droop e All connected drives must be operated with vector and speed control with or without speed actual value encoder e Only one single common ramp function generator may be used for mechanically coupled drives Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 223 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder Function diagram FP 6030 Speed setpoint droop Parameters e r0079 Total speed setpoint e 11482 Speed controller torque output e p1488 Droop input source e p1489 Droop feedback scaling e 11490 Droop feedback speed reduction e p1492 Droop feedback enable e 11508 Torque setpoint before supplementary torque 7 4 4 Closed loop torque control Description For sensorless closed loop speed control p1300 20 or closed loop speed control with encoder VC p1300 21 it is possible to change over to closed loop torque control using BICO parameter p1501 It is not possible to change over between closed loop speed and torque
349. t machines and personnel the relevant safety regulations must be observed Note If speed controller optimization is carried out for operation with an encoder the control mode will be changed over to encoderless speed control automatically in order to be able to carry out the encoder test r0047 Status identification p1300 Open loop closed loop control operating mode p1900 Motor data identification and rotating measurement p1959 Speed controller optimization configuration p1960 Speed controller optimization selection p1961 Saturation characteristic speed for calculation p1965 Speed controller optimization speed p1967 Speed controller optimization dynamic factor r1969 Speed controller optimization inertia identified r3925 Identification complete indicator r3927 Motld control word r3928 Rotating measurement configuration Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 2 Drive functions 9 2 2 Efficiency optimization Description The following can be achieved when optimizing efficiency using p1580 e Lower motor losses in the partial load range e Minimization of noise in the motor p1580 0 p1570 50 p1570 x 0 75 100 W p1570x0 5 i igsetp p1570 x r0331 2 1570 x r0331 10077 Figure 9 3 Efficiency optimization It only makes sense to activate this function if the dynamic response requirements of the speed controller are low
350. tchover EDS encoder data set MDS Motor data set r 1 1 1 Option Board Drive Data set independent Drive parameters DDS Drive data set Motor selection Encoder selection 1 Encoder selection 2 Encoder selection 3 Figure 6 2 Parameter categories Inverter chassis units 134 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 3 Basic information about the drive system 6 3 2 Drive objects A drive object is a self contained software function with its own parameters and if necessary its own faults and alarms Drive objects can be provided as standard e g I O evaluation or you can add single e g option board or multiple objects e g drive control Control Unit Drive objects Eva Eva E Eva Eva E luation Drive luation luation ee luation onboard control Option Terminal Terminal Board i Module Module Terminal Module Terminal Figure 6 3 Drive objects Drive objects available as standard e Drive control Drive control handles closed loop control of the motor One Power Module at least one motor and up to three sensors are assigned to drive control e Control Unit inputs outputs The inputs outputs on the Control Unit are evaluated within a drive object High speed inputs for probes are processed here in addition to bidirectional digital I Os Properties of a drive object e Separate parameter space e S
351. ted when the speed controller is optimized in order to achieve a greater dynamic response in the base speed range Example of speed dependent adaptation Note This type of adaptation is only active in operation with encoder mode Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 221 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder Function diagram Parameters 222 Kon Proportional gain Tnn Integral time p1463xp1462 i with adaptation without adaptation 0 p1464 p1465 7 Constant lower speed range n lt p1464 2 Adaptation range p1464 lt n lt p1465 3 Constant upper speed range n gt p1465 Figure 7 14 Example of speed dependent adaptation FP 6050 Kp_n Tn_n adaptation e p1400 5 Speed control configuration Kp Tn adaptation active Free Kp_n adaptation e p1455 Speed controller P gain adaptation signal e p1456 Speed controller P gain adaptation lower starting point e p1457 Speed amplifier P gain adaptation upper starting point e p1458 Adaptation factor lower e p1459 Adaptation factor upper e p1470 Speed controller encoderless operation P gain Speed dependent Kp_n Tn_n adaptation VC only e p1460 Speed controller P gain adaptation speed lower e p1461 Speed controller P gain adaptation speed upper e p1462 Speed controller integral time adaptation speed lower e p1463 Speed controller integral time adaptation spe
352. telegram selection Vector 999 Free telegram configuration p1020 FSW bit 0 Vector 0 p1021 FSW bit 1 Vector 0 p1035 MOP raise Vector r2090 13 PZD 1 bit 13 Vector p1036 MOP lower Vector r2090 14 PZD 1 bit 14 Vector p1055 Jog bit 0 Vector 0 p1056 Jog bit 1 Vector 0 p1113 Direction reversal Vector r2090 11 PZD 1 bit 11 Vector p1140 Enable RFG Vector r2090 4 PZD 1 bit 4 Vector p1141 Start RFG Vector r2090 5 PZD 1 bit 5 Vector p1142 Enable nsetp Vector r2090 6 PZD 1 bit 6 Vector p2103 1 Acknowledge faults Vector 1r2090 7 PZD 1 bit 7 Vector p2104 2 Acknowledge faults Vector r0722 3 CU DI3 TM31 p2106 Ext fault_1 Vector r0722 6 CU DI6 CU p2107 Ext fault_2 Vector 1 p2112 Ext alarm_1 Vector r0722 11 CU DI11 CU p2116 Ext alarm_2 Vector 1 p0738 DI DO8 CU r0899 11 Pulses enabled Vector p0748 8 Invert DI DO8 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 8 Set DI DO8 input or output CU 1 Output CU p0739 DI DO9 CU 12139 3 Fault active Vector p0748 9 Invert DI DO9 CU 1 inverted p0728 9 Set DI DO9 input or output CU 1 Output CU p0740 DI DO10 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 10 Invert DI DO10 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 10 Set DI DO10 input or output CU 1 Output CU p0741 DI DO11 CU 0 CU p0748 1 1 Invert DI DO11 CU 0 Not inverted Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 373 Appendix A 2 Parameter macros Sink Source Parameters Description DO Parameters Description
353. tential bonding conductor connection X126 PROFIBUS CompactFlash card TO T2 Test sockets BOP slot RESET button Rating plate N X140 PROFIBUS address switches Ey Serial interface Ground Protective conductor connection M5 3 Nm M5 3Nm Figure 4 9 Overview of connections for CU320 Control Unit without cover Note The CompactFlash card may only be inserted and removed when the Control Unit is disconnected from the power supply If it is inserted and removed when the power supply is connected this can result in data being lost Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 57 Electrical installation 4 10 Signal connections X100 X103 DRIVE CLiQ interface Table 4 11 DRIVE CLiQ interface X100 X103 Pin Signal name Technical specifications 1 TXP Transmit data 2 TXN Transmit data 3 RXP Receive data 4 Reserved do not use 5 Reserved do not use 6 RXN Receive data 7 Reserved do not use 8 Reserved do not use A 24 V Power supply B GND 0 V Electronic ground Blanking plate for DRIVE CLiQ interface Tyco order no 969556 5 X122 Digital inputs outputs Table 4 12 Terminal block X122 Technical specifications Voltage 3 V to 30 V Typical power consumption 10 mA at 24 V DC Isolation reference potential is terminal M1 High level
354. the e Internal noise immunity Resistance to internal electrical disturbances e External noise immunity resistance against external electromagnetic disturbances e Noise emission level environmental effects caused by electromagnetic emissions To ensure that the cabinet unit functions satisfactorily in the system the environment subject to interference must not be neglected For this reason special requirements exist regarding the structure and the EMC of the system Operational reliability and noise immunity In order to achieve the greatest possible operational reliability and immunity to noise of a complete system converter automation drive machines etc measures must be taken by the converter manufacturer and the user Only when all of these measures have been taken are the satisfactory function of the converter and compliance with the legal requirements 89 336 EEC ensured Noise emissions Product standard EN 61800 3 outlines the EMC requirements for variable speed drive systems It specifies requirements for converters with operating voltages of less than 1000 V Different environments and categories are defined depending on where the drive system is installed Medium voltage network Distribution of conducted I faults l Public low voltage network Industrial low voltage network Measuring point for conducted faults First environment environment Limit of facility 1
355. the system is then ramped up again it can be operated immediately Navigation within the interactive screens Within an interactive screen the selection boxes can usually be selected using the lt F2 gt and or lt F3 gt keys Selection fields are generally texts surrounded by a frame When they are selected they are highlighted with a white text on a black background The present value of a highlighted selection box can usually be changed by pressing lt F5 gt OK and or Change Another entry box then appears and the value you want is entered directly using the numerical keypad or can be selected from a list You can change from one interactive screen to the next or previous screen by selecting the Next or Previous selection boxes and then confirming by pressing lt F5 gt OK If a screen contains particularly important parameters the selection field Continue only appears at the bottom of the screen This is because every single parameter in this interactive screen has to be checked and or corrected thoroughly before the next interactive screen can be accessed 5 5 2 Basic commissioning Entering the motor data 120 During initial commissioning you have to enter motor data using the operator panel Use the data shown on the motor type plate Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Commissioning 5 5 First commissioning 3 MOT 1LA8 q T 315 No N 1107840010001 2002 IMB3 cosy 1min Te
356. ting Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 123 Commissioning 5 5 First commissioning 124 Note If the connected encoder does not match any of the encoders predefined in p0400 follow the simple procedure below for entering the encoder data e Via p0400 select an encoder type whose data is similar to that of the connected encoder e Select User defined encoders p0400 9999 Previously set values are stored here e Adjust the bit fields of p0404 p0405 and p0408 to the data for the connected encoder Table 5 2 Meaning of the bit setting for p0404 Bit Meaning Value 0 Value 1 20 Voltage 5 V No yes 21 Voltage 24 V No yes Table 5 3 Meaning of the bit settings for p0405 Bit Meaning Value 0 Value 1 0 Signal Unipolar Bipolar 1 Level HTL TTL 2 Track monitoring None A B gt lt A B 3 Zero pulse 24 V unipolar Same as A B track CAUTION damaged Once the encoder has been commissioned the supply voltage 5 24 V set for the encoder is activated on the SMC30 module If a 5 V encoder is connected and the supply voltage has not been set correctly via p0404 bit 20 Yes bit 21 No the encoder may be Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Commissioning Basic commissioning Entering the basic parameters 2 VECTOR basic commissioning Contin p0230 d
357. tion characteristic should if possible be determined during rotating measurement without encoder p1960 1 3 with encoder p1960 2 4 If the drive is operated in the field weakening range this characteristic should be determined for vector control in particular The magnetization characteristic can be used to calculate the field generating current in the field weakening range more accurately thereby increasing torque accuracy Note In comparison with standstill measurement p1910 for induction motors rotating measurement p1960 allows the rated magnetization current and saturation characteristic to be determined more accurately Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 241 Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 2 Drive functions Flow O 0 ipl ip A f HIA l Magnetization characteristic r0331 p0366 p0367 100 p0368 p0369 ip Figure 9 2 Magnetization characteristic Carrying out motor identification e Enter p1910 gt 0 Alarm A07991 is displayed e Identification starts when the motor is switched on e p1910 resets itself to 0 successful identification or fault FO7990 is output e 10047 displays the current status of the measurement Note To set the new controller setting permanently the data must be saved with p0977 or p0971 on the non volatile CompactFlash card NWARNING During motor identification the drive might set the motor in motion
358. tive device Module VSM10 i H Reactor i i K1 Nel Joe K2 Figure 9 10 Typical circuit diagram for bypass with synchronizer with degree of overlapping Activation The function with synchronizer with degree of overlapping p1260 1 function can only be activated using a control signal It cannot be activated using a speed threshold or a fault Inverter chassis units 274 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Functions monitoring and protective functions Parameterization Table 9 5 Parameter settings for bypass function with synchronizer with degree of overlapping 9 3 Extended functions Once the bypass with synchronizer with degree of overlapping p1260 1 function has been activated the following parameters must be set Parameters Description p1266 Control signal setting when p1267 0 1 p1267 0 1 Bypass function is initiated by the control signal p1267 1 0 p1269 0 Signal source for contactor K1 feedback p1269 1 Signal source for contactor K2 feedback p3800 1 The internal voltages are used for synchronization p3802 r1261 2 Synchronizer activation is triggered by the bypass function Transfer process p1266 Bypass command 1261 2 Request to synchronize sent by bypass function r3819 2 Synchronized r1261 1 Close contactor K2 p1269 1 Contactor K2 closed r1261 0 Close contactor K1 p1269 0 Contactor K1 closed A Motor i Converter Line
359. to Ready to start and bypass status If the appropriate contactors are being used the converter will be isolated from the line supply and the DC link discharged To transfer the motor back from the line supply the sequence is simply reversed At the start of the process contactor K2 is closed and contactor K1 is open e The Command bypass control bit is canceled e g by the higher level automation e The bypass function sets the control word bit synchronizing e The pulses are enabled Since synchronizing is set before pulse enable the converter interprets this as a command to retrieve the motor from the line supply e Once converter synchronization to line frequency line voltage and line phasing is complete the synchronization algorithm reports this state e The bypass mechanism evaluates this signal and closes contactor K1 The signal is evaluated internally BICO wiring is not required e Once contactor K1 has reported closed status contactor K2 is opened and the motor returns to operation on the converter 9 3 2 2 Bypass with synchronizer without degree of overlapping p1260 2 Description When Bypass with synchronizer without degree of overlapping p1260 2 is activated contactor K2 to be closed is only closed when contactor K1 is opened anticipatory type synchronization Phasing of the motor voltage before synchronization must be set such that there is an initial jump upstream of the supply to
360. to ensure that performance is not adversely affected Table 6 4 Connectors Abbreviation and Name Description symbol Connector input Can be interconnected to a connector output as a gt Connector input source The number of the connector output must be signal sink entered as a parameter value Connector output Can be used as a source for a connector input co gt Connector output signal source Interconnecting signals using BICO technology Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A To interconnect two signals a BICO input parameter signal sink must be assigned to the desired BICO output parameter signal source The following information is required in order to connect a binector connector input to a binector connector output e Binectors Parameter number bit number and drive object ID e Connectors with no index e Connectors with index Parameter number and drive object ID Parameter number index and drive object ID 143 Operation 6 3 Basic information about the drive system BO Binector output Bl Binector input CO Connector output Cl Connector input Signal source Signal sink Bl BO Cl CO with index Index 0 1 2 Figure 6 5 Interconnecting signals using BICO technology Note A signal source BO can be connected to any number of signal sinks BI A signal sink Bl can only ever be connected to one signal source B
361. torized potentiometer as the setpoint source Table A 8 Parameter macro p1000 3 Motorized potentiometer Sink Source Parameters Description DO Parameters Description DO p1070 Main setpoint Vector r1050 Motorized potentiometer Vector p1071 Main setpoint scaling Vector 1 100 Vector p1075 Supplementary setpoint Vector 0 Vector p1076 Supplementary setpoint scaling Vector 1 100 Vector Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 381 Appendix A 2 Parameter macros Parameter macro p1000 4 Fixed setpoint 100004 This macro is used to set the fixed setpoint as the setpoint source Table A 9 Parameter macro p1000 4 Fixed setpoint Sink Source Parameters Description DO Parameters Description DO p1070 Main setpoint Vector r1024 Active fixed setpoint Vector p1071 Main setpoint scaling Vector 1 100 Vector p1075 Supplementary setpoint Vector 0 Vector p1076 Supplementary setpoint scaling Vector 1 100 Vector Inverter chassis units 382 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Index A Analog inputs 69 155 Analog outputs 70 232 AOP30 118 Automatic restart 250 Automatic speed controller optimization 239 Auxiliary supply 53 Auxiliary Voltage 70 B Basic commissioning Enter the motor data 122 Entering the basic parameters 125 Selecting the motor type 122 Basic Commissioning Entering the encoder data 123 Motor identification 126 Basic i
362. ttings e p2900 0 n CO Fixed value_ _1 e p2901 0 n CO Fixed value_ _2 e p2930 0 n CO Fixed Value_M_1 Example These parameters can be used to interconnect the scaling factor for the main setpoint or to interconnect an additional torque Inverter chassis units 146 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 4 Command sources 6 4 1 PROFIdrive default setting Prerequisites e The Power Module and CU320 have been correctly installed 6 4 Command sources e The PROFIdrive default setting was chosen during commissioning e STARTER PROF Idrive e AOP30 1 G130 PROF Idrive Command sources r0807 Master control active LOCAL REMOTE key 0 REMOTE PROFIBUS 1 LOCAL operator panel Internal control CU320 terminals Figure 6 9 Command sources AOP30 gt PROF Idrive Priority The command source priorities are shown in the diagram Command sources AOP30 gt PROFIdrive Note All of the supplementary setpoints are deactivated for LOCAL master control Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 147 Operation 6 4 Command sources CU320 terminal assignment with PROFldrive default setting When you choose the PROFIdrive default setting the terminal assignment for CU320 is as follows
363. ule Advanced Operator Panel Y Q 2 o DC link components Braking Module with braking resistors Motor reactors dV dt filter with Voltage Peak Limiter Sine wave filter Induction motors Figure 2 1 Overview of the chassis units Inverter chassis units 18 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Device overview 2 3 Overview of the Power Modules 2 3 Overview of the Power Modules Control Unit CU320 SINAMICS Power Module frame size HX Power Module frame size JX Figure 2 2 Overview of the Power Modules Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 19 Device overview 2 4 Applications features and design 2 4 Applications features and design 2 4 1 Applications SINAMICS G130 chassis units are specially designed to meet the requirements of variable speed drives with a quadratic and constant load characteristic medium performance requirements and no regenerative feedback As a result SINAMICS G130 chassis units are a cost effective drive solution for all types of industrial applications that involve moving conveying pumping compressing or extracting solids liquids or gases 2 4 2 Features quality service Features Quality 20 From configuration to operation SINAMICS G130 chassis units are easy to use and offer the following benefits e Compact modular and service friendly design e Straightforward planning and design thanks to the
364. unction diagrams describing the operating principle The diagrams are arranged in accordance with the chapters in the operating instructions The page numbers 9xx describe the functionality in the following chapter At certain points in this chapter reference is made to function diagrams with a 4 digit number These are stored on the CD in the SINAMICS G List Manual which provides experienced users with detailed descriptions of all the functions Inverter chassis units 238 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 2 Drive functions 9 2 Drive functions 9 2 1 Motor identification and automatic speed controller optimization Description Inverter chassis units Two motor identification options which are based on each other are available e Standstill measurement with p1910 motor identification e Rotating measurement with p1960 speed controller optimization These can be selected more easily via p1900 p1900 2 selects the standstill measurement motor not rotating p1900 1 also activates the rotating measurement p1900 1 sets p1910 1 and p1960 in accordance with the current control type p1300 Parameter p1960 is set depending on p1300 e p1960 1 if p1300 20 or 22 encoderless control e p1960 2 if p1300 21 or 23 control with encoder The measurements parameterized using p1900 are started in the following sequence after the corresponding drive has been
365. uring load monitoring the current speed torque curve is compared with the programmed speed torque curve p2182 p2190 If the current value is outside the programmed tolerance bandwidth a fault or alarm is triggered depending on parameter p2181 The fault or alarm message can be delayed by means of parameter p2192 to prevent false alarms caused by brief transitional states Torque Nm p1082 e p2189 tiini lt lt o ooo p2190 iii lt p2187 tiii Torque p2188 Actual value p2185 p2186 Speed p2183 ip2184 rpm p2192 m p2192 lt I r2198 Bit11 gl Figure 9 15 Load monitoring p2181 1 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 283 Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 3 Extended functions Commissioning The extended monitoring functions function module can be activated by running the commissioning wizard Parameter r0108 17 indicates whether it has been activated Function diagram FD 8010 Speed messages FD 8013 Load monitoring Parameters e p2150 Hysteresis speed 3 e p2151 Cl Speed setpoint e p2161 Speed threshold 3 e p2181 Load monitoring response e p2182 Load monitoring speed threshold 1 e p2183 Load monitoring speed threshold 2 e p2184 Load monitoring speed threshold 3 e p2185 Load monitoring speed threshold 1 upper e p2190 Load monitoring speed threshold 3 lower e p2192 Lo
366. ve been reset to the factory settings initial commissioning needs to be carried out Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 129 Commissioning 5 7 Parameter reset to factory settings Inverter chassis units 130 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 1 Chapter content This chapter provides information on the following e Basic information about the drive system e Selecting command sources via PROFldrive TM31 terminal block CU320 terminal block e Specifying setpoints via PROFldrive Analog inputs Motorized potentiometer Fixed setpoints Diagnostics Faults alarms Monitoring Functions Orale Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 131 Operation 6 2 General information about command and setpoint sources 6 2 General information about command and setpoint sources Description Four default settings are available for selecting the command sources and four for selecting the setpoint sources for the SINAMICS G130 Command sources e Profidrive e TM31 terminals e CU terminals e Profidrive TM31 Setpoint sources e Profidrive e Analog inputs e Motorized potentiometer e Fixed setpoints The various assignments are explained in the following sections Note Make sure that the default settings you choose during commissioning are compatible with the system configuration for more information see Commi
367. ve unit Ey Project Device Sinamics X fla SINAMICS_G130 Type 6130 y Version 2 5 v Bus addr 34 z Name SINAMICS_G1 301 Sinamics tutorial Insert Cancel Figure 5 10 Inserting the drive unit 10 Click Continue gt A project summary is displayed Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A 89 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Project Wizard Starter E 2 4 Introduction Create PG PC Set Insert drive Summary new project interface units The following settings have been selected Project name Project Storage location C Siemens Step S proj Interface PC Adapter PROFIBUS Drive units SINAMICS_G130 SINAMICS_G 130 Addr 33 Cancel Figure 5 11 Summary 11 Click Complete to finish creating a new drive unit project Inverter chassis units 90 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER 5 3 2 Configuring the drive unit In the project navigator open the component that contains your drive unit Per STARTER Project Project Edit Target system View Options Window Help DSE E JP ole e Peal fr alale for EE EA E Project gt Insert single drive unit fla SINAMICS_G130 Configure driwe unit gt Overview gt Configuration gt Topology Control_Unit Project Press F1 to open Help display Offline mode NUM h Figure 5 12 Pr
368. ves The OFF3 signal is to be connected to two drives via terminal DI 2 on the Control Unit Each drive has a binector input 1 OFF3 and 2 OFF3 The two signals are processed via an AND gate to STW1 2 OFF3 BO Binector output Bl Binector input Signal source Signal sink Drive 1 24V DI 2 p0849 C 722 2 Figure 6 8 Connection of OFF3 to several drives example BICO interconnections to other drives The following parameters are available for BICO interconnections to other drives e r9490 Number of BICO interconnections to other drives e r9491 0 15 BI CI of BICO interconnections to other drives e r9492 0 15 BO CO of BICO interconnections to other drives e p9493 0 15 Reset BICO interconnections to other drives Inverter chassis units 145 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 3 Basic information about the drive system Binector connector converters and connector binector converters Binector connector converter e Several digital signals are converted to a 32 bit integer double word or to a 16 bit integer word e p2080 0 15 Bl PROFIdrive PZD send bit serial Connector binector converter e A 32 bit integer double word or a 16 bit integer word is converted to individual digital signals e p2099 0 1 Cl PROF Idrive PZD selection receive bit serial Fixed values for interconnection using BICO technology The following connector outputs are available for interconnecting any fixed value se
369. w Standard for STEF 7 Interface Parameter Assignment Used TCP IP Auto gt Broadcom NetXtreme Gig Properties HA Serial cable PPI a Diagnostics TCP IP gt Broadcom Netxtreme Gic TCP IP gt NdisWanlp ow TCP IP Auto gt Broadcom Netxtrel y 4 M a Assigning Parameters for the lE PG access to your NDIS CPs with TCP IP Protocol RFC 1006 Interfaces Add Remove Select Figure 6 25 Set the PG PC interface Assignment of the IP address and the name for the PROFINET interface of the drive unit Use the STARTER to assign an IP address and a name to the PROFINET interface e g CBE20 Requirement e Connect the direct Ethernet cable from the PG PC to the PROFINET interface of the CU320 Control Unit e Switch on Control Unit CU320 The accessible nodes must be searched in the STARTER e Project gt Accessible nodes Subsequently the nodes found are displayed in the interactive screen Inverter chassis units 178 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Operation 6 7 PROFINET IO P Accessible nodes TCP IP Auto gt Broadcom NetXtreme Gig Sele E 3 Accessible nodes 25 Bus node address 0 0 0 0 name Activate extended slot search Do you want to accept the selected drive units into the project Select drive units Refresh F5 Figure 6 26 STARTER gt Accessible nodes The selected node is edited by selecting the field for the node with the right
370. which synchronization should be carried out This done by setting the synchronization setpoint p3809 A phase and frequency difference of around zero is produced when closing contactor K2 by braking the motor in the brief period in which both contactors are open In order for the function to run correctly the moment of inertia must be sufficient Due to the expense of determining the synchronization setpoint p3809 the decoupling restrictor is not needed The flying restart function must be activated p1200 1 Inverter chassis units 276 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Functions monitoring and protective functions 9 3 Extended functions Line supply IN Converter Protective device Interlock to prevent simultaneous closing Figure 9 12 Example circuit for bypass with synchronizer without degree of overlapping Activation The bypass with synchronizer without degree of overlapping p1260 2 function can only be activated using a control signal It cannot be activated using a speed threshold or a fault Parameterization Once the bypass with synchronizer without degree of overlapping p1260 2 function has been activated the following parameters must be set Table 9 6 Parameter settings for bypass function with synchronizer without degree of overlapping Parameters Description p1266 Control signal setting when p1267 0 1 p1267 0 1 Bypass function is initi
371. wise Vector p2080 15 Bl PROFIBUS send status word 1 Vector r2129 15 No warning of power unit Vector temperature overload p2088 PROFIBUS Invert status word Vector B800h Vector p2128 14 Select fault alarm code for trigger Vector 7910 Alarm motor overtemperature Vector p2128 15 Select fault alarm code for trigger Vector 5000 Warning of power unit Vector temperature overload p2153 Time constant revolutions actual Vector 20 ms Vector value filter p7003 Winding system Vector 1 Separate winding systems Vector Inverter chassis units 372 Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Appendix Parameter macro p0700 1 PROFIdrive 70001 A 2 Parameter macros This macro is used to set the PROFIdrive interface as the default command source Table A 2 Parameter macro p0700 1 PROFIdrive Sink Source Parameters Description DO Parameters Description DO po840 0 ON OFF1 Vector r2090 0 PZD 1 bit 0 Vector p0844 0 No OFF2_1 Vector r2090 1 PZD 1 bit 1 Vector p0845 0 No OFF2_2 Vector r0722 4 CU DI4 CU pos48 0 No OFF3_1 Vector r2090 2 PZD 1 bit 2 Vector p0849 0 No OFF3_2 Vector r0722 5 CU DI5 CU p0806 Inhibit LOCAL mode Vector 0 p0810 Switchover CDS bit 0 Vector 0 p0852 Enable operation Vector r2090 3 PZD 1 bit 3 Vector p0854 Control from PLC Vector r2090 10 PZD 1 bit 10 Vector p0922 Profibus PZD
372. you want to enter the optional data 16 Enter the motor data see motor type plate 17 If necessary activate Do you want to enter the mechanical data Template ame Comment gt vo ont 00 108 00 10 850 50 90 3 1500 0JreM Non ventilat V Do you want to enter the equivalent circuit diagram data Deselection of the optional or equivalent circuit diagram data resets these irrevocably Motor identification is required when the equivalent circuit diagram data is deselected Motor identification is optional when the equivalent circuit diagram data is entered Cancel Help 18 If necessary activate Do you want to enter the equivalent circuit diagram data 100 Inverter chassis units Operating Instructions 07 07 A5E00331449A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Note Click Template to open another selection screenform where you can choose the motor used in your application from a long list of standard motor types Select a motor from the list to enter the data stored in the system for that motor automatically in the data fields NOTICE You should only check the Do you want to enter equivalent circuit diagram data box if the data sheet with equivalent circuit diagram data is available If any data is missing an error message will be output when the system attempts to load the drive project to the target system 19 Click Continue gt Inve

Operating Instructions

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents